Relion® 650 series

Transformer protection RET650 ANSI

Technical Manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 504 129-UUS
Issued: June 2012
Revision: B
Product version: 1.2

© Copyright 2012 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

ABB Inc.
1021 Main Campus Drive
Raleigh, NC 27606, USA
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8

ABB Inc.
3450 Harvester Road
Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8

ABB Mexico S.A. de C.V.

Paseo de las Americas No. 31 Lomas Verdes 3a secc.
53125, Naucalpan, Estado De Mexico, MEXICO
Phone: (+1) 440-585-7804, menu option #8
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would
create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal
injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the
equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures
are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product
standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is
designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and
ANSI C37.90. The DNP protocol implementation in the IED conforms to "DNP3
Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) Certification Procedure Subset Level 2", available
at www.dnp.org .
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction..........................................................................27
This manual............................................................................................27
Intended audience..................................................................................27
Product documentation...........................................................................28
Product documentation set................................................................28
Document revision history.................................................................29
Related documents............................................................................30
Symbols and conventions.......................................................................30
Symbols.............................................................................................30
Document conventions......................................................................31

Section 2 Available functions..............................................................33

Main protection functions........................................................................33
Back-up protection functions..................................................................33
Control and monitoring functions............................................................34
Communication.......................................................................................37
Basic IED functions.................................................................................39

Section 3 Analog inputs.......................................................................41

Introduction.............................................................................................41
Operation principle..................................................................................41
Settings...................................................................................................42

Section 4 Binary input and output modules.........................................47

Binary input.............................................................................................47
Binary input debounce filter...............................................................47
Oscillation filter..................................................................................47
Settings..............................................................................................48
Setting parameters for binary input modules................................48
Setting parameters for communication module............................49

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI................................53

Local HMI screen behaviour...................................................................53
Identification......................................................................................53
Settings..............................................................................................53
Local HMI signals...................................................................................54
Identification......................................................................................54

1
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block...................................................................................54
Signals...............................................................................................54
Basic part for LED indication module......................................................55
Identification......................................................................................55
Function block...................................................................................55
Signals...............................................................................................55
Settings..............................................................................................56
LCD part for HMI function keys control module......................................57
Identification......................................................................................57
Function block...................................................................................57
Signals...............................................................................................57
Settings..............................................................................................57
Operation principle..................................................................................58
Local HMI...........................................................................................58
Display..........................................................................................58
LEDs.............................................................................................61
Keypad.........................................................................................61
LED....................................................................................................63
Functionality.................................................................................63
Status LEDs..................................................................................63
Indication LEDs............................................................................63
Function keys.....................................................................................72
Functionality.................................................................................72
Operation principle.......................................................................72

Section 6 Differential protection..........................................................75

Transformer differential protection..........................................................75
Functionality ......................................................................................75
Transformer differential protection, two winding T2WPDIF
(87T)..................................................................................................76
Identification.................................................................................76
Function block..............................................................................77
Signals..........................................................................................77
Settings.........................................................................................78
Monitored data..............................................................................80
Transformer differential protection, three winding T3WPDIF
(87T)..................................................................................................80
Identification.................................................................................80
Function block..............................................................................81
Signals..........................................................................................81

2
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings.........................................................................................82
Monitored data..............................................................................84
Operation principle............................................................................84
Function calculation principles......................................................85
Fundamental frequency differential currents................................86
Differential current alarm..............................................................91
Bias current..................................................................................92
Elimination of zero sequence currents.........................................92
Restrained and unrestrained limits of the differential
protection......................................................................................93
Fundamental frequency negative sequence differential
currents.........................................................................................95
Internal/external fault discriminator...............................................97
Unrestrained, and sensitive negative sequence protections......101
Instantaneous differential currents.............................................103
Harmonic and waveform block criteria.......................................103
Switch onto fault feature.............................................................104
Logic diagram.............................................................................105
Technical data.................................................................................112
Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF (87N).......112
Identification....................................................................................112
Functionality....................................................................................113
Function block.................................................................................113
Signals.............................................................................................113
Settings............................................................................................114
Monitored data.................................................................................115
Principle of operation.......................................................................115
Fundamental principles of the restricted ground fault
protection....................................................................................115
Operate and restrain characteristic............................................118
Calculation of differential current and bias current.....................118
Detection of external ground faults............................................119
Algorithm of the restricted ground fault protection......................121
Technical data.................................................................................122
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87).....................122
Identification....................................................................................122
Introduction......................................................................................122
Function block.................................................................................123
Signals.............................................................................................123
Settings............................................................................................124

3
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Monitored data.................................................................................124
Operation principle..........................................................................124
Logic diagram.............................................................................124
Technical data.................................................................................125

Section 7 Current protection..............................................................127

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
PHPIOC (50).........................................................................................127
Identification ...................................................................................127
Functionality....................................................................................127
Function block.................................................................................127
Signals.............................................................................................127
Settings............................................................................................128
Monitored data.................................................................................128
Operation principle..........................................................................128
Technical data.................................................................................129
Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output OC4PTOC
(51/67)..................................................................................................129
Identification ...................................................................................129
Functionality....................................................................................129
Function block.................................................................................130
Signals.............................................................................................130
Settings............................................................................................131
Monitored data.................................................................................133
Operation principle..........................................................................134
Technical data.................................................................................138
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N).............139
Identification ...................................................................................139
Functionality....................................................................................139
Function block.................................................................................139
Signals.............................................................................................140
Settings............................................................................................140
Monitored data.................................................................................140
Operation principle..........................................................................140
Technical data.................................................................................141
Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero, negative sequence
direction EF4PTOC (51N/67N).............................................................141
Identification ...................................................................................141
Functionality....................................................................................142
Function block.................................................................................142
Signals.............................................................................................143

4
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings............................................................................................144
Monitored data.................................................................................146
Operation principle..........................................................................147
Operating quantity within the function........................................147
Internal polarizing.......................................................................148
Operating directional quantity within the function.......................151
External polarizing for ground-fault function...............................152
Base quantities within the protection..........................................152
Internal ground-fault protection structure....................................152
Four residual overcurrent steps..................................................153
Directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison function...................................................................154
Technical data.................................................................................159
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR (49)...........160
Identification ...................................................................................160
Functionality....................................................................................160
Function block.................................................................................160
Signals.............................................................................................161
Settings............................................................................................161
Monitored data.................................................................................162
Operation principle..........................................................................163
Technical data.................................................................................166
Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF
(50BF)...................................................................................................166
Identification....................................................................................166
Functionality....................................................................................166
Function block.................................................................................167
Signals.............................................................................................167
Settings............................................................................................168
Monitored data.................................................................................168
Operation principle..........................................................................169
Technical data.................................................................................170
Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD (52PD).....................................171
Identification ...................................................................................171
Functionality....................................................................................171
Function block.................................................................................172
Signals.............................................................................................172
Settings............................................................................................172
Monitored data.................................................................................173
Operation principle..........................................................................173

5
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker.........................175

Unsymmetrical current detection................................................176
Technical data.................................................................................176
Directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP/GUPPDUP
(32/37)..................................................................................................176
Functionality....................................................................................176
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)..........................177
Identification...............................................................................177
Function block............................................................................177
Signals........................................................................................178
Settings.......................................................................................178
Monitored data............................................................................179
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37).........................179
Identification...............................................................................180
Function block............................................................................180
Signals........................................................................................180
Settings.......................................................................................181
Monitored data............................................................................182
Operation principle..........................................................................182
Low pass filtering........................................................................184
Technical data.................................................................................185
Negative sequence based overcurrent function DNSPTOC (46).........186
Identification....................................................................................186
Functionality....................................................................................186
Function block.................................................................................186
Signals.............................................................................................187
Settings............................................................................................187
Monitored data.................................................................................189
Operation principle..........................................................................189
Technical data.................................................................................189

Section 8 Voltage protection.............................................................191

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)................................191
Identification....................................................................................191
Functionality....................................................................................191
Function block.................................................................................191
Signals.............................................................................................192
Settings............................................................................................192
Monitored data.................................................................................193
Operation principle..........................................................................193

6
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Measurement principle...............................................................194
Time delay..................................................................................194
Blocking......................................................................................195
Design........................................................................................195
Technical data.................................................................................197
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59).................................197
Identification....................................................................................197
Functionality....................................................................................197
Function block.................................................................................198
Signals.............................................................................................198
Settings............................................................................................199
Monitored data.................................................................................200
Operation principle..........................................................................200
Measurement principle...............................................................201
Time delay..................................................................................201
Blocking......................................................................................203
Design........................................................................................203
Technical data.................................................................................205
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)...............205
Identification....................................................................................205
Functionality....................................................................................205
Function block.................................................................................206
Signals.............................................................................................206
Settings............................................................................................207
Monitored data.................................................................................207
Operation principle..........................................................................207
Measurement principle...............................................................208
Time delay..................................................................................208
Blocking......................................................................................209
Design........................................................................................209
Technical data.................................................................................211
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)............................................211
Identification....................................................................................211
Functionality....................................................................................212
Function block.................................................................................212
Signals.............................................................................................212
Settings............................................................................................213
Monitored data.................................................................................213
Operation principle..........................................................................214
Measured voltage.......................................................................216

7
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Operate time of the overexcitation protection.............................216

Cooling.......................................................................................219
Overexcitation protection function measurands.........................219
Overexcitation alarm...................................................................220
Logic diagram.............................................................................220
Technical data.................................................................................221

Section 9 Frequency protection.........................................................223

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81).............................................223
Identification....................................................................................223
Functionality....................................................................................223
Function block.................................................................................223
Signals.............................................................................................224
Settings............................................................................................224
Monitored data.................................................................................224
Operation principle..........................................................................224
Measurement principle...............................................................225
Time delay..................................................................................225
Blocking......................................................................................225
Design........................................................................................226
Technical data.................................................................................226
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)...............................................227
Identification....................................................................................227
Functionality....................................................................................227
Function block.................................................................................227
Signals.............................................................................................227
Settings............................................................................................228
Monitored data.................................................................................228
Operation principle..........................................................................228
Measurement principle...............................................................228
Time delay..................................................................................229
Blocking......................................................................................229
Design........................................................................................229
Technical data.................................................................................230
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)............................230
Identification....................................................................................231
Functionality....................................................................................231
Function block.................................................................................231
Signals.............................................................................................231
Settings............................................................................................232

8
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Operation principle..........................................................................232
Measurement principle...............................................................232
Time delay..................................................................................233
Design........................................................................................234
Technical data.................................................................................234

Section 10 Secondary system supervision..........................................235

Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR...................................235
Identification....................................................................................235
Functionality....................................................................................235
Function block.................................................................................235
Signals.............................................................................................235
Settings............................................................................................236
Operation principle..........................................................................236
Technical data.................................................................................237

Section 11 Control...............................................................................239
Apparatus control..................................................................................239
Functionality....................................................................................239
Bay control QCBAY.........................................................................239
Identification ..............................................................................239
Functionality...............................................................................239
Function block............................................................................240
Signals........................................................................................240
Settings.......................................................................................240
Local remote LOCREM...................................................................241
Identification ..............................................................................241
Functionality...............................................................................241
Function block............................................................................241
Signals........................................................................................241
Settings.......................................................................................242
Local remote control LOCREMCTRL..............................................242
Identification ..............................................................................242
Functionality...............................................................................242
Function block............................................................................242
Signals........................................................................................243
Settings.......................................................................................243
Operation principle..........................................................................244
Bay control QCBAY....................................................................244
Local remote/Local remote control LOCREM/
LOCREMCTRL...........................................................................245

9
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Voltage control .....................................................................................246

Functionality....................................................................................246
Automatic voltage control for tapchanger, parallel control
TR8ATCC (90).................................................................................247
Identification...............................................................................247
Function block............................................................................248
Signals........................................................................................248
Settings.......................................................................................251
Monitored data............................................................................254
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC (84)................................................................................254
Identification...............................................................................255
Function block............................................................................255
Signals........................................................................................255
Settings.......................................................................................257
Monitored data............................................................................257
Operation principle..........................................................................258
Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR8ATCC (90).........258
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC (84)...........................................................................261
Connection between TR8ATCC (90) and TCMYLTC (84).........265
Technical data.................................................................................268
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation
SLGGIO................................................................................................269
Identification....................................................................................269
Functionality....................................................................................269
Function block.................................................................................270
Signals.............................................................................................270
Settings............................................................................................271
Monitored data.................................................................................272
Operation principle..........................................................................272
Selector mini switch VSGGIO...............................................................273
Identification....................................................................................273
Functionality....................................................................................273
Function block.................................................................................273
Signals.............................................................................................273
Settings............................................................................................274
Operation principle..........................................................................274
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO..................275
Identification....................................................................................275

10
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Functionality....................................................................................275
Function block.................................................................................276
Signals.............................................................................................276
Settings............................................................................................276
Operation principle..........................................................................276
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO...............................277
Identification....................................................................................277
Functionality....................................................................................277
Function block.................................................................................277
Signals.............................................................................................277
Settings............................................................................................278
Operation principle..........................................................................279
Automation bits AUTOBITS..................................................................279
Identification....................................................................................279
Functionality....................................................................................279
Function block.................................................................................280
Signals.............................................................................................280
Settings............................................................................................281
Operation principle..........................................................................282
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD............................282
Functionality....................................................................................282
Function block.................................................................................282
Signals.............................................................................................283
Settings............................................................................................283
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD.............................283
Functionality....................................................................................283
Function block.................................................................................283
Signals.............................................................................................284
Settings............................................................................................284
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD.......................................................................................284
Functionality....................................................................................284
Function block.................................................................................285
Signals.............................................................................................285
Settings............................................................................................285
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD.......286
Functionality....................................................................................286
Function block.................................................................................286
Signals.............................................................................................286
Settings............................................................................................287

11
Technical Manual
Table of contents

IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103

I103POSCMD.......................................................................................287
Functionality....................................................................................287
Function block.................................................................................287
Signals.............................................................................................287
Settings............................................................................................288

Section 12 Logic..................................................................................289
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC (94).......................289
Identification....................................................................................289
Functionality....................................................................................289
Function block.................................................................................289
Signals.............................................................................................290
Settings............................................................................................290
Operation principle..........................................................................290
Technical data.................................................................................291
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO..................................................................291
Identification....................................................................................291
Functionality....................................................................................292
Function block.................................................................................292
Signals.............................................................................................293
Settings............................................................................................294
Operation principle..........................................................................294
Configurable logic blocks......................................................................296
Standard configurable logic blocks..................................................296
Functionality...............................................................................296
OR function block.......................................................................297
Inverter function block INVERTER.............................................298
PULSETIMER function block .....................................................298
Controllable gate function block GATE.......................................299
Exclusive OR function block XOR..............................................300
Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY....................................301
Timer function block TIMERSET................................................302
AND function block ....................................................................303
Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY..........................304
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY..................306
Technical data.................................................................................307
Fixed signals FXDSIGN........................................................................308
Identification....................................................................................308
Functionality....................................................................................308

12
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block.................................................................................308
Signals.............................................................................................308
Settings............................................................................................309
Operation principle..........................................................................309
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I.................................................309
Identification....................................................................................309
Functionality....................................................................................309
Function block.................................................................................310
Signals.............................................................................................310
Settings............................................................................................311
Monitored data.................................................................................311
Operation principle..........................................................................311
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation
B16IFCVI..............................................................................................311
Identification....................................................................................311
Functionality....................................................................................311
Function block.................................................................................312
Signals.............................................................................................312
Settings............................................................................................313
Monitored data.................................................................................313
Operation principle..........................................................................313
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A...............................................313
Identification....................................................................................313
Functionality....................................................................................313
Function block.................................................................................314
Signals.............................................................................................314
Settings............................................................................................315
Operation principle..........................................................................315
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
IB16FCVB.............................................................................................315
Identification....................................................................................315
Functionality....................................................................................315
Function block.................................................................................316
Signals.............................................................................................316
Settings............................................................................................317
Operation principle..........................................................................317

Section 13 Monitoring..........................................................................319
Measurements......................................................................................319
Functionality....................................................................................319

13
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Measurements CVMMXN................................................................320
Identification ..............................................................................320
Function block............................................................................321
Signals........................................................................................321
Settings.......................................................................................322
Monitored data............................................................................325
Phase current measurement CMMXU.............................................326
Identification ..............................................................................326
Function block............................................................................326
Signals........................................................................................326
Settings.......................................................................................327
Monitored data............................................................................328
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU.................................328
Identification ..............................................................................328
Function block............................................................................328
Signals........................................................................................329
Settings.......................................................................................330
Monitored data............................................................................330
Current sequence component measurement CMSQI.....................331
Identification ..............................................................................331
Function block............................................................................331
Signals........................................................................................331
Settings.......................................................................................332
Monitored data............................................................................333
Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI........................................334
Identification ..............................................................................334
Function block............................................................................334
Signals........................................................................................334
Settings.......................................................................................335
Monitored data............................................................................336
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU..............................337
Identification ..............................................................................337
Function block............................................................................337
Signals........................................................................................337
Settings.......................................................................................338
Monitored data............................................................................339
Operation principle..........................................................................339
Measurement supervision..........................................................339
Measurements CVMMXN...........................................................343
Phase current measurement CMMXU........................................348

14
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements

VMMXU, VNMMXU....................................................................349
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI........................................................................................349
Technical data.................................................................................349
Event Counter CNTGGIO.....................................................................350
Identification....................................................................................350
Functionality....................................................................................350
Function block.................................................................................350
Signals.............................................................................................351
Settings............................................................................................351
Monitored data.................................................................................351
Operation principle..........................................................................352
Reporting....................................................................................352
Technical data.................................................................................352
Disturbance report................................................................................353
Functionality....................................................................................353
Disturbance report DRPRDRE........................................................353
Identification...............................................................................353
Function block............................................................................354
Signals........................................................................................354
Settings.......................................................................................354
Monitored data............................................................................355
Measured values........................................................................358
Analog input signals AxRADR.........................................................359
Identification...............................................................................359
Function block............................................................................359
Signals........................................................................................359
Settings.......................................................................................360
Analog input signals A4RADR.........................................................364
Identification...............................................................................364
Function block............................................................................364
Signals........................................................................................365
Settings.......................................................................................365
Binary input signals BxRBDR..........................................................369
Identification...............................................................................369
Function block............................................................................369
Signals........................................................................................370
Settings.......................................................................................370
Operation principle..........................................................................376

15
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Disturbance information..............................................................378
Indications .................................................................................378
Event recorder ...........................................................................378
Sequential of events ..................................................................378
Trip value recorder ....................................................................379
Disturbance recorder .................................................................379
Time tagging...............................................................................379
Recording times..........................................................................379
Analog signals............................................................................380
Binary signals.............................................................................382
Trigger signals............................................................................382
Post Retrigger.............................................................................383
Technical data.................................................................................384
Indications.............................................................................................384
Functionality....................................................................................384
Function block.................................................................................385
Signals.............................................................................................385
Input signals...............................................................................385
Operation principle..........................................................................385
Technical data.................................................................................386
Event recorder .....................................................................................386
Functionality....................................................................................386
Function block.................................................................................387
Signals.............................................................................................387
Input signals...............................................................................387
Operation principle..........................................................................387
Technical data.................................................................................388
Sequential of events.............................................................................388
Functionality....................................................................................388
Function block.................................................................................388
Signals.............................................................................................388
Input signals...............................................................................388
Operation principle..........................................................................388
Technical data.................................................................................389
Trip value recorder................................................................................389
Functionality....................................................................................389
Function block.................................................................................389
Signals.............................................................................................390
Input signals...............................................................................390
Operation principle..........................................................................390

16
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Technical data.................................................................................390
Disturbance recorder............................................................................391
Functionality....................................................................................391
Function block.................................................................................391
Signals.............................................................................................391
Settings............................................................................................391
Operation principle..........................................................................391
Memory and storage...................................................................392
Technical data.................................................................................394
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO..................394
Identification....................................................................................394
Functionality....................................................................................394
Function block.................................................................................394
Signals.............................................................................................395
Settings............................................................................................395
Operation principle..........................................................................395
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs
SP16GGIO............................................................................................395
Identification....................................................................................395
Functionality....................................................................................395
Function block.................................................................................396
Signals.............................................................................................396
Settings............................................................................................397
MonitoredData.................................................................................397
Operation principle..........................................................................398
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO..................398
Identification....................................................................................398
Functionality....................................................................................398
Function block.................................................................................398
Signals.............................................................................................399
Settings............................................................................................399
Monitored data.................................................................................400
Operation principle..........................................................................400
Measured value expander block MVEXP.............................................400
Identification....................................................................................400
Functionality....................................................................................400
Function block.................................................................................401
Signals.............................................................................................401
Settings............................................................................................401
Operation principle..........................................................................401

17
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT...............................................402

Identification....................................................................................402
Function block.................................................................................402
Functionality....................................................................................402
Signals.............................................................................................403
Settings............................................................................................403
Measured values.............................................................................404
Monitored Data................................................................................404
Operation principle .........................................................................404
Technical data.................................................................................405
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63)....................................405
Identification....................................................................................405
Functionality....................................................................................406
Function block.................................................................................406
Signals.............................................................................................406
SSIMG InputSignals...................................................................406
SSIMG OutputSignals................................................................407
Settings............................................................................................407
SSIMG Settings..........................................................................407
Operation principle..........................................................................408
Technical data.................................................................................408
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71)..................................408
Identification....................................................................................408
Functionality....................................................................................409
Function block.................................................................................409
Signals.............................................................................................409
SSIML InputSignals....................................................................409
SSIML OutputSignals.................................................................410
Settings............................................................................................410
SSIML Settings...........................................................................410
Operation principle..........................................................................411
Technical data.................................................................................411
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR........................................411
Identification....................................................................................411
Functionality....................................................................................412
Function block.................................................................................412
Signals.............................................................................................412
Settings............................................................................................413
Monitored data.................................................................................414
Operation principle..........................................................................415

18
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Circuit breaker status..................................................................416

Circuit breaker operation monitoring..........................................417
Breaker contact travel time.........................................................418
Operation counter.......................................................................420
Accumulation of Iyt......................................................................420
Remaining life of the circuit breaker...........................................422
Circuit breaker spring charged indication...................................423
Gas pressure supervision...........................................................424
Technical data.................................................................................425
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS......................................425
Functionality....................................................................................425
Function block.................................................................................426
Signals.............................................................................................427
Settings............................................................................................427
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR.....................................................................................428
Functionality....................................................................................428
Function block.................................................................................428
Signals.............................................................................................428
Settings............................................................................................429
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR.................429
Functionality....................................................................................429
Function block.................................................................................430
Signals.............................................................................................430
Settings............................................................................................430
Function status ground-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF...................430
Functionality....................................................................................430
Function block.................................................................................431
Signals.............................................................................................431
Settings............................................................................................431
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT......................................................................................431
Functionality....................................................................................431
Function block.................................................................................432
Signals.............................................................................................432
Settings............................................................................................433
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED..............................................434
Functionality....................................................................................434
Function block.................................................................................434
Signals.............................................................................................434

19
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Settings............................................................................................434
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV.........................435
Functionality....................................................................................435
Function block.................................................................................435
Signals.............................................................................................435
Settings............................................................................................435
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF.....436
Functionality....................................................................................436
Function block.................................................................................436
Signals.............................................................................................437
Settings............................................................................................437

Section 14 Metering............................................................................439
Pulse counter PCGGIO........................................................................439
Identification....................................................................................439
Functionality....................................................................................439
Function block.................................................................................439
Signals.............................................................................................440
Settings............................................................................................440
Monitored data.................................................................................441
Operation principle..........................................................................441
Technical data.................................................................................442
Energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR..........................443
Identification....................................................................................443
Functionality....................................................................................443
Function block.................................................................................443
Signals.............................................................................................444
Settings............................................................................................445
Monitored data.................................................................................446
Operation principle..........................................................................446
Technical data.................................................................................447

Section 15 Station communication......................................................449

DNP3 protocol......................................................................................449
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol ..............................................449
Identification....................................................................................449
Functionality....................................................................................449
Communication interfaces and protocols........................................450
Settings............................................................................................450
Technical data.................................................................................451
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking........................451

20
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Identification....................................................................................451
Function block.................................................................................452
Signals.............................................................................................452
Settings............................................................................................454
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV................................................454
Identification....................................................................................454
Function block.................................................................................455
Signals.............................................................................................455
Settings............................................................................................456
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive
GOOSEVCTRCONF.............................................................................457
Identification....................................................................................457
Functionality....................................................................................457
Settings............................................................................................457
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRRCV................458
Identification....................................................................................458
Functionality....................................................................................458
Function block.................................................................................458
Signals.............................................................................................458
Operation principle .........................................................................459
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV....................................................................................459
Identification....................................................................................459
Functionality....................................................................................460
Function block.................................................................................460
Signals.............................................................................................460
Settings............................................................................................460
Operation principle .........................................................................460
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV...................................................................................461
Identification....................................................................................461
Functionality....................................................................................461
Function block.................................................................................461
Signals.............................................................................................462
Settings............................................................................................462
Operation principle .........................................................................462
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV....................................................................................463
Identification....................................................................................463
Functionality....................................................................................463

21
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block.................................................................................463
Signals.............................................................................................463
Settings............................................................................................464
Operation principle .........................................................................464
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV....................................................................................464
Identification....................................................................................464
Functionality....................................................................................465
Function block.................................................................................465
Signals.............................................................................................465
Settings............................................................................................465
Operation principle .........................................................................465
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol...........................................466
Functionality....................................................................................466
Settings............................................................................................467

Section 16 Basic IED functions...........................................................469

Self supervision with internal event list ................................................469
Functionality....................................................................................469
Internal error signals INTERRSIG...................................................469
Identification...............................................................................469
Function block............................................................................469
Signals........................................................................................470
Settings.......................................................................................470
Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST.................................................470
Identification...............................................................................470
Settings.......................................................................................470
Operation principle..........................................................................470
Internal signals...........................................................................473
Run-time model..........................................................................474
Technical data.................................................................................475
Time synchronization............................................................................476
Functionality....................................................................................476
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN.........................................476
Identification...............................................................................476
Settings.......................................................................................476
Time synchronization via SNTP......................................................476
Identification...............................................................................476
Settings.......................................................................................477
Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN................................477

22
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Identification...............................................................................477
Settings.......................................................................................478
Time system, summer time ends DSTEND.....................................478
Identification...............................................................................478
Settings.......................................................................................479
Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE....................................................479
Identification...............................................................................479
Settings.......................................................................................479
Time synchronization via IRIG-B.....................................................480
Identification...............................................................................480
Settings.......................................................................................480
Operation principle..........................................................................480
General concepts.......................................................................480
Real-time clock (RTC) operation................................................482
Synchronization alternatives.......................................................483
Technical data.................................................................................484
Parameter setting group handling.........................................................484
Functionality....................................................................................484
Setting group handling SETGRPS..................................................485
Identification...............................................................................485
Settings.......................................................................................485
Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP..............................................485
Identification...............................................................................485
Function block............................................................................485
Signals........................................................................................486
Settings.......................................................................................486
Operation principle..........................................................................486
Test mode functionality TESTMODE....................................................487
Identification....................................................................................487
Functionality....................................................................................488
Function block.................................................................................488
Signals.............................................................................................488
Settings............................................................................................489
Operation principle..........................................................................489
Change lock function CHNGLCK .........................................................490
Identification....................................................................................490
Functionality....................................................................................490
Function block.................................................................................491
Signals.............................................................................................491
Settings............................................................................................491

23
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Operation principle..........................................................................491
IED identifiers TERMINALID.................................................................492
Identification....................................................................................492
Functionality....................................................................................492
Settings............................................................................................492
Product information ..............................................................................493
Identification....................................................................................493
Functionality....................................................................................493
Settings............................................................................................493
Primary system values PRIMVAL.........................................................494
Identification....................................................................................494
Functionality....................................................................................494
Settings............................................................................................494
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI....................................................494
Functionality....................................................................................494
Identification....................................................................................495
Function block.................................................................................495
Signals.............................................................................................496
Settings............................................................................................497
Operation principle .........................................................................499
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM....................................................503
Identification....................................................................................503
Functionality....................................................................................503
Function block.................................................................................503
Signals.............................................................................................503
Settings............................................................................................504
Operation principle..........................................................................504
Global base values GBASVAL.............................................................504
Identification....................................................................................505
Functionality....................................................................................505
Settings............................................................................................505
Authority check ATHCHCK...................................................................505
Identification....................................................................................505
Functionality....................................................................................506
Settings............................................................................................506
Operation principle..........................................................................506
Authorization handling in the IED...............................................507
Authority status ATHSTAT....................................................................507
Identification....................................................................................507
Functionality....................................................................................508

24
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block.................................................................................508
Signals.............................................................................................508
Settings............................................................................................508
Operation principle..........................................................................508
Denial of service...................................................................................509
Functionality....................................................................................509
Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT.........509
Identification...............................................................................509
Function block............................................................................509
Signals........................................................................................509
Settings.......................................................................................510
Monitored data............................................................................510
Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1........510
Identification...............................................................................510
Function block............................................................................511
Signals........................................................................................511
Settings.......................................................................................511
Monitored data............................................................................511
Operation principle..........................................................................512

Section 17 IED physical connections..................................................513

Protective ground connections.............................................................513
Inputs....................................................................................................514
Measuring inputs.............................................................................514
Auxiliary supply voltage input..........................................................514
Binary inputs....................................................................................515
Outputs.................................................................................................518
Outputs for tripping, controlling and signalling.................................518
Outputs for signalling.......................................................................520
IRF...................................................................................................523
Communication connections.................................................................523
Ethernet RJ-45 front connection......................................................523
Station communication rear connection..........................................524
Optical serial rear connection..........................................................524
EIA-485 serial rear connection........................................................524
Communication interfaces and protocols........................................525
Recommended industrial Ethernet switches...................................525
Connection diagrams............................................................................525
Connection diagrams for 650 series................................................526
Connection diagrams for RET650 A01A.........................................535

25
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Connection diagrams for RET650 A05A.........................................544

Connection diagrams for RET650 A07A.........................................554

Section 18 Technical data...................................................................563

Dimensions...........................................................................................563
Power supply........................................................................................563
Energizing inputs..................................................................................564
Binary inputs.........................................................................................564
Signal outputs.......................................................................................565
Power outputs.......................................................................................565
Data communication interfaces............................................................566
Enclosure class.....................................................................................567
Environmental conditions and tests......................................................568

Section 19 IED and functionality tests.................................................569

Electromagnetic compatibility tests.......................................................569
Insulation tests......................................................................................571
Mechanical tests...................................................................................571
Product safety.......................................................................................571
EMC compliance...................................................................................572

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics..............................................573

Application............................................................................................573
Operation principle................................................................................576
Mode of operation............................................................................576
Inverse time characteristics..................................................................579

Section 21 Glossary............................................................................603

26
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel,
who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in
normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,

protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the
IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in
handling electronic equipment.

27
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Service manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication protocol
manual

en07000220.vsd

IEC07000220 V1 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals in different lifecycles

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
different tools in PCM600. The manual provides instructions on how to set up a
PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends
a sequence for engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well
as communication engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP3.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are
organized in chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance

28
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 1
Introduction

during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for checking of external
circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as
verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing
an IED in a substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in
chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for monitoring, controlling and
setting the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

The service manual contains instructions on how to service and maintain the IED. The
manual also provides procedures for de-energizing, de-commissioning and disposal of
the IED.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted
per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also be used when calculating settings.

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.

The communication protocol manual describes a communication protocol supported by

the IED. The manual concentrates on vendor-specific implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to
the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding
communication protocol manual.

1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date History
-/March 2012 First release
A/May 2012 Technical data updated for Inverse characteristic
time over current.
B/June 2012 Function names updated.
Technical data updated for HZPDIF

29
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Introduction

1.3.3 Related documents

Documents related to RET650 Identity number
Application manual 1MRK 504 128-UUS
Technical manual 1MRK 504 129-UUS
Commissioning manual 1MRK 504 130-UUS
Product Guide, configured 1MRK 504 131-BUS
Type test certificate 1MRK 504 131-TUS
Application notes for Circuit Breaker Control 1MRG006806

650 series manuals Identity number

Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 257-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850–8–1 1MRK 511 258-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 1MRK 511 259-UUS
Cyber Security deployment guidelines 1MRK 511 268-UUS
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 260-UUS
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 261-UUS
Operation manual 1MRK 500 095-UUS
Installation manual 1MRK 514 015-UUS

1.4 Symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result
in personal injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to

the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a
hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.

30
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 1
Introduction

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand

that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,
comply fully with all warning and caution notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions

A particular convention may not be used in this manual.

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push
button icons.
To navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
Select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
To save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• The ^ character in front of an input or output signal name in the function block
symbol given for a function, indicates that the user can set an own signal name in
PCM600.
• The * character after an input or output signal name in the function block symbol
given for a function, indicates that the signal must be connected to another
function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application
configuration.
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and mm. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in mm.

31
Technical Manual
32
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 2
Available functions

Section 2 Available functions

2.1 Main protection functions

IEC 61850/ ANSI Function description Transformer

Function block
name

RET650 (A01A)

RET650 (A05A)

RET650 (A07A)
RET650

2W/1CB

3W/1CB

OLTC
Differential protection
T2WPDIF 87T Transformer differential protection, two winding 0–1 1
T3WPDIF 87T Transformer differential protection, three winding 0–1 1
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance 0–3 2 3
HZPDIF 87 1Ph High impedance differential protection 0–2 2 2

2.2 Back-up protection functions

IEC 61850/ ANSI Function description Transformer

Function block
name
RET650 (A01A)

RET650 (A05A)

RET650 (A07A)
RET650

2W/1CB

3W/1CB

OLTC

Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, 3– 0–3 2 3
phase output
OC4PTOC 51 Four step phase overcurrent protection, 3–phase 2 2
output
OC4PTOC 51/67 Four step directional phase protection, 3–phase 0–3 3
output
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection 0–3 2 3
EF4PTOC 51N/67N Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero/ 0–3 2 3 2
negative sequence direction
Table continues on next page

33
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Available functions

IEC 61850/ ANSI Function description Transformer

Function block
name

RET650 (A01A)

RET650 (A05A)

RET650 (A07A)
RET650

2W/1CB

3W/1CB

OLTC
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload protection, two time constants 0–3 2 3 2
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection, 3–phase activation and 0–3 2 3
output
CCRPLD 52PD Pole discordance protection 0–3 2 3
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0–2 1 1 2
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0–2 1 1 2
DNSPTOC 46 Negative sequence based overcurrent function 0–2 1 2
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0–2 1 1 2
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0–2 1 1 2
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 0–2 1 1 2
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0–1 1 1
Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency function 0–4 4 4 4
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency function 0–4 4 4 4
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change frequency protection 0–4 2 2 4

2.3 Control and monitoring functions

IEC 61850/Function ANSI Function description Transformer

block name
RET650 (A01A)

RET650 (A05A)

RET650 (A07A)
RET650

2W/1CB

3W/1CB

OLTC

Control
QCBAY Bay control 1 1 1 1
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 1 1 1 1
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of Permitted Source To Operate 1 1 1 1
(PSTO)
CBC2 Circuit breaker for 2CB 0–1 1
CBC3 Circuit breaker for 3CB 0–1 1
Table continues on next page

34
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850/Function ANSI Function description Transformer

block name

RET650 (A01A)

RET650 (A05A)

RET650 (A07A)
RET650

2W/1CB

3W/1CB

OLTC
CBC4 Circuit breaker for 4CB 0–1 1
TR8ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap changer, 0–2 1 1 2
parallel control
TCMYLTC 84 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary 0–2 1 1 2
inputs
SLGGIO Logic Rotating Switch for function selection and 15 15 15 15
LHMI presentation
VSGGIO Selector mini switch extension 20 20 20 20
DPGGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 16 16 16
double point
SPC8GGIO Single point generic control 8 signals 5 5 5 5
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 3 3 3 3
I103CMD Function commands for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for 4 4 4 4
IEC60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC60870-5-103 50 50 50 50
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for 50 50 50 50
IEC60870-5-103
Secondary system supervision
TCSSCBR Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring 3 3 3 3
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic, common 3–phase output 1–3 2 3 2
TMAGGIO Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12
OR Configurable logic blocks, OR gate 283 283 283 283
INVERTER Configurable logic blocks, Inverter gate 140 140 140 140
PULSETIMER Configurable logic blocks, Pulse timer 40 40 40 40
GATE Configurable logic blocks, Controllable gate 40 40 40 40
XOR Configurable logic blocks, exclusive OR gate 40 40 40 40
LOOPDELAY Configurable logic blocks, loop delay 40 40 40 40
TIMERSET Configurable logic blocks, timer function block 40 40 40 40
AND Configurable logic blocks, AND gate 280 280 280 280
SRMEMORY Configurable logic blocks, set-reset memory flip- 40 40 40 40
flop gate
Table continues on next page

35
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Available functions

IEC 61850/Function ANSI Function description Transformer

block name

RET650 (A01A)

RET650 (A05A)

RET650 (A07A)
RET650

2W/1CB

3W/1CB

OLTC
RSMEMORY Configurable logic blocks, reset-set memory flip- 40 40 40 40
flop gate
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 16 16 16 16
B16IFCVI Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node 16 16 16 16
representation
IB16A Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 16 16 16 16
IB16FCVB Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node 16 16 16 16
representation
Monitoring
CVMMXN Measurements 6 6 6 6
CMMXU Phase current measurement 10 10 10 10
VMMXU Phase-phase voltage measurement 6 6 6 6
CMSQI Current sequence component measurement 6 6 6 6
VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 6 6 6 6
VNMMXU Phase-neutral voltage measurement 6 6 6 6
AISVBAS Function block for service values presentation of 1 1 1 1
the analog inputs
TM_P_P2 Function block for service values presentation of 1 1 1 1
primary analog inputs 600TRM
AM_P_P4 Function block for service values presentation of 1 1 1 1
primary analog inputs 600AIM
TM_S_P2 Function block for service values presentation of 1 1 1 1
secondary analog inputs 600TRM
AM_S_P4 Function block for service values presentation of 1 1 1 1
secondary analog inputs 600AIM
CNTGGIO Event counter 5 5 5 5
DRPRDRE Disturbance report 1 1 1 1
AxRADR Analog input signals 4 4 4 4
BxRBDR Binary input signals 6 6 6 6
SPGGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 64 64 64 64
SP16GGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 16 16 16
16 inputs
MVGGIO IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 16 16 16
MVEXP Measured value expander block 66 66 66 66
Table continues on next page

36
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850/Function ANSI Function description Transformer

block name

RET650 (A01A)

RET650 (A05A)

RET650 (A07A)
RET650

2W/1CB

3W/1CB

OLTC
SPVNZBAT Station battery supervision 0–1 1 1 1
SSIMG 63 Insulation gas monitoring function 0–2 2 2 2
SSIML 71 Insulation liquid monitoring function 0–2 2 2 2
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 0–3 2 3 2
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for 3 3 3 3
IEC60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103EF Function status ground-fault for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for 1 1 1 1
IEC60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC60870-5-103 1 1 1 1
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for 20 20 20 20
IEC60870-5-103
Metering
PCGGIO Pulse counter logic 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand 3 3 3 3
handling

2.4 Communication

IEC 61850/Function block ANSI Function description Transformer

name
RET650 (A01A)

RET650 (A05A)

RET650 (A07A)
2W/1CB

3W/1CB
RET650

OLTC

Station communication
IEC61850-8-1 IEC 61850 communication protocol 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1
RS485DNP DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication protocol 1 1 1 1
CH1TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1
Table continues on next page

37
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Available functions

IEC 61850/Function block ANSI Function description Transformer

name

RET650 (A01A)

RET650 (A05A)

RET650 (A07A)
2W/1CB

3W/1CB
RET650

OLTC
CH2TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1
CH3TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1
CH4TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1
OPTICALDNP DNP3.0 for optical serial communication 1 1 1 1
MSTSERIAL DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol 1 1 1 1
MST1TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1
MST2TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1
MST3TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1
MST4TCP DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1
OPTICALPROT Operation selection for optical serial 1 1 1 1
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1 1 1 1
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1
communication protocol
OPTICAL103 IEC60870-5-103 Optical serial communication 1 1 1 1
RS485103 IEC60870-5-103 serial communication for 1 1 1 1
RS485
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for 59 59 59 59
interlocking
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 4 4 4 4
GOOSEVCTRCONF GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and 1 1 1 1
receive
VCTRSEND Voltage control sending block for GOOSE 1 1 1 1
GOOSEVCTRRCV Voltage control receiving block for GOOSE 3 3 3 3
ETHFRNT Ethernet configuration of front port, LAN1 port 1 1 1 1
ETHLAN1 and gateway
GATEWAY
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double 32 32 32 32
point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer 32 32 32 32
value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 16 16 16 16
measurand value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single 64 64 64 64
point value

38
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 2
Available functions

2.5 Basic IED functions

IEC 61850/Function Function description

block name
Basic functions included in all products
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list 1
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list 1
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization 1
SNTP Time synchronization 1
DTSBEGIN, DTSEND, Time synchronization, daylight saving 1
TIMEZONE
IRIG-B Time synchronization 1
SETGRPS Setting group handling 1
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups 1
TESTMODE Test mode functionality 1
CHNGLCK Change lock function 1
TERMINALID IED identifiers 1
PRODINF Product information 1
SYSTEMTIME System time 1
RUNTIME IED Runtime comp 1
PRIMVAL Primary system values 1
SMAI_20_1 - Signal matrix for analog inputs 2
SMAI_20_12
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 12
GBASVAL Global base values for settings 6
ATHSTAT Authority status 1
ATHCHCK Authority check 1
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping 1
FTPACCS FTP access with password 1
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port 1
DOSLAN1 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 1
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control 1
SAFEFILECOPY Safe file copy function 1
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol 1
BCSCONF Basic communication system 1

39
Technical Manual
40
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 3
Analog inputs

Section 3 Analog inputs

3.1 Introduction

Analog input channels are already configured inside the IED. However the IED has to
be set properly to get correct measurement results and correct protection operations.
For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the
input currents must be defined properly. Measuring and protection algorithms in the
IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and
it is important to set the transformation ratio of the connected current and voltage
transformers properly.

The availability of CT and VT inputs, as well as setting parameters depends on the

ordered IED.

A reference PhaseAngleRef must be defined to facilitate service values reading. This

analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle
information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.

3.2 Operation principle

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star (WYE) connected and can be connected with the Star (WYE) point to the
object or from the object. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into
the object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out
from the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure
2)

41
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Analog inputs

• Forward means direction into the object.

• Reverse means direction out from the object.

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse

Protected Object
Line , transformer , etc
e.g . P , Q , I e.g . P , Q , I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CT_ WyePoint CT_ WyePoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
" ToObject" " FromObject"

ANSI11000275-1.vsd
ANSI11000275 V1 EN

Figure 2: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is right, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or

ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and
VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and
primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated
ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/
Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool.

3.3 Settings

Dependent on ordered IED type.

42
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 3
Analog inputs

Table 1: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM - Channel 1 - - TRM - Channel 1 Reference channel for phase angle
TRM - Channel 2 presentation
TRM - Channel 3
TRM - Channel 4
TRM - Channel 5
TRM - Channel 6
TRM - Channel 7
TRM - Channel 8
TRM - Channel 9
TRM - Channel 10

Table 2: TRM_6I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
Table continues on next page

43
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 3: TRM_8I_2U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

44
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 4: TRM_4I_1I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec6 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim6 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

45
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Analog inputs

Table 5: AIM_6I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CT_WyePoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1.0 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 1000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132.000 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 132 Rated VT primary voltage

46
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input

4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond
when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced
binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime
value and the debounced input value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and the
debounced input value is low. The default setting of DebounceTime is 5 ms.

The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the
counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0 again.

Each binary input has a filter time parameter DebounceTimex, where x is the number
of the binary input of the module in question (for example DebounceTime1).

4.1.2 Oscillation filter

Binary input lines can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields
from, for example, nearby breakers. Floating input lines can result in binary input
activity. These events are unwanted in the system. An oscillation filter is used to
reduce the load from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.

Each debounced input signal change increments an oscillation counter. Every time the
oscillation time counter reaches the set OscillationTime, the oscillation counter is
checked and both the time counter and the oscillation counter are reset. If the counter
value is above the set OscillationCount value the signal is declared as oscillating. If the
value is below the set OscillationCount value, the signal is declared as valid again.
During counting of the oscillation time the status of the signal remains unchanged,
leading to a fixed delay in the status update, even if the signal has attained normal
status again.

Each binary input has an oscillation count parameter OscillationCountx and an

oscillation time parameter OscillationTimex, where x is the number of the binary input
of the module in question.

47
Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Binary input and output modules

4.1.3 Settings

4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 6: BIO_9BI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 V 1 110 Station battery voltage

Table 7: BIO_9BI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Threshold1 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 1
DebounceTime1 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 1
OscillationCount1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 1
OscillationTime1 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 1
Threshold2 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 2
DebounceTime2 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 2
OscillationCount2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 2
OscillationTime2 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 2
Threshold3 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 3
DebounceTime3 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 3
OscillationCount3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 3
OscillationTime3 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 3
Threshold4 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 4
DebounceTime4 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 4
OscillationCount4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 4
OscillationTime4 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 4
Threshold5 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 5
DebounceTime5 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 5
OscillationCount5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 5
OscillationTime5 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 5
Threshold6 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 6
DebounceTime6 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 6
OscillationCount6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 6
Table continues on next page

48
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OscillationTime6 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 6
Threshold7 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 7
DebounceTime7 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 7
OscillationCount7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 7
OscillationTime7 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 7
Threshold8 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 8
DebounceTime8 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 8
DebounceTime8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 8
OscillationTime8 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 8
Threshold9 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 9
DebounceTime9 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 9
OscillationCount9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 9
OscillationTime9 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 9

4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for communication module

Table 8: COM05_12BI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 V 1 110 Station battery voltage

Table 9: COM05_12BI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Threshold1 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 1
DebounceTime1 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 1
OscillationCount1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 1
OscillationTime1 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 1
Threshold2 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 2
DebounceTime2 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 2
OscillationCount2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 2
OscillationTime2 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 2
Threshold3 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 3
DebounceTime3 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 3
Table continues on next page

49
Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Binary input and output modules

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OscillationCount3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 3
OscillationTime3 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 3
Threshold4 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 4
DebounceTime4 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 4
OscillationCount4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 4
OscillationTime4 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 4
Threshold5 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 5
DebounceTime5 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 5
OscillationCount5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 5
OscillationTime5 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 5
Threshold6 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 6
DebounceTime6 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 6
OscillationCount6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 6
OscillationTime6 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 6
Threshold7 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 7
DebounceTime7 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 7
OscillationCount7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 7
OscillationTime7 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 7
Threshold8 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 8
DebounceTime8 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 8
DebounceTime8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 8
OscillationTime8 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 8
Threshold9 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 9
DebounceTime9 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 9
OscillationCount9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 9
OscillationTime9 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 9
Threshold10 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 10
Threshold10 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 10
OscillationCount10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 10
OscillationTime10 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 10
Threshold11 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 11
Table continues on next page

50
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DebounceTime11 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 11
OscillationCount11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 11
OscillationTime11 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 11
Threshold12 6 - 900 %VB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 12
DebounceTime12 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.005 Debounce time for input 12
OscillationCount12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 12
OscillationTime12 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 12

51
Technical Manual
52
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -

5.1.2 Settings
Table 10: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 10 - 120 Min 10 60 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen Main menu - - Main menu Default screen
Events
Measurements
Diagnostics
Disturbance
records
Single Line
Diagram
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Disabled - - Disabled Automatic indication of disturbance report
Enabled
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line diagram
Yes
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line diagram
Yes
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes

53
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.2 Local HMI signals

5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -

5.2.2 Function block

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN

Figure 3: LHMICTRL function block

5.2.3 Signals
Table 11: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 12: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI
are cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active

54
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.3 Basic part for LED indication module

5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication module GRP1_LED1 - - -
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15

5.3.2 Function block

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK

IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN

Figure 4: LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN

Figure 5: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example, all 15 LED in each of group 1 - 3 has
a similar function block.

5.3.3 Signals
Table 13: LEDGEN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

55
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Table 14: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

Table 15: LEDGEN Output signals

Name Type Description
NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

5.3.4 Settings
Table 16: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

Table 17: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI alarm
Follow-F group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group
1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group
1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group
1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group
1 is green

56
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module

5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
LCD part for HMI Function Keys FNKEYMD1 - - -
Control module FNKEYMD5

5.4.2 Function block

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN

Figure 6: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for
every function button.

5.4.3 Signals
Table 18: FNKEYMD1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

Table 19: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name Type Description
FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

5.4.4 Settings
Table 20: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state

57
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Table 21: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type Disabled - - Disabled Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut Main menu - - Main menu
Events
Measurements
Diagnostics
Disturbance
records
Clear
Single Line
Diagram

5.5 Operation principle

5.5.1 Local HMI

ANSI12000175 V1 EN

Figure 7: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

• Display (LCD)
• Buttons
• LED indicators
• Communication port

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.5.1.1 Display

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240
pixels. The character size can vary.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

58
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

GUID-97DA85DD-DB01-449B-AD1F-EEC75A955D25 V3 EN

Figure 8: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to
be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with
three dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and
the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears
on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not
fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

59
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

GUID-1ECF507D-322A-4B94-B09C-49F6A0085384 V1 EN

Figure 9: Truncated path

The number before the function instance, for example 1:ETHFRNT, indicates the
instance number.

The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function
buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback
signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required
signal with PCM600.

ANSI12000025-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000025 V1 EN

Figure 10: Function button panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs.

60
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

GUID-D20BB1F1-FDF7-49AD-9980-F91A38B2107D V1 EN

Figure 11: Alarm LED panel

The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that
depends on the label string length that the panel contains.

5.5.1.2 LEDs

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Normal, Pickup
and Trip.

There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related to
each three-color LED are divided into three pages.

There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one
LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated
since there are three LED groups. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the
operation mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.

There are two additional LEDs which are embedded into the control buttons and
. They represent the status of the circuit breaker.

5.5.1.3 Keypad

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views
or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications,
provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

61
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.

ANSI11000247 V1 EN

Figure 12: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Communication port

62
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5.2 LED

5.5.2.1 Functionality

The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx

(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs.
The input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The
input signal for each LED is selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is
controlled by a GRP1_LEDx function block, that controls the color and the operating
mode.

Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.

5.5.2.2 Status LEDs

There are three status LEDs above the LCD in the front of the IED, green, yellow and
red.

The green LED has a fixed function, while the yellow and red LEDs are user
configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report is created
(steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate
a trip command.

5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes
Collecting mode

• LEDs, which are used in collecting mode of operation, are accumulated

continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when
the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode

• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs
and activates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined
for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will
initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a
settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum
time limit has elapsed.

63
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Acknowledgment/reset
• From local HMI
• The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common
signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive
edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed
via the button and menus on the LHMI.

• From function input

• The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input,
ACK_RST, to the function. This input can for example be configured to a
binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive
edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is
continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications
active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the
automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications
will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow
the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is
not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only
working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting
mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F =
Flash.

At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color
corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected sequence
diagrams below.

In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:

64
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN

Figure 13: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals.
It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other
LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 14: Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is
as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in
parallel is shown in Figure 15.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN

Figure 15: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.

65
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the
indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal
is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a
steady light.

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 16: Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the

indication with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if
the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In Figure 17 it is
shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after
acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority
signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN

Figure 17: Operating sequence 3, 2 colors involved

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to Figure 18.

66
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN

Figure 18: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority

indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to
Figure 19.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN

Figure 19: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.

Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of
the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to

67
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the
reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

Reset

IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 20: Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to
Figure 21.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN

Figure 21: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive
edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active

68
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its
operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN

Figure 22: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance

Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.

69
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance Disturbance

tRestart tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 23: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

70
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 24: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

71
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 25: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

5.5.3 Function keys

5.5.3.1 Functionality

Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left
of the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each
button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control
a binary signal.

5.5.3.2 Operation principle

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled

from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output
status of the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be
used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O
outputs etc.

72
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and

parameters that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and
parameters are normally set using the PST.

Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.

Mode 0 (OFF)

This mode always gives the output the value 0 (FALSE). Changes on the IO attribute
(changes in the input value does not affect the output value) are ignored.

Input value

Output value

IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN

Figure 26: Sequence diagram for Mode 0

Mode 1 (TOGGLE)

In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input has
been written (the input has completed a pulse). Note that the input attribute is reset
each time the function block executes. The function block execution is marked with a
dotted line below.

Input value

Output value

IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN

Figure 27: Sequence diagram for Mode 1

Mode 2 (PULSED)

In this mode the output will be high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this time
the output will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects
it being high and there is no output pulse.

73
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the
edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is
zero; else the trigger edge is lost.

Input value

Output value
tpulse tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd
IEC09000332 V1 EN

Figure 28: Sequence diagram for Mode 2

Input function
All inputs work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function
button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block
becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This
functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off.

There is an exception for the optional extension EXT1 function keys 7 and 8, since
they are tri-color (they can be red, yellow or green). Each of these LEDs are controlled
by three inputs, which are prioritized in the following order: Red - Yellow - Green
INPUT OUTPUT
RED YELLOW GREEN Function key LED color
1 0/1 0/1 red
- 1 0/1 yellow
- - 1 green
0 0 0 off

74
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

Section 6 Differential protection

6.1 Transformer differential protection

6.1.1 Functionality
The function can be provided with two or three three-phase sets of current inputs. All
current inputs are provided with percentage bias restraint features, making the IED
suitable for two- or three-winding transformer arrangements.

Two-winding applications

152 352

xx05000048_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000048 V1 EN

Three-winding applications

452

152 352

xx05000052_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000052 V1 EN

152 352

xx05000049_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000049 V1 EN

Figure 29: CT group

arrangement for
differential protection
and other protections

75
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

The available settings of this function allow the RET650 to cover various differential
protection applications such as power transformers and auto-transformers with or
without load tap changer as well as for shunt reactors including local feeders within the
station. An adaptive stabilizing feature is included to avoid misoperations during for
heavy through-faults.

Harmonic restraint is included for inrush currents as well as for overexcitation

conditions. Adaptive harmonic restraint is also included for system recovery inrush and
CT saturation during external faults. A high set unrestrained differential current
protection element is included for a very high speed tripping at a high internal fault
currents.

An innovative sensitive differential protection feature, based on the theory of

symmetrical components, offers the best possible coverage for power transformer
winding turn-to-turn faults.

6.1.2 Transformer differential protection, two winding T2WPDIF (87T)

6.1.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Transformer differential protection, two- T2WPDIF 87T
winding
3Id/I

SYMBOL-BB V1 EN

76
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

6.1.2.2 Function block

T2WPDIF (87T)
I3PW1CT1* TRIP
I3PW2CT1* TRIPRES
BLOCK TRIPUNRE
TRNSUNR
TRNSSENS
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
BLK2H
BLK5H
BLKWAV
IDALARM
IDMAG_A
IDMAG_B
IDMAG_C
IBIAS
IDMAG_NS

ANSI09000274-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000274 V1 EN

Figure 30: T2WPDIF (87T) function block

6.1.2.3 Signals
Table 22: T2WPDIF (87T) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Three phase current connection winding 1 (W1) CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Three phase current connection winding 2 (W2) CT1
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 23: T2WPDIF (87T) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip signal from restrained differential protection
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection
TRNSUNR BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestrained negative sequence
differential protection
TRNSSENS BOOLEAN Trip signal from sensitive negative sequence
differential protection
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
Table continues on next page

77
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

Name Type Description

PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
BLK2H BOOLEAN General second harmonic block signal
BLK5H BOOLEAN General fifth harmonic block signal
BLKWAV BOOLEAN General block signal from waveform criteria
IDALARM BOOLEAN General alarm for sustained differential currents
IDMAG_A REAL Magnitude of fundamental frequency differential
current, phase A
IDMAG_B REAL Magnitude of fundamental frequency differential
current, phase B
IDMAG_C REAL Magnitude of fundamental frequency differential
current, phase C
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, which is common to all
phases
IDMAG_NS REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current

6.1.2.4 Settings
Table 24: T2WPDIF (87T) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
IdMin 0.10 - 0.60 IB 0.01 0.30 Section 1 sensitivity current, usually W1
current
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, multiple of W1 rated current
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, multiple of W1 rated current
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristics
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain
characteristics
IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained protection limit, multiple of W1
rated current
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 15.0 Maximum ratio of 2nd harmonic to
fundamental harmonic differential current
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Maximum ratio of 5th harmonic to
fundamental harmonic differential current
CrossBlockEn Disabled - - Enabled Operation Off/On for cross-block logic
Enabled between phases
NegSeqDiffEn Disabled - - Enabled Operation Off/On for negative sequence
Enabled differential protections
IMinNegSeq 0.02 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Minimum negative sequence current
Table continues on next page

78
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

NegSeqROA 30.0 - 90.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Operate angle for internal/external negative
sequence fault discriminator
SOTFMode Disabled - - Enabled Operation mode for switch onto fault
Enabled
IDiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.20 Differential curreent alarm, multiple of base
current, usually W1 current
tAlarmDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Time delay for differential current alarm

Table 25: T2WPDIF (87T) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSelW1 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, winding 1
GlobalBaseSelW2 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, winding 2
ConnectTypeW1 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or D-delta
Delta (D)
ConnectTypeW2 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or D-delta
Delta (D)
ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Phase displacement between W2 & W1=HV
1 [30 deg lag] winding, hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ZSCurrSubtrW1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable zero sequence subtration for W1 side,
Enabled Off/On
ZSCurrSubtrW2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable zero sequence subtration for W2 side,
Enabled Off/On

79
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

6.1.2.5 Monitored data

Table 26: T2WPDIF (87T) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IDMAG_A REAL - A Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase A
IDMAG_B REAL - A Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase B
IDMAG_C REAL - A Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase C
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias current,
which is common to all phases
IDMAG_NS REAL - A Magnitude of the negative
sequence differential current

6.1.3 Transformer differential protection, three winding T3WPDIF

(87T)

6.1.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Transformer differential protection, T3WPDIF 87T
three-winding
3Id/I

SYMBOL-BB V1 EN

80
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

6.1.3.2 Function block

T3WPDIF (87T)
I3PW1CT1* TRIP
I3PW2CT1* TRIPRES
I3PW3CT1* TRIPUNRE
BLOCK TRNSUNR
TRNSSENS
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
BLK2H
BLK5H
BLKWAV
IDALARM
IDMAG_A
IDMAG_B
IDMAG_C
IBIAS
IDMAG_NS

ANSI09000269-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000269 V1 EN

Figure 31: T3WPDIF (87T) function block

6.1.3.3 Signals
Table 27: T3WPDIF (87T) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3PW1CT1 GROUP - Three phase current connection winding 1 (W1) CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1 GROUP - Three phase current connection winding 2 (W2) CT1
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT1 GROUP - Three phase current connection winding 3 (W3) CT1
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 28: T3WPDIF (87T) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIPRES BOOLEAN Trip signal from restrained differential protection
TRIPUNRE BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection
TRNSUNR BOOLEAN Trip signal from unrestrained negative sequence
differential protection
TRNSSENS BOOLEAN Trip signal from sensitive negative sequence
differential protection
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
Table continues on next page

81
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

Name Type Description

PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
BLK2H BOOLEAN General second harmonic block signal
BLK5H BOOLEAN General fifth harmonic block signal
BLKWAV BOOLEAN General block signal from waveform criteria
IDALARM BOOLEAN General alarm for sustained differential currents
IDMAG_A REAL Magnitude of fundamental frequency differential
current, phase A
IDMAG_B REAL Magnitude of fundamental frequency differential
current, phase B
IDMAG_C REAL Magnitude of fundamental frequency differential
current, phase C
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, which is common to all
phases
IDMAG_NS REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current

6.1.3.4 Settings
Table 29: T3WPDIF (87T) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
IdMin 0.10 - 0.60 IB 0.01 0.30 Section 1 sensitivity current, usually W1
current
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, multiple of W1 rated current
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, multiple of W1 rated current
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristics
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain
characteristics
IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained protection limit, multiple of W1
rated current
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 15.0 Maximum ratio of 2nd harmonic to
fundamental harmonic differential current
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Maximum ratio of 5th harmonic to
fundamental harmonic differential current
CrossBlockEn Disabled - - Enabled Operation Off/On for cross-block logic
Enabled between phases
NegSeqDiffEn Disabled - - Enabled Operation Off/On for negative sequence
Enabled differential function
IMinNegSeq 0.02 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Minimum negative sequence current
Table continues on next page

82
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

NegSeqROA 30.0 - 90.0 Deg 0.1 60.0 Operate angle for internal/external negative
sequence fault discriminator
SOTFMode Disabled - - Enabled Operation mode for switch onto fault function
Enabled
IDiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.20 Differential current alarm, multiple of base
current, usually W1 current
tAlarmDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Time delay for differential current alarm

Table 30: T3WPDIF (87T) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSelW1 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, winding 1
GlobalBaseSelW2 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, winding 2
GlobalBaseSelW3 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, winding 3
ConnectTypeW1 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or D-delta
Delta (D)
ConnectTypeW2 WYE (Y) - - WYE (Y) Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or D-delta
Delta (D)
ConnectTypeW3 WYE (Y) - - Delta (D) Connection type of winding 3: Y-wye or D-delta
Delta (D)
ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Phase displacement between W2 & W1=HV
1 [30 deg lag] winding, hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ClockNumberW3 0 [0 deg] - - 5 [150 deg lag] Phase displacement between W3 & W1=HV
1 [30 deg lag] winding, hour notation
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
Table continues on next page

83
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ZSCurrSubtrW1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable zero sequence subtraction for W1
Enabled side, Off/On
ZSCurrSubtrW2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable zero sequence subtraction for W2
Enabled side, Off/On
ZSCurrSubtrW3 Disabled - - Enabled Enable zero sequence subtraction for W3
Enabled side, Off/On

6.1.3.5 Monitored data

Table 31: T3WPDIF (87T) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IDMAG_A REAL - A Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase A
IDMAG_B REAL - A Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase B
IDMAG_C REAL - A Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase C
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias current,
which is common to all phases
IDMAG_NS REAL - A Magnitude of the negative
sequence differential current

6.1.4 Operation principle

The task of the power transformer differential protection is to determine whether a
fault is within the protected zone, or outside the protected zone. The protected zone is
limited by the position of current transformers (see figure 32), and in principle can
include more objects than just transformer. If the fault is found to be internal, the faulty
power transformer must be quickly disconnected.

The main CTs are normally supposed to be Wye connected and can be grounded in any
direction (that is, either "ToObject" or "FromObject"). Internally the IED will always
measure the currents on all sides of the power transformer with the same reference
direction towards the power transformer windings as shown in figure 32.

84
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

IW1 IW2

Z1S1 Z1S2
E1S1 E1S2

IW1 IW2

IED

en05000186_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000186 V1 EN

Figure 32: Typical CT location and definition of positive current direction

Due to the ratio of the number of turns of the windings and the connection group of the
protected transformer, the current between two windings can not be directly compared
to each other. Therefore the differential protection must first correlate all currents to
each other before any calculation can be performed.

In numerical differential protections this correlation and comparison is performed

mathematically. First, compensation for the protected transformer transformation ratio
and connection group is made, and only then the currents are compared phase-wise.
This makes external auxiliary (interposing) current transformers unnecessary.

Conversion of all currents to the common reference side of the power transformer is
performed by pre-programmed coefficient matrices, which depends on the protected
power transformer transformation ratio and connection group. Once the power
transformer phase shift, rated currents and voltages have been entered by the user, the
differential protection is capable to calculate the matrix coefficients required in order to
perform the on-line current comparison by means of a fixed equation.

6.1.4.1 Function calculation principles

To make a differential IED as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained differential

characteristic have been developed and are now adopted as the general practice in the
protection of power transformers. The protection should be provided with a
proportional bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain percentage
differential current related to the current through the transformer. This stabilizes the
protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the system to have good
basic sensitivity. The following chapters explain how these quantities are calculated.

85
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

6.1.4.2 Fundamental frequency differential currents

The fundamental frequency differential current is a vectorial sum (sum of fundamental

frequency phasors) of the individual phase currents from different side of the protected
power transformer.

Before any differential current can be calculated, the power transformer phase shift,
and its transformation ratio, must be allowed for. Conversion of all currents to a
common reference is performed in two steps:

• all current phasors are phase-shifted to (referred to) the phase-reference side,
(whenever possible a first winding with wye connection)
• all currents magnitudes are always referred to the first winding of the power
transformer (typically transformer high-voltage side)

The two steps of conversion are made simultaneously on-line by the pre-programmed
coefficient matrices, as shown in equation 1 for a two-winding power transformer, and
in equation 2 for a three-winding power transformer.

These are internal compensation algorithms within the differential

function. The protected power transformer data are always entered as
they are given on the nameplate. Differential function will by it self
adapt nameplate data and select proper reference windings.

é IDA ù é I _ A _ W 1ù é I _ A _ W 2ù
ê IDB ú = A × ê I _ B _ W 1ú + Vn _ W 2 × B × ê I _ B _ W 2 ú
ê ú ê ú Vn _ W 1 ê ú
êë IDC úû êë I _ C _ W 1úû êë I _ C _ W 2 úû

1 2 3
EQUATION1879 V1 EN (Equation 1)

where:
1. is the resulting Differential Currents
2. is Differential current contribution from W1 side
3. is Differential current contribution from W2 side

86
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

é IDA ù é I _ A _ W 1ù é I _ A _ W 2ù é IL _ A _ W 3ù
ê IDB ú = A × ê I _ B _ W 1ú + Vn _ W 2 × B × ê I _ B _ W 2 ú + Vn _ W 3 × C × ê IL _ B _ W 3ú
ê ú ê ú Vn _ W 1 ê ú Vn _ W 1 ê ú
êë IDC úû êë I _ C _ W 1úû êë I _ C _ W 2 úû êë IL _ C _ W 3úû

1 2 3 4
EQUATION1882-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 2)

where:
1. is the resulting Differential Currents
2. is Differential current contribution from W1 side
3. is Differential current contribution from W2 side
4. is Differential current contribution from W3 side

and where, for equation 1 and equation 2:

ID_A is the fundamental frequency differential current in phaseA (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_B is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase B (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_C is the fundamental frequency differential current in phaseC (in W1 side primary amperes)
I_A_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseA on W1 side
I_B_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseB on W1 side
I_C_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseC on W1 side
I_A_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseA on W2 side
I_B_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase B on W2 side
I_C_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase C on W2 side
I_A_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase A on W3 side
I_B_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseB on W3 side
I_C_W3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseC on W3 side
Vn_W1 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W1 side (setting parameter)
Vn_W2 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2 side (setting parameter)
Vn_W3 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W3 side (setting parameter)
A, B and C are three by three matrices with numerical coefficients

Values of the matrix A, B and C coefficients depend on:

1. Power transformer winding connection type, such as wye (Y/y) or delta (D/d)
• Note! The capitalized letter Y or D is used to represent the high voltage
(HV) side of the transformer and the smaller letter y or d to represent lower
voltage(LV) level. When neutral bushing of a wye winding is brought out,

87
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

the same may be represented as YN or yn depending on whether the winding

is HV or LV.
2. Transformer phase shift such as Yd1, Dy11, YNautod5, Yy0d5 and so on, which
introduce phase displacement between individual windings currents in multiples of
30°. Since the HV and LV winding voltages are in phase for wye/wye or Delta/
Delta transformers, the same is represented in IEC as represented as Dd0, Yy0.
Polarity reversal in one of the windings would give 180 degree phase displacement
which can be represented by clock position 6. Such transformers can thus be
represented as Dd6, Yy6. It is also possible to rename the phases ABC to CAB or
BCA, giving 120 or 240 degree displacements, represented by clock positions 4 &
8 . Polarity reversals in one of the windings would provide clock positions 10 & 2.
These can all be represented for example: Yy0, Yy2, Yy4, Dd0, Dd6. ANSI wye/
Delta or Delta/wye transformers have the HV winding leading the LV winding by
30degrees. This can be represented by Yd1 or Dy1. Again considering polarity
reversals and renaming of phases gives rise to other clock positions 4,7,5,11
3. Settings for elimination of zero sequence currents for individual windings.

When the end user enters all these parameters, transformer differential function
automatically determines the matrix coefficients based on the following rules:

For the phase reference, the highest voltage wye (Y) connected winding is used. For
example, if the power transformer is a Yd1 power transformer, the HV winding (Y) is
taken as the phase reference winding. If the power transformer is a Yy0 power
transformer the HV winding (Y) is taken as the phase reference winding. If the power
transformer is a Dy1, then the LV winding (y) is taken for the phase reference. If there
is no wye connected winding, such as in Dd0 type of power transformers, then the HV
delta winding (D) is automatically chosen as the phase reference winding.

The fundamental frequency differential currents are in general composed of currents of

all sequences, that is, the positive-, the negative-, and the zero-sequence currents. If the
zero-sequence currents are eliminated (see section "Elimination of zero sequence
currents"), then the differential currents can consist only of the positive-, and the negative-
sequence currents. When the zero-sequence current is subtracted on one power
transformer side, then it is subtracted from each individual phase current.

Table 32 summarizes the values of the matrices for all standard phase shifts between
windings.

88
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

Table 32: Matrices for differential current calculation

Matrix with Zero Sequence Matrix with Zero Sequence
Reduction set to On Reduction set to Off
Matrix for Reference Winding
é 2 -1 -1ù é1 0 0 ù
1 ê
× -1 2 -1ú ê0 1 0 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
ëê -1 -1 2 ûú ëê0 0 1 úû
EQUATION1227 V1 EN (Equation 3) EQUATION1228 V1 EN (Equation 4)
Matrix for winding with 30° Not applicable. Matrix on the left
lagging é 1 -1 0 ù used.
1
× ê 0 1 -1ú
3 ê ú
ëê -1 0 1 úû
EQUATION1229 V1 EN (Equation 5)
Matrix for winding with 60°
é1 -2 1ù é 0 -1 0 ù
lagging 1 ê
× 1 1 -2 ú ê 0 0 -1ú
3 ê ú ê ú
êë -2 1 1 úû ëê -1 0 0 úû
EQUATION1230 V1 EN (Equation 6) EQUATION1231 V1 EN (Equation 7)
Matrix for winding with 90° Not applicable. Matrix on the left
lagging é 0 -1 1 ù used.
1
× ê 1 0 -1ú
3 ê ú
êë -1 1 0 úû
EQUATION1232 V1 EN (Equation 8)
Matrix for winding with 120°
lagging é -1 -1 2 ù é0 0 1 ù
1 ê
× 2 -1 -1ú ê1 0 0 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
êë -1 2 -1úû êë0 1 0 úû
EQUATION1233 V1 EN (Equation 9) EQUATION1234 V1 EN (Equation 10)
Matrix for winding with 150° Not applicable. Matrix on the left
lagging é-1 0 1 ù used.
1
× ê 1 -1 0 ú
3 ê ú
êë 0 1 -1úû
EQUATION1235 V1 EN (Equation 11)
Matrix for winding which is in
opposite phase é -2 1 1ù é -1 0 0 ù
1 ê
× 1 -2 1 ú ê 0 -1 0 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
ëê 1 1 -2 ûú êë 0 0 -1úû
EQUATION1236 V1 EN (Equation 12) EQUATION1237 V1 EN (Equation 13)
Matrix for winding with 150° Not applicable. Matrix on the left
leading é-1 1 0 ù used.
1
× ê 0 -1 1 ú
3 ê ú
ëê 1 0 -1ûú
EQUATION1238 V1 EN (Equation 14)
Table continues on next page

89
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

Matrix with Zero Sequence Matrix with Zero Sequence

Reduction set to On Reduction set to Off
Matrix for winding with 120°
leading é -1 2 -1ù é0 1 0 ù
1 ê
× -1 -1 2 ú ê0 0 1 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
êë 2 -1 -1úû êë1 0 0 úû
EQUATION1239 V1 EN (Equation 15) EQUATION1240 V1 EN (Equation 16)

Matrix for winding with 90° Not applicable. Matrix on the left
leading é 0 1 -1ù used.
1
× ê -1 0 1 ú
3 ê ú
êë 1 -1 0 úû
EQUATION1241 V1 EN (Equation 17)
Matrix for winding with 60°
é1 1 -2 ù é 0 0 -1ù
leading 1 ê
× -2 1 1ú ê -1 0 0 ú
3 ê ú ê ú
êë 1 -2 1 úû êë 0 -1 0 úû
EQUATION1242 V1 EN (Equation 18) EQUATION1243 V1 EN (Equation 19)
Matrix for winding with 30° Not applicable. Matrix on the left
leading é 1 0 -1ù used.
1 ê
× -1 1 0 ú
3 ê ú
êë 0 -1 1 úû
EQUATION1244 V1 EN (Equation 20)

By using this table we can derive a complete calculation for all common transformer
configuration. For example when considering a YNd5 power transformer the following
can be concluded:

1. HV wye (Y) connected winding will be used as reference winding and zero
sequence currents shall be subtracted on that side
2. LV winding is lagging for 150°

With help of table 32, the following matrix equation can be written for this power
transformer:

é ID _ A ù é 2 -1 -1ù é I _ A _ W 1ù é -1 0 1 ù é I _ A _ W 2 ù
ê ID _ B ú = 1 × ê -1 2 -1ú × ê I _ B _ W 1ú + Vr _ W 2 × 1 × ê 1 -1 0 ú × ê I _ B _ W 2 ú
ê ú 3 ê ú ê ú Vr _ W 1 3 ê ú ê ú
êë ID _ C úû êë -1 -1 2 úû êë I _ C _ W 1úû êë 0 1 -1úû êë I _ C _ W 2 úû
EQUATION1810-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 21)

where:
ID_A is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase A (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_B is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase B (in W1 side primary amperes)
Table continues on next page

90
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

ID_C is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase C (in W1 side primary amperes)
I_A_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase A on W1 side
I_B_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase B on W1 side
I_C_W1 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseC on W1 side
I_A_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase A on W2 side
I_B_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase B on W2 side
I_C_W2 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseC on W2 side
Vn_W1 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W1 side (setting parameter)
Vn_W2 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2 side (setting parameter)

As marked in equation 1 and equation 2, the first term on the right hand side of the
equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from W1
side to the fundamental frequency differential currents compensated for eventual power
transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of the equation,
represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from W2 side to the
fundamental frequency differential currents compensated for eventual power
transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer reference side. The
third term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution from
the individual phase currents from W3 side to the fundamental frequency differential
currents compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the
power transformer reference side. .

The fundamental frequency differential currents are the magnitudes which are applied
in a phase segregated manner to the operate - restrain characteristic of the differential
protection. The magnitudes of the differential currents can be read as service values
from the function and they are available as outputs IDMAG_A, IDMAG_B,
IDMAG_C from the differential protection function block. Thus they can be connected
to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external or internal
fault condition.

6.1.4.3 Differential current alarm

Fundamental frequency differential current level is monitored all the time within the
differential function. As soon as all three fundamental frequency differential currents
are set above the set alarm level (IDiffAlarm), a threshold defined by setting parameter
IDiffAlarm a delay on pickup timer is started. When the pre-set time, defined by setting
parameter tAlarmDelay, has expired the differential current alarm is generated and
output signal IDALARM is set to logical value one.

91
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

6.1.4.4 Bias current

The bias current is calculated as the highest current amongst all individual winding
current contributions, compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and
transferred to the power transformer reference side. All individual winding current
contributions are already referred to the power transformer winding one side (power
transformer HV winding) and therefore they can be compared regarding their
magnitudes. There are six (or nine in case of three-winding transformer) contributions
to the total fundamental differential currents, which are the candidates for the common
bias current. The highest individual current contribution is taken as a common bias
(restrain) current for all three phases. This "maximum principle" makes the differential
protection more secure, with less risk to operate for external faults and in the same time
brings more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the operate - restrain characteristic.

The magnitudes of the common bias (restrain) current expressed in the reference side
amperes can be read as service values from the function. At the same time it is
available as outputs IBIAS from the differential protection function block. Thus, it can
be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any
external or internal fault condition.

6.1.4.5 Elimination of zero sequence currents

The zero sequence currents can be eliminated from the differential bias current on a per
winding basis via a parameter.

Elimination of the zero sequence current component is necessary whenever:

• the protected power transformer cannot transform the zero sequence currents to the
other side, for any reason.
• the zero sequence currents can only flow on one side of the protected power
transformer.

In most cases, power transformers do not properly transform the zero sequence current
to the other side. A typical example is a power transformer of the wye-delta type, for
example YNd1. Transformers of this type do not transform the zero sequence
quantities, but zero sequence currents can flow in the grounded wye connected
winding. In such cases, an external ground-fault on the wye-side causes the zero
sequence currents to flow on the wye-side of the power transformer, but not on the
delta side. This results in false differential currents - consisting exclusively of the zero
sequence currents. If high enough, these false differential currents can cause an
unwanted disconnection of the healthy power transformer. They must therefore be
subtracted from the fundamental frequency differential currents if an unwanted trip is
to be avoided.

92
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

For delta windings this feature shall be enabled only if an grounding transformer exist
within differential zone on the delta side of the protected power transformer.

Removing the zero sequence current from the differential currents decreases to some
extent sensitivity of the differential protection for internal ground-faults. In order to
counteract this effect to some degree, the zero sequence currents are subtracted not
only from the three fundamental frequency differential currents, but automatically from
the bias current as well.

6.1.4.6 Restrained and unrestrained limits of the differential protection

Power transformer differential protection function uses two limits, to which actual
magnitudes of the three fundamental frequency differential currents are compared at
each execution of the function.

The unrestrained (that is, non-stabilized, "instantaneous") part of the differential

protection is used for very high differential currents, where it should be beyond any
doubt, that the fault is internal. This settable limit is constant (that is, not proportional
to the bias current). Neither harmonic, nor any other restrain is applied to this limit,
which is therefore capable to trip power transformer instantaneously.

The restrained (that is, stabilized) part of the differential protection compares the
calculated fundamental differential (that is, operating) currents, and the bias (that is,
restrain) current, by applying them to the operate - restrain characteristic. The operate -
restrain characteristic is represented by a double-slope, double-breakpoint diagram,
where the operating current is set against the bias current, as shown in figure 33 The
characteristic is determined by the following 5 settings:

1. IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, multiple of trans. Reference side rated current set
under the parameter IBase in GlobalbaseSelW1)
2. EndSection1 (End of section 1, as multiple of transformer reference side rated
current set under the parameter IBase in GlobalbaseSelW1)
3. EndSection2 (End of section 2, as multiple of transformer reference side rated
current set under the parameter IBase in GlobalbaseSelW1)
4. SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer reference side rated
current set under the parameter IBase in GlobalbaseSelW1)
5. SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer reference side rated
current set under the parameter IBase in GlobalbaseSelW1)

93
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
5
unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit
4

Operate
3
conditionally

2
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3

SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2 Restrain
0
0 1 2 3 4 5

EndSection1 restrain current

EndSection2 [ times IBase ]

en05000187-2.vsd
IEC05000187 V2 EN

Figure 33: Description of the restrained, and the unrestrained operate

characteristics

where:

slope = D Ioperate × 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN

The operate - restrain characteristic is tailor-made and can be designed freely by the
user after his needs. The default characteristic is recommended to be used. It gives
good results in a majority of applications. The reset ratio is in all parts of the
characteristic is equal to 0.95.

Section 1: This is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal
currents flow through the protected object and its current transformers, and risk for
higher false differential currents is relatively low. Un-compensated on-load tap-

94
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

changer is a typical reason for existence of the false differential currents in this section.
Slope in section 1 is always zero percent.

Section 2: In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope

with false differential currents due to higher than normal currents through the current
transformers, such as during a transformer overloading situation.

Section 3: The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher

tolerance to substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault currents,
which may be expected in this section.

The operate - restrain characteristic should be designed so that it can be expected that:

• for internal faults, the operate (differential) currents are always safely, that is, with
a good margin, above the operate - restrain characteristic
• for external faults, the false (spurious) operate currents are safely, that is, with a
good margin, below the operate - restrain characteristic

6.1.4.7 Fundamental frequency negative sequence differential currents

Existence of relatively high negative sequence currents is in itself a proof of a

disturbance on the power system, possibly a fault in the protected power transformer.
The negative-sequence currents are measurable indications of abnormal conditions,
similar to the zero sequence currents. One of the several advantages of the negative
sequence currents compared to the zero sequence currents is however that they provide
coverage for phase-to-phase and power transformer turn-to-turn faults as well, not only
for ground-faults. Theoretically the negative sequence currents do not exist during
symmetrical three-phase faults, however they do appear during initial stage of such
faults (due to the DC offset) for long enough time (in most cases) for the IED to make
proper decision. Further, the negative sequence currents are not stopped at a power
transformer of the Yd, or Dy connection type. The negative sequence currents are
always properly transformed to the other side of any power transformer for any
external disturbance. Finally, the negative sequence currents are not affected by
symmetrical through-load currents.

For power transformer differential protection application, the negative sequence based
differential currents are calculated by using exactly the same matrix equations, which
are used to calculate the traditional phase-wise fundamental frequency differential
currents. However, the same equation shall be fed by the negative sequence currents
from the two power transformer sides instead of individual phase currents, as shown in
matrix equation 23 for a case of two-winding, YNd5 power transformer.

95
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

é IDNS _ A ù é 2 -1 -1ù é INS _ W 1 ù é -1 0 1ù é INS _ W 2 ù

ê IDNS _ B ú = 1 × ê -1 2 -1ú × ê a × INS _ W 1 ú + Vn _ W 2 × 1 × ê1 -1 0 ú × ê a × INS _ W 2 ú
ê ú 3 ê ú ê ú Vn _ W 1
3 ê ú ê ú
êë IDNS _ C úû êë -1 -1 2 úû êë a 2 × INS _ W 1úû êë 0 1 -1úû êë a 2 × INS _ W 2 úû

1 2 3
EQUATION1560 V1 EN (Equation 23)

where:
1. is Negative Sequence Differential Current per phase
2. is Negative Sequence current contribution from W1 side
3. is Negative Sequence current contribution from W2 side

and where:
IDNS_A is the negative sequence differential current in phase A (in
W1 side primary amperes)
IDNS_B is the negative sequence differential current in phase B (in
W1 side primary amperes)
IDNS_C is the negative sequence differential current in phase C (in
W1 side primary amperes)
INS_W1 is negative sequence current on W1 side in primary
amperes (phase A reference)
INS_W2 is negative sequence current on W1 side in primary
amperes (phase A reference)
Vn_W1 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W1 side
(setting parameter)
Vn_W2 is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2 side
(setting parameter)

a is the complex operator for sequence quantities, for example,

j ×120
o 1 3
a=e =- + j×
2 2
EQUATION1248 V1 EN (Equation 24)

Because the negative sequence currents always form the symmetrical three phase
system (negative sequence currents in every phase will always have the same
magnitude and a 120 degrees phase rotation compared to each other), it is only
necessary to calculate the first negative sequence differential current that is, IDNS_A.
This value is then reported as IDNSMAG.

96
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

As marked in equation 23, the first term on the right hand side of the equation,
represents the total contribution of the negative sequence current from W1 side
compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right
hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution of the negative sequence
current from W2 side compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and
transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These negative sequence current
contributions are phasors, which are further used in directional comparisons, made in
order to characterize a fault as internal or external. See section "Internal/external fault
discriminator" for more information.

The magnitudes of the negative sequence differential current (IDNSMAG) can be read
as service values from the function. In the same time it is available as outputs from the
differential protection function block. Thus, it can be connected to the disturbance
recorder and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault condition.

6.1.4.8 Internal/external fault discriminator

The internal/external fault discriminator is a very powerful and reliable supplementary

criterion to the traditional differential protection. It is recommended that this feature
shall be always used (that is, enabled) when protecting three-phase power
transformers. The internal/external fault discriminator detects even minor faults, with a
high sensitivity and at high speed, and at the same time discriminates with a high
degree of dependability between internal and external faults.

The algorithm of the internal/external fault discriminator is based on the theory of

symmetrical components. Already in 1933, Wagner and Evans in their famous book
"Symmetrical Components" have stated that:

Source of the negative-sequence currents is at the point of fault,

1.
E NS = - I NS × Z NS

EQUATION1254 V1 EN (Equation 25)

2. Negative-sequence currents distribute through the negative-sequence
network
3. Negative-sequence currents obey the first Kirchhoff"s law

The internal/external fault discriminator responds to magnitudes and the relative phase
angles of the negative-sequence fault currents at different windings (that is, sides) of
the protected power transformer. The negative sequence fault currents must of course
first be referred to the same phase reference side, and put to the same magnitude
reference. This is done by the matrix expression (see equation 23).

Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator is based on the relative position of

the two phasors representing winding one (W1) and winding two (W2) negative

97
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

sequence current contributions, respectively, defined by expression shown in

equation 23. It performs a directional comparison between these two phasors. Taking
into account the phase rotation transformation the relative phase displacement between
the two negative sequence current phasors is calculated. In case of three-winding
power transformers, a little more complex algorithm is applied, with two directional
tests. The overall directional characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator is
shown in figure 34, where the directional characteristic is defined by two setting
parameters:

1. IMinNegSeq
2. NegSeqROA

90 deg
120 deg
If one or the Internal/external
other of fault boundary
currents is too
low, then no
measurement NegSeqROA
is done, and (Relay
120 degrees Operate
is mapped Angle)

180 deg 0 deg

IMinNegSeq

External Internal
fault fault
region region

270 deg en05000188-3-en.vsd

IEC05000188 V3 EN

Figure 34: Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator

In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes must
be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the other hand,
in order to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault discriminator, the
value of this minimum limit must not be too high. Note that, in order to enhance
stability at higher fault currents, the relatively very low threshold value IminNegSeq is
dynamically increased at currents higher than normal currents: if the bias current is
higher than 110% of IBase current, then 10% of the bias current is added to the
IminNegSeq. Only if magnitudes of both negative sequence current contributions are

98
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

above the limit, the phase angle between these two phasors is checked. If any of the
negative sequence current contributions are too small (less than the set value for
IminNegSeq), no directional comparison is made in order to avoid the possibility to
produce a wrong decision. The setting NegSeqROA represents the Relay Operate
Angle, which determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions.
It can be selected in the range from ±30 degrees to ±90 degrees, with a step of 0.1
degree. The default value is ±60 degrees. The default setting ±60 degree favours
somewhat security in comparison to dependability.

If the above condition concerning magnitudes is fulfilled, the internal/external fault

discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence current
contributions from the W1 and W2 sides of the power transformer using the following
two rules:

• If the negative sequence currents contributions from W1 and W2 sides are in

phase, the fault is internal
• If the negative sequence currents contributions from W1 and W2 sides are 180
degrees out of phase, the fault is external

For example, for any unsymmetrical external fault, ideally the respective negative
sequence current contributions from the W1 and W2 power transformer sides will be
exactly 180 degrees apart and equal in magnitude. One such example is shown in
figure 35, which shows trajectories of the two separate phasors representing the
negative sequence current contributions from HV and LV sides of an Yd5 power
transformer (for example, after the compensation of the transformer turns ratio and
phase displacement for an unsymmetrical external fault. Observe that the relative phase
angle between these two phasors is 180 electrical degrees at any point in time. No
current transformer saturation was assumed for this case.

99
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

"steady state"
for HV side 90
neg. seq. phasor
60

150 30

10
ms

180 0
0.1 kA
0.2 kA
0.3 kA
10 0.4 kA
ms
210 330

"steady state"
240 for LV side
270 neg. seq. phasor

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from HV side

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from LV side

en05000189.vsd
IEC05000189 V1 EN

Figure 35: Trajectories of Negative Sequence Current Contributions from HV and

LV sides of Yd5 power transformer during external fault

Therefore, under all external fault condition, the relative angle between the phasors is
theoretically equal to 180 degrees. During internal fault, the angle shall ideally be 0
degrees, but due to possible different negative sequence source impedance angles on
W1 and W2 sides of the protected power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the
ideal zero value. However, during heavy faults, CT saturation might cause the
measured phase angle to differ from 180 degrees for external, and from about 0
degrees for internal fault. See figure 36 for an example of a heavy internal fault with
transient CT saturation.

100
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

Dire ctiona l Compa ris on Crite rion: Inte rna l fa ult a s s e e n from the HV s ide
90
e xcurs ion
120 60
from 0 de gre e s
35 ms due to CT
s a tura tion
150 30
de finite ly
a n inte rna l
fa ult

180 0
trip c o mmand
in 12 ms
e xte rna l
fa ult Inte rna l fa ult
0.5 kA de cla re d 7 ms
re gion
210 330 a fte r inte rna l
fa ult occure d
1.0 kA

240 300
1.5 kA
270
HV s ide contribution to the tota l ne ga tive s e que nce diffe re ntia l curre nt in kA
Dire ctiona l limit (within the re gion de limite d by ± 60 de gre e s is inte rna l fa ult)

en05000190.vsd

IEC05000190 V1 EN

Figure 36: Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator for internal fault
with CT saturation

However, it shall be noted that additional security measures are implemented in the
internal/external fault discriminator algorithm in order to guarantee proper operation
with heavily saturated current transformers. The trustworthy information on whether a
fault is internal or external is typically obtained in about 10ms after the fault inception,
depending on the setting IminNegSeq, and the magnitudes of the fault currents. During
heavy faults, approximately 5ms time to full saturation of the main CT is sufficient in
order to produce a correct discrimination between internal and external faults.

6.1.4.9 Unrestrained, and sensitive negative sequence protections

Two sub functions are based on the internal/external fault discriminator and have the
ability to trip a faulty power transformer, are parts to the traditional power transformer
differential protection.

The unrestrained negative sequence differential protection

The unrestrained negative sequence protection is activated if one or more pickup
signals have been set by the traditional differential protection algorithm. This happens
because one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents entered the

101
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

operate region on the operate - restrain characteristic. So, this protection is not
independent of the traditional restrained differential protection - it is activated after the
first start signal has been placed.

If the fault is positively recognized as internal, then the unrestrained negative sequence
differential protection places its own trip request.

If the bias current is higher than 110% of IBase of the power transformer winding W1,
then any block signals by the harmonic and/or waveform blocking criteria are
overridden, and the differential protection operates quickly without any further delay.
If the bias current is lower than 110% of IBase, the negative sequence differential
protection is restrained by any harmonic block signal.

This logic guarantees a fast disconnection of a faulty power transformer for any heavy
faults.

If a fault is classified as external, the further analysis of the fault conditions is initiated.
If all the instantaneous differential currents in phases where pickup signals have been
issued are free of harmonic pollution, then a (minor) internal fault, simultaneous with a
predominant external fault can be suspected. If the differential current is above the
restrain limit a trip will be issued.

During external faults, major false differential currents can only exist when one or
more current transformers saturate. In this case, the false instantaneous differential
currents are polluted by higher harmonic components, the 2nd, the 5th and so on and the
differential protection will block the trip operation based on the blocking criteria.

Sensitive negative sequence based turn-to-turn fault protection

The sensitive, negative sequence current based turn-to-turn fault protection detects the
low level faults, which are not detected by the traditional differential protection until
they develop into more severe faults, including power transformer iron core. The
sensitive protection is independent from the traditional differential protection and is a
very good complement to it. The essential part of this sensitive protection is the internal/
external fault discriminator. In order to be activated, the sensitive protection requires
no pickup signal from the traditional power transformer biased differential protection.
If magnitudes of HV and LV negative sequence current contributions are above the set
limit for IminNegSeq, then their relative positions are determined. If the disturbance is
characterized as an internal fault, then a separate trip request will be placed. Any
decision on the way to the final trip request must be confirmed several times in
succession in order to cope with eventual CT transients. This causes a short additional
operating time delay due to this security count. For very low level turn-to-turn faults
the overall response time of this protection is about 30ms. The sensitive negative
sequence differential protection is automatically deactivated if the bias current
becomes higher than 150 % IBase. Further, this protection can always be restrained by
any harmonic block signal. This because at rather low fault currents, which are to be
detected by this protection, harmonic pollution is not likely.

102
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

6.1.4.10 Instantaneous differential currents

The instantaneous differential currents are calculated from the instantaneous values of
the input currents in order to perform the harmonic analysis and waveform analysis
upon each one of them (see section "Harmonic and waveform block criteria" for more
information).

6.1.4.11 Harmonic and waveform block criteria

The two blocking criteria are the harmonic restrain and the waveform restrain. These
two criteria have the power to block a trip command by the restrained differential
protection and sensitive negative sequence based turn-to-turn fault protection.

Harmonic restrain
The harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal is to prevent an unwanted trip command
due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, or due to magnetizing
currents at over-voltages.

The magnetizing currents of a power transformer flow only on one side of the power
transformer (one or the other) and are therefore always the cause of false differential
currents. The harmonic analysis (the 2nd and the 5th harmonic) is applied to
instantaneous differential currents. Typical instantaneous differential currents during
power transformer energizing are shown in figure 37. The harmonic analysis is only
applied in those phases, where pickup signals have been set. For example, if the
content of the 2nd harmonic in the instantaneous differential current of phase A is
above the setting I2/I1Ratio, then a block signal is set for that phase.

Waveform restrain
The waveform restrain criterion is a good complement to the harmonic analysis. The
waveform restrain is a pattern recognition algorithm, which looks for intervals within
each fundamental power system cycle with low instantaneous differential current. This
interval is often called current gap in protection literature. However, within differential
function this criterion actually searches for long-lasting intervals with low rate-of-
change in instantaneous differential current, which are typical for the power
transformer inrush currents. Block signal BLKWAV is set in those phases where such
behavior is detected. The algorithm does not require any end user settings. The
waveform algorithm is automatically adapted dependent only on the power transformer
rated data.

103
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

400kV Currents

Current [%]

I_A
I_B
I_C

Time [cycles]
en05000343_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000343 V1 EN

Figure 37: Inrush currents to a transformer as seen by a protection IED. Typical is

a high amount of the 2nd harmonic, and intervals of low current, and
low rate-of-change of current within each period.

Cross-blocking between phases

With the cross-blocking function, one of the three phases can block operation of the
other two phases due to the harmonic pollution of the differential current in that phase
(that is, waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic content). In differential algorithm the user can
control the cross-blocking between the phases via the setting parameter CrossBlockEn.

When parameter CrossBlockEn=Enabled cross blocking between phases is introduced.

There is no time settings involved, but the phase with the operating point above the set
bias characteristic (in the operate region) will be able to cross-block other two phases if
it is itself blocked by any of the previously explained restrained criteria. If the start
signal in this phase is removed, that is, reset from TRUE to FALSE, cross blocking
from that phase will be inhibited. In this way cross-blocking of the temporary nature is
achieved. It should be noted that this is the default (recommended) setting value for
this parameter.

When parameter CrossBlockEn=Disabled, any cross blocking between phases will be

disabled. It is recommended to use the value Disabled with caution in order to avoid
the unwanted tripping during initial energizing of the power transformer.

6.1.4.12 Switch onto fault feature

Transformer differential function in the IED has a built-in, advanced switch onto fault
feature. This feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter SOTFMode.
When enabled this feature ensures quick differential protection tripping in cases where

104
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

a transformer is energized with a more severe (minor faults cannot be discovered)

internal fault (for example, forgotten grounding on transformer LV side for example,
after a regular service). The feature is based on the waveform check. If a severe
internal fault exists, then, during energization the magnetic density in the iron core
will be low and high sinusoidal currents will flow from the very beginning. In this case
the waveform block algorithm removes all its three block signals in a very short
interval of time. This quick reset of the waveblock criterion will temporarily disable
the second harmonic blocking feature of the differential protection function. This
consequently ensures fast operation of the transformer differential function for a switch
onto a fault condition. It shall be noted that this feature is only active during initial
power transformer energizing, more exactly, under the first 50 ms. When the switch
onto fault feature is disabled by the setting parameter SOTFMode, the waveblock and
second harmonic blocking features work in parallel and are completely independent
from each other.

6.1.4.13 Logic diagram

The simplified internal logics, for transformer differential protection are shown in the
following figures.

105
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

ADM Differential function

Trafo
Data

A/D conversion scaling with CT

Phasor calculation of individual

52

Instantaneous (sample based) ID_A

Phasors & samples

phase current
Differential current, phase A

ratio
ID_B

Derive equation to calculate differential currents

Instantaneous (sample based)
Differential current, phase B

Instantaneous (sample based) ID_C

Differential current, phase C

Negative sequence diff current IDMAG_NS

& NS current contribution from
A/D conversion scaling with CT

Phasor calculation of individual

individual windings
phase current

IDMAG_A
Fundamental frequency (phasor
based) Diff current, phase A &
152
ratio

phase current contributions from

individual windings
Phasors & samples

IDMAG_B
Fundamental frequency (phasor
based) Diff current, phase B &
phase current contributions from
individual windings
IDMAG_C
Fundamental frequency (phasor
based) Diff current, phase C &
phase current contributions from
individual windings
MAX IBIAS

Settings for Zer. Seq.

Current Reduction

ANSI09000162_1_en.vsd

ANSI09000162 V1 EN

Figure 38: Treatment of measured currents within IED for transformer differential function

Figure 38 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done in case of two-
winding transformer.

The following currents are inputs to the power transformer differential protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) A.

106
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

1. Instantaneous values of currents (samples) from HV, and LV sides for two-
winding power transformers, and from the HV, the first LV, and the second LV
sides for three-winding power transformers.
2. Currents from all power transformer sides expressed as fundamental frequency
phasors, with their real, and imaginary parts. These currents are calculated within
the protection function by the fundamental frequency Fourier filters.
3. Negative sequence currents from all power transformer sides expressed as phasors.
These currents are calculated within the protection function by the symmetrical
components module.

The power transformer differential protection:

1. Calculates three fundamental frequency differential currents, and one common

bias current. The zero-sequence component can optionally be eliminated from
each of the three fundamental frequency differential currents, and at the same time
from the common bias current.
2. Calculates three instantaneous differential currents. They are used for harmonic,
and waveform analysis. Instantaneous differential currents are useful for post-fault
analysis using disturbance recording
3. Calculates negative-sequence differential current. Contributions to it from all
power transformer sides are used by the internal/external fault discriminator to
detect and classify a fault as internal or external.

107
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

BLKUNRES

IdUnre a TRIPUNRE_A
b>a AND
b
IDMAG_A

IBIAS PU_A
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES

TRIPRES_A
AND
OR NOT

IDA
2nd BLK2H_A
Harmonic

5th BLK5H_A
Harmonic

Wave BLKWAV_A
block
Cross Block
Cross Block to B or C phases
from B or C phases AND
OR
AND
CrossBlockEn=Enabled

ANSI05000168_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000168 V2 EN

Figure 39: Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for Phase A

108
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

Internal/ EXTFAULT
Neg.Seq. Diff External INTFAULT
Current Fault
Contributions discrimin
ator TRNSSENS
t
AND 0
OpNegSeqDiff=On

IBIAS
a
b>a
b
Constant
BLKNSSEN
BLKNSUNR
BLOCK
TRNSUNR
PU_A AND
PU_B
OR
PU_C

en05000167_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000167 V1 EN

Figure 40: Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for internal/
external fault discriminator

TRIPRES_A
TRIPRES_B TRIPRES
OR
TRIPRES_C

TRIPUNRE_A
TRIPUNRE_B TRIPUNRE
OR
TRIPUNRE_C

TRIP
TRNSSENS OR
TRNSUNR

en05000278_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000278 V1 EN

Figure 41: Transformer differential protection internal grouping of tripping signals

109
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

PU_A
PU_B PICKUP
OR
PU_C

BLK2H_A
BLK2H_B BLK2H
OR
BLK2H_C

BLK5H_A
BLK5H_B BLK5H
OR
BLK5H_C

BLKWAV_A
BLKWAV_B BLKWAV
OR
BLKWAV_C

en05000279_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000279 V1 EN

Figure 42: Transformer differential protection internal grouping of logical signals

Logic in figures 39, 40, 41 and 42 can be summarized as follows:

1. The three fundamental frequency differential currents are applied in a phase

segregated manner to two limits. The first limit is the operate-restrain
characteristic, while the other is the high-set unrestrained limit. If the first limit is
exceeded, a pickup signal PICKUP is set. If the unrestrained limit is exceeded, an
immediate unrestrained trip TRIPUNRE and common trip TRIP are issued.
2. If a pickup signal is issued in a phase, then the harmonic-, and the waveform block
signals are checked. Only a pickup signal, which is free of all of its respective
blocking signals, can result in a trip command. If the cross-block logic scheme is
applied, then only if all phases with set pickup signal are free of their respective
block signals, a restrained trip TRIPRES and common trip TRIP are issued
3. If a pickup signal is issued in a phase, and the fault has been classified as internal,
then any eventual block signals are overridden and a unrestrained negative-
sequence trip TRNSUNR and common trip TRIP are issued without any further
delay. This feature is called the unrestrained negative-sequence protection 110%
bias.
4. The sensitive negative sequence differential protection is independent of any
pickup signals. It is meant to detect smaller internal faults, such as turn-to-turn
faults, which are often not detected by the traditional differential protection. The
sensitive negative sequence differential protection pickup whenever both
contributions to the total negative sequence differential current (that must be
compared by the internal/external fault discriminator) are higher than the value of
the setting IMinNegSeq. If a fault is positively recognized as internal, and the
condition is stable with no interruption for at least one fundamental frequency
cycle the sensitive negative sequence differential protection TRNSSENS and

110
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

common trip TRIP are issued. This feature is called the sensitive negative
sequence differential protection.
5. If a pickup signal is issued in a phase (see signal PU_A), even if the fault has been
classified as an external fault, then the instantaneous differential current of that
phase (see signal ID_A) is analyzed for the 2nd and the 5th harmonic contents (see
the blocks with the text inside: 2nd Harmonic; Wave block and 5th Harmonic). If
there is less harmonic pollution, than allowed by the settings I2/I1Ratio, and I5/
I1Ratio, (then the outputs from the blocks 2nd harmonic and 5th harmonic is 0)
then it is assumed that a minor simultaneous internal fault must have occurred.
Only under these conditions a trip command is allowed (the signal TRIPRES_A is
= 1). The cross-block logic scheme is automatically applied under such
circumstances. (This means that the cross block signals from the other two phases
B and C is not activated to obtain a trip on the TRIPRES_A output signal in figure
39)
6. All pickup and blocking conditions are available as phase segregated as well as
common signals.

IDMAG_A Diff
a
a>b
IDiffAlarm b

IDMAG_B Diff
a
0-tAlarmDelay IDALARM
a>b & 0
IDiffAlarm b

IDMAG_C Diff
a
a>b
IDiffAlarm b

ANSI06000546-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000546 V2 EN

Figure 43: Differential current alarm logic

111
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

6.1.5 Technical data

Table 33: T2WPDIF, T3WPDIF (87T) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic Adaptable ± 1.0% of In for I < In
± 1.0% of I for I > In
Reset ratio >94% -
Unrestrained differential current limit (1.00-50.00)xIBase on ± 1.0% of set value
high voltage winding
Base sensitivity function (0.05 - 0.60) x IBase ± 1.0% of In
Minimum negative sequence current (0.02 - 0.20) x IBase ± 1.0% of In
Operate angle, negative sequence (30.0 - 90.0) degrees ± 1.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5.0-100.0)% of ± 2.0% of applied harmonic
fundamental differential magnitude
current
Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0-100.0)% of ± 12.0% of applied harmonic
fundamental differential magnitude
current
Connection type for each of the windings Wye or delta -
Phase displacement between high voltage 0–11 -
winding, W1 and each of the windings, W2
and W3. Hour notation
Operate time, restrained function 25 ms typically at 0 to -
5 x set level
Reset time, restrained function 25 ms typically at 5 to -
0 x set level
Operate time, unrestrained function 20 ms typically at 0 to -
5 x set level
Reset time, unrestrained function 25 ms typically at 5 to -
0 x set level

6.2 Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance

REFPDIF (87N)

6.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Restricted earth fault protection, low REFPDIF 87N
impedance
IdN/I

SYMBOL-AA V1 EN

112
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

6.2.2 Functionality
Restricted earth-fault protection, low-impedance function (REFPDIF, 87N) can be
used on all solidly or low-impedance grounded windings. The REFPDIF (87N)
function provides high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it protects each winding
separately and thus does not need inrush stabilization.

The low-impedance function is a percentage biased function with an additional zero

sequence current directional comparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity and
stability during through faults. The function allows the use of different CT ratios and
magnetizing characteristics on the phase and neutral CT cores. Unlike high impedance
restricted ground fault it allows for mixing with other functions and protection IEDs on
the same CT cores.

6.2.3 Function block

REFPDIF (87N)
I3P* TRIP
I3PW1CT1* PICKUP
I3PW2CT1* DIR_INT
BLOCK BLK2H
IRES
IN
IBIAS
IDIFF
ANGLE
2NDHARM

ANSI09000275-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000275 V1 EN

Figure 44: REFPDIF (87N) function block

6.2.4 Signals
Table 34: Input signals for the function block REFPDIF (REF1-)
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for neutral current input
I3PW1CT1 Group signal for primary CT1 current input
I3PW2CT1 Group signal for secondary CT1 current input
BLOCK Block of function

113
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

Table 35: Output signals for the function block REFPDIF (REF1-)
Signal Description
TRIP General trip signal
START General start signal
DIROK Directional criteria has operated for internal fault
BLK2H Block due to 2-nd harmonic
IRES Magnitude of fundamental frequency residual current
IN Magnitude of fundamental frequency neutral current
IBIAS Magnitude of the bias current
IDIFF Magnitude of fundamental frequency differential current
ANGLE Direction angle from zero sequence feature
I2RATIO Second harmonic ratio

6.2.5 Settings
Table 36: Basic general settings for the function REFPDIF (REF1-)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 1 1 - Selection of one of the
Global Base Value groups

Table 37: Basic parameter group settings for the function REFPDIF (REF1-)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 4.0 - 100.0 0.1 10.0 %IB Maximum sensitivity in %
of IBase

Table 38: Advanced parameter group settings for the function REFPDIF (REF1-)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ROA 60 - 90 1 60 Deg Relay operate angle for
zero sequence directional
feature

114
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

6.2.6 Monitored data

Table 39: REFPDIF (87N) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IRES REAL - A Magnitude of fundamental
frequency residual current
IN REAL - A Magnitude of fundamental
frequency neutral current
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias current
IDIFF REAL - A Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current
ANGLE REAL - deg Direction angle from zero
sequence feature
2NDHARM REAL - - Second harmonic ratio

6.2.7 Principle of operation

6.2.7.1 Fundamental principles of the restricted ground fault protection

Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF, 87N) detects

ground faults on grounded power transformer windings, most often an groundedwye
winding. REFPDIF (87N) is a winding protection of the differential type. Since
REFPDIF (87N) is based on the zero sequence currents, which theoretically only exist
in case of a ground-fault, REFPDIF (87N) can be made very sensitive, regardless of
normal load currents. It is the fastest protection a power transformer winding can have.
Remember that the high sensitivity and the high speed tend to make such a protection
unstable. Special measures must be taken to make it insensitive to conditions for which
it should not operate, for example, heavy through faults of phase-to-phase type, or
heavy external ground faults.

REFPDIF(87N) is of the low impedance type. All three-phase currents, and the neutral
point current, must be fed separately to REFPDIF(87N). Fundamental frequency
components of all currents are extracted from all input currents, while other eventual
zero sequence components, such as the 3rd harmonic currents, are fully suppressed.
Then the residual current phasor is calculated from the three line current phasors. This
zero sequence current phasor is then added to the neutral current vectorially, in order to
obtain differential current.

The following facts may be observed from figure 45 and figure 46, where the three line
CTs are shown as connected together in order to measure the residual 3Io current, for
the sake of simplicity.

115
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

ROA (Relay Operate Angle)

ROA = 60 deg
REFPDIF never operates for any faults
IN external to the protected zone.

Currents 3Io and IN are theoretically

180o out of phase for any external
ground-fault.

ANSI05000724 V3 EN

Figure 45: Zero sequence currents at an external ground fault

Uzs Uzs

IN

ANSI05000725 V3 EN

Figure 46: Zero sequence currents at an internal ground fault

116
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

1. For an external ground fault (figure 45), the residual current 3I0 and the neutral
current IN have equal magnitude, but they are seen by the IED as 180 degrees out-
of-phase if the current transformers are connected as in figure 45, which is the
ABB recommended connection. The differential current becomes zero as both CTs
ideally measure exactly the same component of the ground fault current.
2. For an internal fault, the total ground-fault current is composed generally of two
zero sequence current. One zero sequence current IN flows towards the power
transformer neutral point and into the ground, while the other zero sequence
current 3I0 flows out into the connected power system. These two primary currents
can be expected to be of approximately opposite directions (about the same zero
sequence impedance angle is assumed on both sides of the ground fault).
However, on the secondary CT sides of the current transformers, they will be
approximately in phase if the current transformers are oriented as in figure 2,
which is by ABB recommended orientation. The magnitudes of the two currents
may be different, dependent on the magnitudes of zero sequence impedances of
both sides. No current can flow towards the power system, if the only point where
the system is grounded, is at the protected power transformer. Likewise, no current
can flow into the power system, if the winding is not connected to the power
system (circuit breaker open and power transformer energized from the other side).
3. For both internal and external ground faults, the current in the neutral connection
IN has always the same direction, that is, towards the ground (This is not valid in
case of autotransformers).
4. The two internally processed zero sequence currents are 3I0 and IN. The vectorial
sum between them is the REFPDIF (87N) differential current, which is equal to
Idiff = IN +3I0.

REFPDIF (87N) is a differential protection where the line zero sequence (residual)
current is calculated from 3 line (terminal) currents, a bias quantity must give stability
against false operations due to high through fault currents. To stabilize REFPDIF at
external faults, a fixed bias characteristic is implemented.

REFPDIF (87N) should also be stable against heavy phase-to-phase internal faults, not
including ground. These faults may also give false zero sequence currents due to
saturated line CTs. Such faults, however are without neutral current, and can thus be
eliminated as a source of danger.

As an additional measure against unwanted operation, a directional check is made in

agreement with the above points 1 and 2. Operation is only allowed if the currents 3I0
and IN (as shown in figure 45 and figure 46) are both within the operating region. By
taking a smaller ROA, REFPDIF (87N) can be made more stable under heavy external
fault conditions, as well as under the complex conditions, when external faults are
cleared by other protections.

117
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

6.2.7.2 Operate and restrain characteristic

Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance (REFPDIF, 87N) is a winding

protection of differential type, whose settings are independent of any other protection.
Compared to the transformer differential protection it has some advantages. It is less
complicated as no current phase correction and magnitude correction are needed, not
even in the case of an On-Load Tap-Changer (OLTC). REFPDIF (87N) is not sensitive
to inrush and overexcitation currents. The only danger is current transformer saturation.

REFPDIF (87N) has a fixed operate-restrain characteristic, which is described in table

40, and shown in figure 47.

Table 40: Data of the operate-restrain characteristic of REFPDIF(87N)

Default sensitivity Max. base Min. base sensitivity End of zone First slope Second
Idmin (zone 1) sensitivity Idmin Idmin (zone 1) 1 slope
(zone 1)
% IBase % IBase % IBase % IBase % %
30 5 100 125 70 100

The bias (restrain) current is supposed to give stability to REFPDIF(87N). The bias
current is a measure of how difficult the conditions are under which the CTs operate.
The higher the bias current, the more difficult conditions can be suspected, and the
more likely that the calculated differential current has a component of a false current,
primarily due to CT saturation. This "law" is formulated by the operate-bias
characteristic. The restrained part of the differential protection compares the calculated
fundamental differential currents, and the bias current, by applying them to the operate-
restrain characteristic. The operate-restrain characteristic is represented by a double-
slope, doublebreakpoint characteristic, as shown in 47. The restrained characteristic is
only determined by IdMin, all other parameters are fixed.

Figure 47: Operate - bias characteristic of the Restricted ground-fault protection,

low impedance REFPDIF (87N)

6.2.7.3 Calculation of differential current and bias current

The differential current (operate current), as a fundamental frequency phasor, is

calculated as (with designations as in figure 45 and figure 46):

Idiff = IN + 3I0
IECEQUATION2417 V1 EN (Equation 26)

118
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

where:
IN current in the power transformer neutral as a fundamental frequency phasor,

3I0 residual current of the power transformer line (terminal) currents as a phasor.

The bias current is a measure (expressed internally as a true fundamental frequency

current in Amperes) of how difficult the conditions are under which the instrument
current transformers operate. Dependent on the magnitude of the bias current, the
corresponding zone (section) of the operate - bias characteristic is applied, when
deciding whether to trip, or not to trip. In general, the higher the bias current, the
higher the differential current required to produce a trip.

The bias current is the highest current of all separate input currents to REFPDIF (87N),
that is, of current in phase A, phase B, phase C, and the current in the neutral point
(designated as IN in figure 45 and in figure 46).

If there are two feeders included in the zone of protection of REFPDIF (87N), then the
respective bias current is found as the relatively highest of the following currents, that
is, those which are connected in an application:

1
current[1] = max (I3PW1CT1) ×
CTFactorPri1
EQUATION1526 V1 EN (Equation 27)

1
current[3] = max (I3PW2CT1) ×
CTFactorSec1
EQUATION1528 V1 EN (Equation 28)

current[5] = IN
EQUATION1530 V1 EN (Equation 29)

The bias current is thus generally equal to none of the input currents. If all primary
ratings of the CTs were equal to IBase, then the bias current would be equal to the
highest current in Amperes. IBase shall be set equal to the rated current of the
protected winding where REFPDIF (87N) function is applied.

6.2.7.4 Detection of external ground faults

External faults are more common than internal ground faults for which the restricted
ground fault protection should operate. It is important that the restricted ground fault
protection remains stable during heavy external ground and phase-to-phase faults, and
also when such a heavy external fault is cleared by some other protection such as
overcurrent, or ground-fault protection, and so on. The conditions during a heavy
external fault, and particularly immediately after the clearing of such a fault may be

119
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

complex. The circuit breaker’s poles may not open exactly at the same moment, some
of the CTs may still be highly saturated, and so on.

The detection of external ground faults is based on the fact that for such a fault a high
neutral current appears first, while a false differential current only appears if one or
more current transformers saturate.

For an internal ground fault, a true differential current develops immediately, while for
an external fault it only develops if a CT saturates. If a trip request comes first, before
an external fault could be positively established, then it must be an internal fault.

If an external ground fault has been detected, then the REFPDIF (87N) is temporarily
desensitized.

Directional criterion
The directional criterion is applied in order to positively distinguish between internal
and external ground faults. This check is an additional criterion, which should prevent
malfunctions at heavy external ground faults, and during the disconnection of such
faults by other protections. Ground faults on lines connecting the power transformer
occur much more often than ground faults on a power transformer winding. It is
important therefore that the Restricted ground fault protection, low impedance
(REFPDIF87N) must remain stable during an external fault, and immediately after the
fault has been cleared by some other protection.

For an external ground faults with no CT saturation, the residual current in the lines
(3Io) and the neutral current (IN in figure 45) are theoretically equal in magnitude and
are 180 degrees out-of-phase. The current in the neutral (IN) serves as a directional
reference because it has the same direction for both internal and external ground faults.
The directional criterion in REFPDIF (87N) protection makes it a current-polarized
protection.

Second harmonic analysis

On energizing a transformer, a false differential current may appear in the restricted earth-
fault protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF 87N). The phase CTs may saturate
due to a high DC component with long duration, but the current through the neutral CT
does not have either the same DC component or the same magnitude and the risk for
saturation in this CT is not as high. The differential current due to the saturation may
be so high that it reaches the operate characteristic. A calculation of the content of 2nd
harmonic in the neutral current is made when neutral current, residual current and bias
current are within some windows and some timing criteria are fulfilled. If the ratio
between second and fundamental harmonic exceeds 60%, REFPDIF (87N) is blocked.

120
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

6.2.7.5 Algorithm of the restricted ground fault protection

1. Check if the current in the neutral (IN) is less than 50% of the base sensitivity
Idmin. If yes, only service values are calculated, and REFPDIF (87N) algorithm is
blocked.
2. If the current in the neutral (IN) is more than 50% of Idmin, then determine the
bias current Ibias.
3. The differential current phasor (IDIFF) is determined.
4. Check if the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is above the operate - restrain characteristic. If
yes, increment the trip request counter by 1. If the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to
be below the operate - restrain characteristic, then the trip request counter is reset
to 0.
5. If the trip request counter is still 0, search for an eventual heavy external ground
fault. The search is only made if the neutral current is at least 50% of the Idmin
current. If an external ground fault has been detected, a flag is set which remains
set until the external fault has been cleared. The external fault flag is reset to 0
when IN falls below 50% of the base sensitivity Idmin. Any search for an external
fault is aborted if the trip request counter is more than 0.
6. For as long as the external fault persists an additional temporary trip condition is
introduced. That means that REFPDIF (87N) is temporarily desensitized.
7. If point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be above the operate - restrain characteristic), a
directional check can be made. The directional check is made only if (3I0) is more
than 3% of the IBase. If the result is an external fault the internal trip request is
reset. If the directional check cannot be executed, then direction is no longer a
condition for a trip.
8. When neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some windows
and some timing criteria are fulfilled, the ratio of 2nd to fundamental tone is
calculated. If it is found to be above 60% the trip request counter is reset and TRIP
remains zero.
9. Finally, a check is made if the trip request counter is equal to, or higher than 2. If it
is, and that at the same instance of time tREFtrip, the actual bias current at this
instance of time tREFtrip is at least 50% of the highest bias current Ibiasmax
(Ibiasmax is the highest recording of any of the three phase currents measured
during the disturbance) then REFPDIF (87N) sets output TRIP to 1. If the counter
is less than 2, TRIP signal remains 0.

121
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

6.2.8 Technical data

Table 41: REFPDIF (87N) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate characteristic Adaptable ± 1% of IBase if Ibias < 1.25
IBase (i.e. base sensitivity in
section 1 of the operate - restrain
characteristic)
± 2% of theoretical operate value
(Idiff) if Ibias >= 1.25 IBase (i.e.
sections 2 and 3)
(The above is valid if IBase is
equal to the protected winding
rated current.)
Reset ratio 0.95 -
Directional characteristic, for ROA ± 60 to ± 90 degrees ± 1 degrees at Ibias = IBase
zero sequence directional ± 2 degrees at Ibias = 2 * IBase
function ± 3 degrees at Ibias = 4 * IBase
(The above is valid if IBase is
equal to the protected winding
rated current.)
Operate time, trip function 25 ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -
Reset time, trip function 30 ms typically at 10 to 0 x IdMin -

6.3 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

(87)

6.3.1 Identification
IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Function description
identification identification device number

1Ph High impedance differential Id

HZPDIF 87
protection

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN

6.3.2 Introduction
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF, 87) function can be used
when the involved CTs have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
characteristics. It utilizes an external summation of the currents in the interconnected

122
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

CTs, a series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which are mounted externally
connected to the IED.

HZPDIF (87) can be used as high impedance REF protection.

6.3.3 Function block

HZPDIF (87)
ISI* TRIP
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR MEASVOLT

ANSI05000363-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000363 V2 EN

Figure 48: HZPDIF (87) function block

6.3.4 Signals
Table 42: HZPDIF (87) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ISI GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

Table 43: HZPDIF (87) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

123
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Differential protection

6.3.5 Settings
Table 44: HZPDIF (87) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
AlarmPickup 2 - 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level on CT secondary
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
TripPickup 5 - 900 V 1 100 Pickup voltage level in volts on CT secondary
side
R series 10 - 20000 ohm 1 1800 Value of series resistor in Ohms

6.3.6 Monitored data

Table 45: HZPDIF (87) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MEASVOLT REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage on
CT secondary side

6.3.7 Operation principle

The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF, 87) function is based on
one current input with external stabilizing resistor and voltage dependent resistor. The
stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the function operating value V TripPickup
calculated to achieve through fault stability. The used stabilizing resistor value is set by
the setting R series.

See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

6.3.7.1 Logic diagram

The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF (87), see figure 49. It is a simple one step
function with an additional lower alarm level. By activating inputs, the HZPDIF (87)
function can either be blocked completely, or only the trip output.

124
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 6
Differential protection

AlarmPickup
0-tAlarm
0

AlarmPickup
0.03s
0

en05000301_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000301 V1 EN

Figure 49: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF
(87)

6.3.8 Technical data

Table 46: HZPDIF (87)technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (20-400) V ± 1.0% of In
I=V/R
Reset ratio >95% -
Maximum continuous V>Pickup2/SeriesResistor ≤200 W -
power
Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd -

Reset time 105 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Vd -

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd -

125
Technical Manual
126
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Section 7 Current protection

7.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output PHPIOC (50)

7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection 3-phase output
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN

7.1.2 Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

7.1.3 Function block

PHPIOC (50)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK

ANSI08000001-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000001 V1 EN

Figure 50: PHPIOC (50) function block

7.1.4 Signals
Table 47: PHPIOC (50) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

127
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Table 48: PHPIOC (50) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal

7.1.5 Settings
Table 49: PHPIOC (50) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
Pickup 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Phase current pickup in % of IBase

Table 50: PHPIOC (50) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.1.6 Monitored data

Table 51: PHPIOC (50) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I_A REAL - A Current in phase A
I_B REAL - A Current in phase B
I_C REAL - A Current in phase C

7.1.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental
frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase
current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
function PHPIOC (50). In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set
operation current value of the function Pickup. If a phase current is larger than the set
operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

PHPIOC (50) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

128
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

7.1.8 Technical data

Table 52: PHPIOC (50) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time 20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time 30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset -

Reset time 40 ms typically at 5 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

7.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output OC4PTOC (51/67)

7.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 51/67
3I>
3-phase output
4
alt
4
TOC-REVA V1 EN

7.2.2 Functionality
The four step phase overcurrent protection function, 3-phase output OC4PTOC (51/67)
has independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4. Step 2 and 3 are always
definite time delayed.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available.

The directional function is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set to
be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

129
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

A 2nd harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.

7.2.3 Function block

OC4PTOC (51_67)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRST1
BLOCK TRST2
BLK1 TRST3
BLK2 TRST4
BLK3 PICKUP
BLK4 PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
2NDHARM

ANSI08000002-2-en.vsd

ANSI08000002 V2 EN

Figure 51: OC4PTOC (51/67) function block

7.2.4 Signals
Table 53: OC4PTOC (51_67) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3
BLK4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4

Table 54: OC4PTOC (51_67) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRST3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
Table continues on next page

130
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Name Type Description

TRST4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2
PU_ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 3
PU_ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 4
PU_A BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C BOOLEAN Pickup signal from phase C
2NDHARM BOOLEAN Block from second harmonic detection

7.2.5 Settings
Table 55: OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
DirModeSel1 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
Pickup1 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Phase current operate level for step1 in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time delay of step 1
TD1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 1
IMin1 5 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1in% of IBase
Table continues on next page

131
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 1
DirModeSel2 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
Pickup2 5 - 2500 %IB 1 500 Phase current operate level for step 2 in % of
IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Definite time delay of step 2
DirModeSel3 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
Pickup3 5 - 2500 %IB 1 250 Phase current operate level for step3 in % of
IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Definite time delay of step 3
DirModeSel4 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 off / non-
Non-directional directional / forward / reverse
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
Pickup4 5 - 2500 %IB 1 175 Phase current operate level for step 4 in % of
IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Definite time delay of step 4
TD4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 4
IMin4 5 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step4 in % of
IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 4

132
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Table 56: OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Pickup of second harm restraint in % of
Fundamental
HarmRestrain1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain
Enabled
HarmRestrain2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain
Enabled
HarmRestrain3 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step3 from harmonic restrain
Enabled
HarmRestrain Disabled - - Disabled Enable block from harmonic restrain
Enabled
PUMinFund 5 - 100 %IB 1 7 Fundamental frequency current level in % of
IBase
HarmRestrain4 Disabled - - Disabled Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
Enabled

Table 57: OC4PTOC (51_67) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement

7.2.6 Monitored data

Table 58: OC4PTOC (51_67) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIR_A INTEGER 0=No direction - Direction for phase A
1=Forward
2=Reverse
DIR_B INTEGER 0=No direction - Direction for phase B
1=Forward
2=Reverse
DIR_C INTEGER 0=No direction - Direction for phase C
1=Forward
2=Reverse
I_A REAL - A Current in phase A
I_B REAL - A Current in phase B
I_C REAL - A Current in phase C

133
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.2.7 Operation principle

The protection design can be decomposed in four parts:

• The direction element

• The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
• The four step over current function
• The mode selection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter

DirModeSelx shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

4 step over current

Direction dirPhAFlt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPhBFlt step
I3P dirPhCFlt PICKUP

V3P

TRIP

Harmonic harmRestrBlock
I3P Restraint
Element

enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000740 V1 EN

Figure 52: Functional overview of OC4PTOC (51/67)

The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase

134
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC (51/67), it is possible to

select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to
select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).

If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option
is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the
fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC
component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are
fed to OC4PTOC (51/67).

In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the
set operation current value of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3, Pickup4). If a
phase current is larger than the set operation current, outputs PICKUP, PU_STx,
PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are, without delay, activated. Output signals PU_A, PU_B
and PU_C are common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the
activation. The PICKUP signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be
noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC (51/67) .

Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local
HMI for OC4PTOC (51/67) function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in
service operational checking of the function.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the
pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain
current level.

The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current
angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the
directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement
at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a
combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The
following combinations are used.

Phase-phase short circuit:

Vref _ AB = VA - VB I dir _ AB = I A - I B
GUID-4F361BC7-6D91-47B5-8119-A27009C0AD6A V1 EN (Equation 30)

Vref _ BC = VB - VC I dir _ BC = I B - I C
ANSIEQUATION1450 V1 EN (Equation 31)
Table continues on next page

135
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Vref _ CA = VC - VA I dir _ CA = IC - I A
ANSIEQUATION1451 V1 EN (Equation 32)

Phase-ground short circuit:

Vref _ A = VA I dir _ A = I A
ANSIEQUATION1452 V1 EN (Equation 33)

Vref _ B = VB I dir _ B = I B
ANSIEQUATION1453 V1 EN (Equation 34)

Vref _ C = VC I dir _ C = I C
ANSIEQUATION1454 V1 EN (Equation 35)

136
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Vref

2
4

Idir

ANSI09000636-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000636 V1 EN

Figure 53: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

1 RCA = Relay characteristic angle 55°

2 ROA = Relay operating angle 80°
3 Reverse
4 Forward

If no blockings are given the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for step 1 and 4 can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed. A wide range of
standardized inverse time characteristics is available. The possibilities for inverse time
characteristics are described in section "Inverse time characteristics".

All four steps in OC4PTOC (51/67) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
The binary input BLKx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

137
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND TRx
a
a>b
OR 0-tx
Pickupx b
0

AND
STx

BLKSTx 0-txMin
0 AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModeSelx=Disabled OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModeSelx=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

ANSI12000008-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000008-1-en.vsd

ANSI12000008 V1 EN

Figure 54: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

7.2.8 Technical data

Table 59: OC4PTOC (51/67) technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I ≤ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% -

Min. operating current (1-10000)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I ≤ In
±1.0% of I at I > In

2nd harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of In

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms

Minimum operate time for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
inverse characteristics
Inverse characteristics, see 17 curve types 1)ANSI/IEEE C37.112
table 480, table 481 and table IEC 60255–151
482 ±3% or ±40 ms
0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset

Operate time, nondirectional 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

pickup function
Reset time, pickup function 30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Operate time, directional pickup 50 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

function
Table continues on next page

138
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Function Setting range Accuracy

Reset time, directional pickup 35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -
function
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

1) Note: Timing accuracy only valid when 2nd harmonic blocking is turned off

7.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC

(50N)

7.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN

7.3.2 Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N) has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow use for instantaneous ground-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the transformer
impedance at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC (50N) can be configured to
measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs or the current from a
separate current input. EFPIOC (50N) can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

7.3.3 Function block

EFPIOC (50N)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK

ANSI08000003-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000003 V1 EN

Figure 55: EFPIOC (50N) function block

139
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.3.4 Signals
Table 60: EFPIOC (50N) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 61: EFPIOC (50N) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal

7.3.5 Settings
Table 62: EFPIOC (50N) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
Pickup 1 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of IBase

Table 63: EFPIOC (50N) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.3.6 Monitored data

Table 64: EFPIOC (50N) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IN REAL - A Residual current

7.3.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as
well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value
is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC,50N). In a

140
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the
function (Pickup). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal
from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output
signal TRIP.

7.3.8 Technical data

Table 65: EFPIOC (50N) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time 20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time 30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time 10 ms typically at 0 to 5x Iset -

Reset time 40 ms typically at 5 to 0x Iset -

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

7.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero,

negative sequence direction EF4PTOC (51N/67N)

7.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N/67N
protection, zero or negative sequence
direction 2

IEC11000263 V1 EN

141
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.4.2 Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection, zero or negative sequence direction
(EF4PTOC, 51N/67N) has independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4.
Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available.

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each

of the steps.

The directional part of the function can be set to operate on following combinations:
• Directional current (I3PDir) versus Polarizing voltage (V3PPol)
• Directional current (I3PDir) versus Polarizing current (I3PPol)
• Directional current (I3PDir) versus Dual polarizing (VPol+ZPol x IPol) where
ZPol = RPol + jXPol

IDir, VPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.

Other setting combinations are possible, but not recommended.

Second harmonic blocking restraint level can be set for the function and can be used to
block each step individually.

7.4.3 Function block

EF4PTOC (51N_67N)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRST1
I3PPOL* TRST2
I3PDIR* TRST3
BLOCK TRST4
BLK1 BFI_3P
BLK2 PU_ST1
BLK3 PU_ST2
BLK4 PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PUFW
PUREV
2NDHARMD

ANSI08000004-2-en.vsd

ANSI08000004 V2 EN

Figure 56: EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function block

142
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

7.4.4 Signals
Table 66: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for polarizing voltage inputs
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Three phase group signal for polarizing current inputs
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Three phase group signal for operating directional
SIGNAL inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (start and trip)
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (start and trip)
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (start and trip)
BLK4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (start and trip)

Table 67: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRST3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TRST4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 2
PU_ST3 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 3
PU_ST4 BOOLEAN Pickup signal step 4
PUFW BOOLEAN Forward directional pickup signal
PUREV BOOLEAN Reverse directional pickup signal
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal

143
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.4.5 Settings
Table 68: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
EnaDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
VPolMin 1 - 100 %VB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization (UN or
U2) in % of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization (IN or
I2) in % of IBase
RPol 0.50 - 1000.00 ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source Z to be used for current
polarisation
XPol 0.50 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source Z to be used for
current polarisation
I>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current level (IN or I2) for direction release in
% of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Second harmonic restrain operation in % of
IN magnitude
DirModeSel1 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
Pickup1 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current pickup for step 1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Independent (definite) time delay of step 1
Table continues on next page

144
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TD1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay
for step 1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1in% of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 1
HarmRestrain1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain
Enabled
DirModeSel2 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Pickup2 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Residual current pickup for step 2 in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Independent (definite) time delay of step 2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step 2 in % of
IBase
HarmRestrain2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain
Enabled
DirModeSel3 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Pickup3 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Residual current pickup for step 3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Independent (definite) time delay of step 3
IMin3 1 - 10000 %IB 1 33 Minimum operate current for step 3 in % of
IBase
HarmRestrain3 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain
Enabled
DirModeSel4 Disabled - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, non-
Non-directional directional, forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay curve type for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
RI type
RD type
Table continues on next page

145
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Pickup4 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Residual current pickup for step 4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Independent (definite) time delay of step 4
TD4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay
for step 4
IMin4 1 - 10000 %IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step 4 in % of
IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4
HarmRestrain4 Disabled - - Enabled Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
Enabled

Table 69: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
SeqTypeUPol ZeroSeq - - ZeroSeq Choice of measurand for polarizing voltage
NegSeq
SeqTypeIPol ZeroSeq - - ZeroSeq Choice of measurand for polarizing current
NegSeq
SeqTypeIDir ZeroSeq - - ZeroSeq Choice of measurand for directional current
NegSeq

7.4.6 Monitored data

Table 70: EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STDIR INTEGER 0=No direction - Fault direction coded as
1=Forward integer
2=Reverse
3=Both
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
VPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
VPolIang REAL - deg Angle between polarizing
voltage and operating current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Angle between polarizing
current and operating current
IOPDIR REAL - A Amplitude of the directional
operating quantity

146
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

7.4.7 Operation principle

Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero or negative sequence direction
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function has the following four “Analog Inputs” on its function
block in the configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”.

2. V3P, input used for “Voltage Polarizing Quantity”.
3. I3PPOL, input used for “Current Polarizing Quantity”.
4. I3PDIR, input used for “Operating Directional Quantity”.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in
the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

7.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function

If the function is set to measure zero sequence, it uses Residual Current (3I0) for its
operating quantity. The residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600

to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example,
connected to:
• parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection).
• one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
• one single current instrument transformer located between power system
WYE point and ground (that is, current transformer located in the neutral
grounding of a WYE connected transformer winding).
• one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two WYE
points of double WYE shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula (will
take I2 from same SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input (same SMAI AI3P
connected to I3P input)):

If zero sequence current is selected,

I op = 3 × Io = IA + IB + IC
EQUATION2011-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 36)

147
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

where:
IA, IB, IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC (51N/67N) protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If
the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-
directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the output signal PU_STx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a
common PICKUP signal.

7.4.7.2 Internal polarizing

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction
to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use either the residual voltage
3V0 or the negative sequence voltage V2 as polarizing quantity V3P.

The residual voltage can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in PCM600

to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input V3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then connected to
open delta winding of a three phase main VT.
2. calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) analog
function input V3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3V0 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

VPol=3V0=(VA +VB +VC)

ANSIEQUATION2407 V1 EN (Equation 38)

148
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

where:
VA, VB, VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

In order to use this, all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED
VT inputs.

The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.

The negative sequence voltage is calculated from the three-phase voltage input within
the IED by using the pre-processing block. The preprocessing block will calculate the
negative sequence voltage from the three inputs into the pre-processing block by using
the following formula:

VPol = (VA+ alpha ×VB + alpha ×VC)/3

GUID-F09A69D7-A8A6-4354-B0B8-F4EC7BBE603F V2 EN (Equation 39)

where:
VA, VB, VC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
alpha unit phasor with an angle of 120 degrees.

The polarizing phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional
current, in order to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse). In
order to enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger
than a minimum level defined by setting parameter VpolMin.

It shall be noted that residual voltage (Vn) or negative sequence voltage (V2) is used to
determine the location of the ground fault. This insures the required inversion of the
polarizing voltage within the ground-fault function.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current
(3I0) or the calculated negative sequence current (I2) as polarizing quantity IPol. The
user can select the required current.

The residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600

to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically
connected to one single current transformer located between power system WYE

149
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

point and ground (current transformer located in the WYE point of a WYE
connected transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input
can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three
phases (Holm-Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

I Pol = 3 × Io = IA + IB + IC
EQUATION2019-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 40)

where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The negative sequence current can be calculated from the three-phase current input
within the IED by using the pre-processing block. The pre-processing block will
calculate the negative sequence current from the three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:

Ipol = (IA+alpha 2 × IB+alpha × IC)/3

ANSIEQUATION2406 V2 EN (Equation 41)

where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
alpha phasor with an angle of 120 degrees.

The polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor
is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to
calculate equivalent polarizing voltage VIPol in accordance with the following formula:

VIPol = Zo S × I Pol = ( RNPol + j × XNPOL ) × I Pol

EQUATION2013-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 42)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating directional current,
in order to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).

In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger
than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

150
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:

VTotPol=VVPol + VIPol=VPol + Z 0s × IPol = VPol + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) × Ipol

ANSIEQUATION2408 V1 EN (Equation 43)

Vpol and Ipol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component
depending upon the user selection.

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the ground fault (Forward/
Reverse).

7.4.7.3 Operating directional quantity within the function

The function can take either the residual current or the negative sequence current for its
operating directional quantity. The residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600

to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically
connected to one single current transformer located between power system WYE
point and ground (current transformer located in the WYE point of a WYE
connected transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input
can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three
phases (Holm-Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

I Pol = 3 × Io = IA + IB + IC
EQUATION2019-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 44)

where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

151
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

The Negative sequence current can be calculated from the three-phase current input
within the IED by using the pre-processing block. The pre-processing block will
calculate the negative sequence current from the three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:

I2 = (IA+a 2 × IB+a × IC)/3

GUID-65EF3644-BDC6-4E4B-97B0-AA48929C4CAF V1 EN (Equation 45)

where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
alpha is 1 with an angle of 120 degrees

This phasor is used together with the phasor of the polarizing quantity in order to
determine the direction of the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).

7.4.7.4 External polarizing for ground-fault function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKn(where x indicates
the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional control (that is,
torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if available in the
IED:

1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence based overcurrent function.

7.4.7.5 Base quantities within the protection

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base
current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in
primary amperes. Base voltage (VBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase
voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

7.4.7.6 Internal ground-fault protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

152
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based ground-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking
during switching of parallel transformers.

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

7.4.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities:

• Directional mode can be set to Disabled/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By

this parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted
that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within each residual
overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in a directional
element common for all steps.
• Residual current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic. By this parameter setting it is possible to select
inverse or definitive time delay for step 1 and 4 separately. Step 2 and 3 are always
definite time delayed. All of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section
"Inverse time characteristics".
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite
time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves and reset time delay are
defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (Enabled/Disabled). By this
parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second
harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 57.

153
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Characteristn=DefTime 0-tx
|IOP|
a 0 TRSTx
OR
a>b
Pickupx b

AND
PU_STx

Inverse
BLKx

BLOCK Characteristn=Inverse

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
OR
HarmRestrainx=Disabled

DirModeSelx=Disabled OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModeSelx=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

ANSI09000638-2-en.vsd

ANSI09000638 V2 EN

Figure 57: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, PU_STx and TRSTx and , can be blocked from the binary
input BLKn.

7.4.7.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps
shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional
supervision element and the integrated directional comparison function.

The protection has integrated directional feature. The operating quantity current
I3PDIR is always used. The polarizinwcg method is determined by the parameter
setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of
the following three ways:

1. When polMethod = Voltage, VPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. WhenpolMethod = Dual, VPol + IPol · ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 58, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault.

154
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Operating area

PUREV
0.6 * INDirPU
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for PUREV 40% of
INDirPU RCA +85 deg

RCA
65° VPol = -3V0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
INDirPU

PUFW

I op = 3I0

Operating area
Characteristic
for PUFW ANSI11000243-1-en.ai
ANSI11000243 V1 EN

Figure 58: Operating characteristic for ground-fault directional element using the
zero sequence components

155
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

BLKTR

Characteristx=DefTime AND
TRSTx
|IOP| AND
a OR 0-tx
a>b
Pickupx b
0

AND
PU_STx

BLKx 0-txMin
0 AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModeSelx=Disabled OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModeSelx=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

ANSI11000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000281-1-en.vsd

ANSI11000281 V1 EN

Figure 59: Operating characteristic for ground-fault directional element using the
zero sequence components

156
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Operating area

PUREV
0.6 * IDirPU
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for PUREV 40% of
IDIR RCA +85 deg

RCA
65 deg Vpol = -V2

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IDIR

PUFW

I op = 3I2

Operating area
Characteristic
for PUFW ANSI11000269-2-en.ai
ANSI11000269 V2 EN

Figure 60: Operating characteristic for ground-fault directional element using the
negative sequence components

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

• Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger

than 40% of IDirPU and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function output binary signals:

157
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

1. PUFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger

than setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in
forward direction.
2. PUREV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger
than 60% of setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects
fault in reverse direction.

These signals shall be used for communication based ground-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 61:

|IopDir|
a
a>b PUREV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND PUFW
IDirPU b
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
VPolMin
Characteristic
Directional

polMethod=Dual IPolMin
VPol T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
VTPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F
VIPol
RNPol X STAGE1_DIR_Int
Complex T
STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd

ANSI07000067 V4 EN

Figure 61: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step

158
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

7.4.8 Technical data

Table 71: EF4PTOC (51N/67N) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I < In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate current for directional (1–100)% of lBase ± 2.0% of In
comparison, Zero sequence
Operate current for directional (1–100)% of lBase ± 2.0% of In
comparison, Negative sequence
Min. operating current (1-10000)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I < In
± 1.0% of I at I >In

Minimum operate time for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

inverse characteristics
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
Inverse characteristics, see 17 curve types 1)ANSI/IEEE C37.112
table 480, table 481 and table 482 IEC 60255–151
±3% or ±40 ms
0.10 ≤ k ≤ 3.00
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset

Minimum polarizing voltage, (1–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn

Zero sequence
Minimum polarizing voltage, (1–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn
Negative sequence
Minimum polarizing current, (2–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of In
Zero sequence
Minimum polarizing current, (2–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of In
Negative sequence
Real part of source Z used for (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -
current polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
for current polarization
Operate time, non-directional 30 ms typically at 0.5 to 2 x Iset -
pickup function
Reset time, non-directional 30 ms typically at 2 to 0.5 x Iset -
pickup function
Operate time, directional pickup 30 ms typically at 0,5 to 2 x IN -
function
Reset time, directional pickup 30 ms typically at 2 to 0,5 x IN -
function
1) Note: Timing accuracy only valid when 2nd harmonic blocking is turned off.

159
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.5 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR (49)

7.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants

SYMBOL-A V1 EN

7.5.2 Functionality
If a power transformer or generator reaches very high temperatures the equipment
might be damaged. The insulation within the transformer/generator will have forced
ageing. As a consequence of this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground
faults will increase. High temperature will degrade the quality of the transformer/
generator insulation.

The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer/
generator (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal
model of the transformer/generator with two time constants, which is based on current
measurement.

Two warning pickup levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to
be done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to
increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer/
generator.

7.5.3 Function block

TRPTTR (49)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
COOLING ALARM1
RESET ALARM2
LOCKOUT
WARNING

ANSI08000037-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000037 V1 EN

Figure 62: TRPTTR (49) function block

160
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

7.5.4 Signals

TRPTTR is not provided with external temperature sensor in first

release of 650 series. The only input that influences the temperature
measurement is the binary input COOLING.

Table 72: TRPTTR (49) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
COOLING BOOLEAN 0 Cooling input changes IBase setting and time constant
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 73: TRPTTR (49) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip Signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup signal
ALARM1 BOOLEAN First level alarm signal
ALARM2 BOOLEAN Second level alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Trip within set warning time

7.5.5 Settings
Table 74: TRPTTR (49) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
IRef 10.0 - 1000.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Reference current in % of IBase
IBase1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base current IBase1 without cooling input in
% of IBase
IBase2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base current IBase2 with cooling input in %
of IBase
Tau1 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant without cooling input
Tau2 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant with cooling input
IHighTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current setting for rescaling TC1 by TC1-
IHIGH
Table continues on next page

161
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Tau1High 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier to TC1 when current is >IHIGH-TC1
ILowTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current setting for rescaling TC1 by TC1-ILOW
Tau1Low 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier to TC1 when current is <ILOW-TC1
IHighTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current setting for rescaling TC2 by TC2-
IHIGH
Tau2High 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier to TC2 when current is >TC2-IHIGH
ILowTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current setting for rescaling TC2 by TC2-ILOW
Tau2Low 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier to TC2 when current is <ILOW-TC2
ITrip 50.0 - 250.0 %IBx 1.0 110.0 Steady state operate current level
Alarm1 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 80.0 First alarm level
Alarm2 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 90.0 Second alarm level
LockoutReset 10.0 - 95.0 %Itr 1.0 60.0 Lockout reset level
Warning 1.0 - 500.0 Min 0.1 30.0 Time setting, below which warning would be
set

Table 75: TRPTTR (49) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.5.6 Monitored data

Table 76: TRPTTR (49) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP REAL - - Estimated time to trip (in min)
TTRIPCAL INTEGER - - Calculated time status to trip:
not active/long time/active
TRESCAL INTEGER - - Calculated time status to
reset: not active/long time/
active
TRESLO REAL - - Estimated time to reset of the
function (in min)
HEATCONT REAL - % Percentage of the heat
content of the transformer
I-MEASUR REAL - % Current measured by the
function in % of the rated
current

162
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

7.5.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the
true RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to
the Thermal overload protection, two time constants (TRPTTR, 49).

From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat content)
is calculated according to the expression:

2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷
ç I ref
è ø
EQUATION1171 V1 EN (Equation 46)

where:
I is the largest phase current
Iref is a given reference current

If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current a pickup output signal PICKUP is activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

If Q final > Q n
EQUATION1172 V1 EN (Equation 47)

æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-

è ø
EQUATION1173 V1 EN (Equation 48)

If Q final < Qn
EQUATION1174 V1 EN (Equation 49)

Dt
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Q n -1 ) × e
-
t

EQUATION1175 V1 EN (Equation 50)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature

Table continues on next page

163
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step

Qfinal is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
t is the set thermal time constant Tau1 or Tau2 for the protected transformer

The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored as it is exported from

the function as a real figure HEATCONT.

When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or
Alarm2 the corresponding output signals ALARM1 or ALARM2 are activated. When
the temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to continuous
current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:

æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø
EQUATION1176 V1 EN (Equation 51)

The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a
real figure TTRIP.

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when
the temperature of the object is above the set lockout release temperature setting ResLo.

The time to lockout release is calculated, That is, a calculation of the cooling time to a
set value.

æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q final - Q n
è ø
EQUATION1177 V1 EN (Equation 52)

In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 46.
Since the transformer normally is disconnected, the current I is zero and thereby the
Θfinal is also zero. The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is
exported from the function as a real figure, TRESLO.

164
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

When the current is so high that it has given a pickup signal PICKUP, the estimated
time to trip is continuously calculated and given as analog output TTRIP. If this
calculated time get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output
WARNING is activated.

Final Temp PICKUP

> TripTemp

actual heat comtent

Calculation
of heat
content

I3P
Calculation
of final
temperature
ALARM1
Actual Temp >
Alarm1,Alarm2
ALARM2
Temp

Current base used

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp

Binary input:
S LOCKOUT
Forced cooling
Enabled/ R
Management of
Disabled
setting
parameters: Tau Actual Temp
Tau used
< Recl
Temp

TTRIP
Calculation
of time to
WARNING if time to trip < set value
trip

Calculation
of time to TRESLO
reset of
lockout

ANSI08000040-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000040 V1 EN

Figure 63: Functional overview of TRPTTR (49)

165
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.5.8 Technical data

Table 77: TRPTTR (49) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Base current 1 and 2 (30–250)% of IBase ± 1.0% of In

Operate time: Ip = load current before overload IEC 60255–8, ±5% + 200 ms
occurs
æ I 2 - I p2 ö Time constant τ = (1–500)
t = t × ln ç 2 ÷ minutes
ç I - Ib 2 ÷
è ø
EQUATION1356 V1 EN (Equation 53)

I = Imeasured

Alarm pickup 1 and 2 (50–99)% of heat content trip ± 2.0% of heat content trip
value
Operate current (50–250)% of IBase ± 1.0% of In

Reset level temperature (10–95)% of heat content trip ± 2.0% of heat content trip

7.6 Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and

output CCRBRF (50BF)

7.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN

7.6.2 Functionality
CCRBRF (50BF) can be current based, contact based, or an adaptive combination of
these two conditions.

Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF, 50BF) ensures fast back-up tripping of

surrounding breakers in case the protected breaker fails to open. CCRBRF (50BF) can
be current based, contact based, or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.

166
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high
security against unnecessary operation.

Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output (CCRBRF, 50BF) current
criteria can be fulfilled by one or two phase currents the residual current, or one phase
current plus residual current. When those currents exceed the user defined settings, the
function is triggered. These conditions increase the security of the back-up trip command.

CCRBRF (50BF) function can be programmed to give a three-phase re-trip of the

protected breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers.

7.6.3 Function block

CCRBRF (50BF)
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRRET
BFI_3P
52A_A
52A_B
52A_C

ANSI09000272-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000272 V1 EN

Figure 64: CCRBRF (50BF) function block

7.6.4 Signals
Table 78: CCRBRF (50BF) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BFI_3P BOOLEAN 0 Three phase breaker failure initiation
52a_A BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase A
52a_B BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase B
52a_C BOOLEAN 1 Circuit breaker closed in phase C

Table 79: CCRBRF (50BF) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function

167
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.6.5 Settings
Table 80: CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection principle for back-up trip
Contact
Current&Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip mode
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Operation mode of re-trip logic
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Pickup_PH 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Phase current pickup in % of IBase
Pickup_N 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip

Table 81: CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pickup_BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 Current for blocking of 52a operation in % of
Ibase

Table 82: CCRBRF (50BF) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.6.6 Monitored data

Table 83: CCRBRF (50BF) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I_A REAL - A Measured current in phase A
I_B REAL - A Measured current in phase B
I_C REAL - A Measured current in phase C
IN REAL - A Measured residual current

168
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

7.6.7 Operation principle

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF (50BF) is initiated
from protection trip command, either from protection functions within the IED or from
external protection devices.

The initiate signal is general for all three phases. A re-trip attempt can be made after a
set time delay. The re-trip function can be done with or without CB position check
based on current and/or contact evaluation. With the current check the re-trip is only
performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current
level. With contact check the re-trip is only performed if breaker is indicated as closed.

The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
initiate the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is
detected by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS evaluation
and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication. The special
algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast
resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not
detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is
initiated.

Further the following possibilities are available:

• In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3

where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high
residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or
residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
• The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
• Back-up trip is always made with current or contact check. It is possible to have
this option activated for small load currents only.

169
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Pickup_PH
a
a>b
b
FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset A
OR
Contact
1 Time out A
Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High A

I_A CB Closed A
AND
OR
BFP Started A

a AND AND
a>b OR AND
Pickup_BlkCont b

52a_A Contact Closed A

AND

ANSI09000977-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000977 V1 EN

Figure 65: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF), CB position evaluation

TRRET_C
From other
BFP Started A Retrip Time Out A TRRET
0-t1 phases TRRET_B OR
0
200 ms
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRET_A
OR

1
OR AND

CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed A
52FAIL

ANSI09000978-2-en.vsd

ANSI09000978 V2 EN

Figure 66: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

Internal logical signals PU_A, PU_B, PU_C have logical value 1 when current in
respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_PH.

7.6.8 Technical data

Table 84: CCRBRF (50BF) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, residual > 95% -

current
Table continues on next page

170
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Phase current pickup for (5-200)% of lBase ± 1.0% of In at I £ In
blocking of contact ± 1.0% of I at I > In
function
Reset ratio > 95% -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±10 ms
Operate time for current 35 ms typically -
detection
Reset time for current 10 ms maximum -
detection

7.7 Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD (52PD)

7.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN

7.7.2 Functionality
Circuit breakers and disconnectors can end up with their phases in different positions
(close-open), due to electrical or mechanical failures. An open phase can cause
negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress on rotating machines
and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current
functions.

Normally the affected breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation
warrants the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load
situation.

The pole discrepancy function operates based on information from the circuit breaker
logic with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.

171
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.7.3 Function block

CCRPLD (52PD)
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND

ANSI08000041-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000041 V1 EN

Figure 67: CCRPLD (52PD) function block

7.7.4 Signals
Table 85: CCRPLD (52PD) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close command to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open command to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discrepancy signal from CB logic

Table 86: CCRPLD (52PD) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
PICKUP BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

7.7.5 Settings
Table 87: CCRPLD (52PD) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and trip
signal
ContactSel Disabled - - Disabled Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
Table continues on next page

172
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurrentSel Disabled - - Disabled Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
CurrUnsymPU 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelPU 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the function
in % of IBase

Table 88: CCRPLD (52PD) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

7.7.6 Monitored data

Table 89: CCRPLD (52PD) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current

7.7.7 Operation principle

The detection of pole discrepancy can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discrepancy is indicated, see figure 68.

173
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

C.B.

52a

52a
+
52a

52b

52b poleDiscrepancy Signal from C.B.

52b
ANSI_en05000287.vsd

ANSI05000287 V1 EN

Figure 68: Pole discrepancy external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.

Pole discrepancy can also be detected by means of phase selective current

measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase
current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the largest
phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the setting
CurrUnsymPU times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is started.
The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150
ms long. The current based pole discrepancy function can be set to be active either
continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command.

174
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

BLOCK

PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND

150 ms
AND 0-Trip TRIP
OR 0

CLOSECMD tTrip+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD

CB oper monitor AND

Unsymmetrical
current detection

ANSI08000014-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000014 V2 EN

Figure 69: Simplified block diagram of pole discrepancy function - contact and
current based

The pole discrepancy protection is blocked if the input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discrepancy
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions.
Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

If the pole discrepancy protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a
trip signal TRIP:

• Pole discrepancy signaling from the circuit breaker.

• Unsymmetrical current detection.

7.7.7.1 Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole
discrepancy status), then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discrepancy signal in figure 68. After a settable time tTrip, a 150 ms trip pulse
command TRIP is generated by the pole discrepancy protection.

175
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.7.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:

• any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymPU of the highest current in the three
phases.
• the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelPU of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected. This detection is

enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next
200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the
unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during
unsymmetrical load conditions.

The pole discrepancy protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be
connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (that
is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software
connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close command from a
control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

7.7.8 Technical data

Table 90: CCRPLD (52PD) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, current (0-100) % ± 1.0% of In
asymmetry level
Reset ratio >95% -
Time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

7.8 Directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP/

GUPPDUP (32/37)

7.8.1 Functionality
The directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP (32)/GUPPDUP (37) can be
used wherever a high/low active, reactive or apparent power protection or alarming is
required. The functions can alternatively be used to check the direction of active or

176
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

reactive power flow in the power system. There are a number of applications where
such functionality is needed. Some of them are:

• detection of reversed active power flow

• detection of high reactive power flow

Each function has two steps with definite time delay. Reset times for both steps can be
set as well.

7.8.2 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)

7.8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>

DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V1 EN

7.8.2.2 Function block

GOPPDOP (32)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLK1 BFI_3P
BLK2 PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

ANSI08000506-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000506 V1 EN

Figure 70: GOPPDOP (32) function block

177
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.8.2.3 Signals
Table 91: GOPPDOP (32) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 92: GOPPDOP (32) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 2
BFI_3P BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from stage 1
PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from stage 2
P REAL Active Power
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of calculated power base value
Q REAL Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of calculated power base value

7.8.2.4 Settings
Table 93: GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
OpMode1 Disabled - - OverPower Operation mode 1
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 1 in % of calculated
power base value
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Disabled - - OverPower Operation mode 2
OverPower
Table continues on next page

178
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Power2 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of calculated
power base value
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 2

Table 94: GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.00 - 0.99 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, V and I

Table 95: GOPPDOP (32) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode A, B, C - - Pos Seq Mode of measurement for current and voltage
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C

7.8.2.5 Monitored data

Table 96: GOPPDOP (32) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of
calculated power base value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of
calculated power base value

7.8.3 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)

179
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<

SYMBOL-LL V1 EN

7.8.3.2 Function block

GUPPDUP (37)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLK1 BFI_3P
BLK2 PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

ANSI08000507-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000507 V1 EN

Figure 71: GUPPDUP (37) function block

7.8.3.3 Signals
Table 97: GUPPDUP (37) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 98: GUPPDUP (37) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from stage 2
BFI_3P BOOLEAN General pickup signal
Table continues on next page

180
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Name Type Description

PICKUP1 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from stage 1
PICKUP2 BOOLEAN Pickup signal from stage 2
P REAL Active Power
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of calculated power base value
Q REAL Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of calculated power base value

7.8.3.4 Settings
Table 99: GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
OpMode1 Disabled - - UnderPower Operation mode 1
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 1 in % of calculated
power base value
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Disabled - - UnderPower Operation mode 2
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 % 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of calculated
power base value
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 s 0.001 1.000 Trip delay for stage 2

Table 100: GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TD 0.00 - 0.99 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, V and I

181
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Table 101: GUPPDUP (37) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode A, B, C - - Pos Seq Mode of measurement for current and voltage
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C

7.8.3.5 Monitored data

Table 102: GUPPDUP (37) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of
calculated power base value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of
calculated power base value

7.8.4 Operation principle

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 72. The function has two stages with individual settings.

182
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S( angle)

S( angle) < t TRIP1
power S( composant)
Chosen voltage Power1 0
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
PICKUP1

S( angle) < t TRIP2

Power2 0
PICKUP2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

ANSI06000438-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000438 V2 EN

Figure 72: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 103.

Table 103: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
A, B, C
S = V A × I A* + VB × I B* + VC × I C *
EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 54)
Arone
S = V AB × I A* - VBC × IC *
EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 55)
PosSeq
S = 3 × VPosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 56)
AB
S = VAB × ( I A* - I B* )
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 57)
BC
S = VBC × ( I B* - IC * )
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 58)
Table continues on next page

183
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

CA
S = VCA × ( I C * - I A* )
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 59)
A
S = 3 × VA × I A*
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 60)
B
S = 3 × VB × I B*
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 61)
C
S = 3 × VC × I C *
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 62)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90° the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2).
For directional underpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional
overpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip
TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of
the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two
stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis
for stage 1(2) is 0.5 p.u. for Power1(2) ≥ 1.0 p.u., else the hysteresis is 0.5 Power1(2).

If the measured power drops under the (Power1(2) - hysteresis) value, the over-power
function will reset after 0.06 seconds. If the measured power comes over the
(Power1(2) + hysteresis) value, the under-power function will reset after 0.06 seconds.
The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out and that the timer of the stage will
reset.

7.8.4.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This

184
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

S = TD ⋅ SOld + (1 − TD ) ⋅ SCalculated
EQUATION1959-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 63)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter TD is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When TD is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for
TD=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

7.8.5 Technical data

Table 104: GOPPDOP, GUPPDUP (32/37) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ± 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
± 1.0% of S at S > Sr

(1.0-2.0)% of SBase < ± 50% of set value

(2.0-10)% of SBase < ± 20% of set value
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees 2 degrees
Timers (0.010 - 6000.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

185
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

7.9 Negative sequence based overcurrent function

DNSPTOC (46)

7.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative sequence based overcurrent DNSPTOC 46
function
3I2>

IEC09000132 V2 EN

7.9.2 Functionality
Negative sequence based overcurrent function (DNSPTOC, 46) may be used in power
line applications where the reverse zero sequence source is weak or open, the forward
source impedance is strong and it is desired to detect forward ground faults.

Additionally, it is applied in applications on cables, where zero sequence impedance

depends on the fault current return paths, but the cable negative sequence impedance is
practically constant.

The directional function is current and voltage polarized. The function can be set to
forward, reverse or non-directional independently for each step.

DNSPTOC (46) protects against all unbalanced faults including phase-to-phase faults.
The minimum pickup current of the function must be set to above the normal system
unbalance level in order to avoid unwanted tripping.

7.9.3 Function block

DNSPTOC (46)
I3P* TRIP
V3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 BFI_3P
ENMLTOC1 PU_OC1
BLKOC2 PU_OC2
ENMLTOC2 DIROC1
DIROC2
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
VIANGLE

ANSI09000125-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000125 V1 EN

Figure 73: DNSPTOC (46) function block

186
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

7.9.4 Signals
Table 105: DNSPTOC (46) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier - step1 (OC1)
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier - step 2 (OC2)

Table 106: DNSPTOC (46) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1 (OC1)
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2 (OC2)
BFI_3P BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_OC1 BOOLEAN OC1_PICK UP
PU_OC2 BOOLEAN OC2_PICK UP
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of step 1(non-directional, forward,
reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of step 2 (non-directional, forward,
reverse)
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
VIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current

7.9.5 Settings
Table 107: DNSPTOC (46) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay characteristic angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay operate angle
Table continues on next page

187
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %VB 0.1 0.5 Voltage level in % of Vbase below which
ActLowVolt control takes over
Operation_OC1 Disabled - - Disabled Operation DISABLE/ENABLE for step 1 (OC1)
Enabled
PickupCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level in % of IBase for step 1
(OC1)
MultPU_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for step 1
(OC1)
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay for step 1
(OC1)
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (non-directional,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC1 I&V - - I&V Measuring on I & V or IcosPhi & V for step 1
IcosPhi&U (OC1)
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low votlage level action for step 1 (Non-
Block directional, Block, Memory)
Memory
Operation_OC2 Disabled - - Disabled Operation DISABLE/ENABLE for step 2 (OC2)
Enabled
PickupCurr_OC2 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level in % of Ibase for step 2
(OC2)
MultPU_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Operate current level in % of Ibase for step 2
(OC2)
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay for step 2
(OC2)
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (non-directional,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&V - - I&V Measuring on I & V or IcosPhi & V for step 2
IcosPhi&U (OC2)
ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low votlage level action for step 2 (Non-
Block directional, Block, Memory)
Memory

ActLowVolt1 and ActLowVolt2 should not be set to Memory.

Table 108: DNSPTOC (46) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

188
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 7
Current protection

7.9.6 Monitored data

Table 109: DNSPTOC (46) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
VIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage and
current

7.9.7 Operation principle

Negative sequence based overcurrent function (DNSPTOC, 46) has two settable
current levels, setting parameters PickupCurr_OC1 and PickupCurr_OC2. Both
features have definite time characteristics with settings tDef_OC1 and tDef_OC2
respectively. It is possible to change the direction of these steps to forward, reverse or
non-directional by setting parameters DirMode_OC1 and DirMode_OC2. At too low
polarizing voltage the overcurrent feature can be either blocked or non-directional.
This is controlled by settings ActLowVolt1_VM and ActLowVolt2_VM.

7.9.8 Technical data

Table 110: DNSPTOC (46) Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (2.0 - 5000.0) % of IBase ± 1.0% of Ir at I <In
± 1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio > 95 % -

Low voltage level for memory (0.0 - 5.0) % of VBase < ± 0.5% of Vn

Relay characteristic angle (-180 - 180) degrees ± 2.0 degrees

Relay operate angle (1 - 90) degrees ± 2.0 degrees
Timers (0.00 - 6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Operate time, non-directional 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Reset time, non-directional 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Operate time, directional 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Reset time, directional 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Dynamic overreach < 10% at t = 300 ms -

189
Technical Manual
190
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

Section 8 Voltage protection

8.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)

8.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

2U<

SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V1 EN

8.1.2 Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV, 27) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back-
up to primary protection.

UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage steps, where step 1 is settable as inverse or definite
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

8.1.3 Function block

UV2PTUV (27)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRST1
BLK1 TRST2
BLK2 PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2

ANSI09000285-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000285 V1 EN

Figure 74: UV2PTUV (27) function block

191
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

8.1.4 Signals
Table 111: UV2PTUV (27) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 112: UV2PTUV (27) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase A
PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase B
PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase C
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2

8.1.5 Settings
Table 113: UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
OperationStep1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Enabled
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
Pickup1 1 - 100 %VB 1 70 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay of step 1
Table continues on next page

192
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 1
TD1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Enabled
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
Pickup2 1 - 100 %VB 1 50 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definie time delay of step 2

Table 114: UV2PTUV (27) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhPh RMS

8.1.6 Monitored data

Table 115: UV2PTUV (27) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
V_A REAL - kV Voltage in phase A
V_B REAL - kV Voltage in phase B
V_C REAL - kV Voltage in phase C

8.1.7 Operation principle

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding
PICKUP signal is generated. UV2PTUV (27) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP based on 1
out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If
the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is

193
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

settable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse time delayed. Step 2 is always
definite time delayed.

UV2PTUV (27) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-to-

phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground true RMS value or phase-to-phase true
RMS value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The
voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-
phase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage under:

Vpickup < (%) ×VBase(kV )

3
EQUATION1606 V1 EN (Equation 64)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

Vpickup < (%) × VBase(kV)

EQUATION1991-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 65)

When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root
of three.

8.1.7.1 Measurement principle

Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV (27) measures phase-to-ground or

phase-to-phase voltages and compare against set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2. The
parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the
PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to
be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
undervoltage (TUV). Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time
delay two different modes are available; inverse curve A and inverse curve B.

The type A curve is described as:

194
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

TD
t=
Vpickup < -V
Vpickup <
ANSIEQUATION1431 V1 EN (Equation 66)

The type B curve is described as:

TD × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ Vpickup < -V ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Vpickup < ø
EQUATION1608 V1 EN (Equation 67)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of
the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 20.3 "Inverse time
characteristics".

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse
time mode (TUV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, the corresponding pickup output is reset.

8.1.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) partially or

completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLK1: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2

8.1.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the
set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration.
A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to
fulfill the PICKUP condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection
UV2PTUV (27) is schematically shown in Figure 75.

195
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

VA or VAB Comparator PU_ST1_A

V < Pickup1 Phase A
Voltage Phase
Selector PU_ST1_B
VB or VBC Comparator OpMode1 Phase B
V < Pickup1 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 PU_ST1_C
Phase C Pickup
VC or VCA Comparator 3 out of 3
&
V < Pickup1 Trip PU_ST1
OR
Output
PICKUP Logic

Step1
Time integrator TRST1
OR
TRIP
MinVoltSelector t1

Comparator
V < Pickup2 Phase A
Voltage Phase PU_ST2
Selector OR
Comparator OpMode2 Phase B
V < Pickup2 1 out of 3
2 out of 3
Phase C Pickup
Comparator 3 out of 3
&
V < Pickup2 Trip
Output
PICKUP Logic

Step2
Timer
TRIP TRST2
t2 OR

OR PICKUP

TRIP
OR

ANSI08000016-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000016 V2 EN

Figure 75: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)

196
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

8.1.8 Technical data

Table 116: UV2PTUV (27) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low and (1–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn
high step
Reset ratio <105% -
Inverse time - See table 484
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 484
Definite time delay, step 1 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Definite time delays, step (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ±25 ms
2
Minimum operate time, (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
inverse characteristics
Operate time, pickup 30 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.5 x Vset -
function
Reset time, pickup 40 ms typically at 0.5 to 1.2 xVset -
function
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Vset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)

8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

2U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN
V1 EN

8.2.2 Functionality
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines etc.

197
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) function can be used to detect open
line ends, normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to
supervise the system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch
in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.

OV2PTOV (59) has two voltage steps, where step 1 can be set as inverse or definite
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

OV2PTOV (59) has an extremely high reset ratio to allow settings close to system
service voltage.

8.2.3 Function block

OV2PTOV (59)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRST1
BLK1 TRST2
BLK2 PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2

ANSI09000278-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000278 V1 EN

Figure 76: OV2PTOV function block (59)

8.2.4 Signals
Table 117: OV2PTOV (59) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 118: OV2PTOV (59) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
Table continues on next page

198
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
PU_ST1_A BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase A
PU_ST1_B BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase B
PU_ST1_C BOOLEAN Pick up signal from step 1 phase C
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2

8.2.5 Settings
Table 119: OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
OperationStep1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Enabled
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
Pickup1 1 - 200 %VB 1 120 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 1
TD1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Enabled
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required to operate (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
Pickup2 1 - 200 %VB 1 150 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definite time delay of step 2

199
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

Table 120: OV2PTOV (59) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhPh RMS

8.2.6 Monitored data

Table 121: OV2PTOV (59) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
V_A REAL - kV Voltage in phase A
V_B REAL - kV Voltage in phase B
V_C REAL - kV Voltage in phase C

8.2.7 Operation principle

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV (59) has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-
phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is issued.
OV2PTOV (59) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of
3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the
set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
trip signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is settable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage VBase,
which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.

OV2PTOV (59) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-to-

phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value.
The choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-
to-phase voltage. OV2PTOV (59) will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
percentage of the set global base voltage VBase. This means operation for phase-to-
ground voltage over:

200
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

Vpickup > (%) ⋅ VBase(kV ) / 3

EQUATION1610 V2 EN (Equation 68)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

Vpickup > (%) × VBase(kV)

EQUATION1992 V1 EN (Equation 69)

When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root
of three.

8.2.7.1 Measurement principle

All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 and Pickup2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the
requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3
measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding PICKUP signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
overvoltage (TOV). Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time
delay three different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C

The type A curve is described as:

TD
t=
V − Vpickup >
Vpickup >
EQUATION1625 V2 EN (Equation 70)

The type B curve is described as:

201
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

TD ⋅ 480
t= − 0.035
V − Vpickup >
32 ⋅ − 0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2287 V2 EN (Equation 71)

The type C curve is described as:

TD ⋅ 480
t= + 0.035
V − Vpickup >
32 ⋅ − 0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN (Equation 72)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay
integration, see Figure 77. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are
shown in section "Inverse time characteristics"

Voltage
Inverse Time Voltage

VA
VB
VC

Time

en05000016_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000016 V1 EN

Figure 77: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

A TRIP requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time
delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and
by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TOV). If
the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, the corresponding PICKUP output is reset.

202
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

8.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV ,59) partially or

completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLK1: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2

8.2.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-ground

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input
voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the
highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is
included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the PICKUP
condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) is
schematically described in Figure 78.

203
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

VA or VAB Comparator PU_ST1_A

V > Pickup1 Phase A
Voltage Phase
Selector PU_ST1_B
VB or VBC Comparator OpMode1 Phase B
V > Pickup1 1 out of 3
2 outof 3 PU_ST1_C
3 out of 3 Phase C Pickup
VC or VCA Comparator &
V > Pickup1 Trip PU_ST1
OR
Output
PICKUP Logic

Step 1

Time integrator TRST1

TRIP OR
MaxVoltSelector
t1

Comparator
V > Pickup2 Phase A
Voltage Phase
Selector
Comparator OpMode2 Phase B PU_ST2
OR
V > Pickup2 1 out of 3
2 outof 3
Phase C Pickup
3 out of 3
Comparator &
V > Pickup2 Trip
Output
PICKUP Logic

Step 2

Timer TRIP TRST2

OR
t2

PICKUP
OR

TRIP
OR

ANSI08000012-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000012 V2 EN

Figure 78: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59)

204
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

8.2.8 Technical data

Table 122: OV2PTOV (59) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low and (1-200)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
high step ± 0.5% of V at V > Vn

Reset ratio >95% -

Inverse time - See table 483
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 483
Definite time delay, step 1 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Definite time delays, step (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
2
Minimum operate time, (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Inverse characteristics
Operate time, pickup 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset -
function
Reset time, pickup 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset -
function
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

(59N)

8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0>

IEC10000168 V1 EN

8.3.2 Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during ground faults.

205
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) function calculates the
residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a
single voltage input transformer fed from a broken delta or neutral point voltage
transformer.

ROV2PTOV (59N) has two voltage steps, where step 1 can be set as inverse or definite
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

8.3.3 Function block

ROV2PTOV (59N)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRST1
BLK1 TRST2
BLK2 PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2

ANSI09000273_1_en.vsd
ANSI09000273 V1 EN

Figure 79: ROV2PTOV (59N) function block

8.3.4 Signals
Table 123: ROV2PTOV (59N) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 124: ROV2PTOV (59N) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRST1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRST2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
PU_ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 1
PU_ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step 2

206
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

8.3.5 Settings
Table 125: ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
OperationStep1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 1
Enabled
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Pickup1 1 - 200 %VB 1 30 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definite time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 1
TD1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for
step 1
OperationStep2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable execution of step 2
Enabled
Pickup2 1 - 100 %VB 1 45 Voltage start value (DT & IDMT) in % of
VBase for step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definite time delay of step 2

Table 126: ROV2PTOV (59N) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups

8.3.6 Monitored data

Table 127: ROV2PTOV (59N) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VLevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured
voltage

8.3.7 Operation principle

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is used to detect ground
(zero sequence) overvoltages. The ground overvoltage 3V0 is normally computed by

207
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

adding the input phase voltages. 3V0 may also be input single phase by either
measuring directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer, or
from a secondary broken delta connection of a transformer with a wye-grounded
primary. ROV2PTOV (59N) has two steps with separate time delays. If the ground
overvoltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is setable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global phase-to-phase base
voltage divided by √3.

8.3.7.1 Measurement principle

The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 and Pickup2.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.3.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay
(TOV). Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time delay three
different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C

The type A curve is described as:

TD
t=
V − Vpickup >
Vpickup >
EQUATION1625 V2 EN (Equation 73)

The type B curve is described as:

TD ⋅ 480
t= − 0.035
V − Vpickup >
32 ⋅ − 0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2287 V2 EN (Equation 74)

The type C curve is described as:

208
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

TD ⋅ 480
t= + 0.035
V − Vpickup >
32 ⋅ − 0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN (Equation 75)

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
time characteristics".

TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (TOV).

If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, the corresponding PICKUP output is reset.

8.3.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N)

partially or completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLK1: blocks all pickupand trip outputs related to step 1
BLK2: blocks all pickup and trip inputs related to step 2

8.3.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive
Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to
the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design
of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) is schematically
described in Figure 80.

209
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

VN Comparator Phase 1 PU_ST1

VN > Pickup1
TRST1
PICKUP Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Time integrator Logic
t1 TRIP
Step 1

PU_ST2
Comparator Phase 1
VN > Pickup2 TRST2

Pickup
PICKUP &
Trip PICKUP
Output OR
Logic
Timer TRIP
t2
Step 2
TRIP
OR

ANSI08000013-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000013 V1 EN

Figure 80: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

(ROV2PTOV, 59N)

The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV,

59N) is schematically described in Figure 80. VN is a signal included
in the three phase group signal V3P which shall be connected to output
AI3P of the SMAI. If a connection is made to the 4 input GRPx_N (x is
equal to instance number 2 to 12) on the SMAI, VN is this signal else
VN is the vectorial sum of the three inputs GRPx_A to GRPx_C.

210
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

8.3.8 Technical data

Table 128: ROV2PTOV (59N) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, step 1 (1-200)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
± 0.5% of V at V > Vn

Operate voltage, step 2 (1–100)% of VBase ± 0.5% of Vn at V < Vn

± 0.5% of V at V > Vn

Reset ratio >95% -

Inverse time - See table 485
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 485
Definite time setting, step (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
1
Definite time setting, step (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
2
Minimum operate time for (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
step 1 inverse
characteristic
Operate time, pickup 30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset -
function
Reset time, pickup 40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset -
function
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 1.2 xVset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)

8.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 24

U/f >

SYMBOL-Q V1 EN

211
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

8.4.2 Functionality
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated
components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy
currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent
parts in a relatively short time. The function has settable inverse operating curves and
independent alarm stages.

8.4.3 Function block

OEXPVPH (24)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK BFI
RESET ALARM

ANSI09000008-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000008 V1 EN

Figure 81: OEXPVPH (24) function block

8.4.4 Signals
Table 129: OEXPVPH (24) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 130: OEXPVPH (24) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
BFI BOOLEAN General pickup signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Overexcitation alarm signal

212
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

8.4.5 Settings
Table 131: OEXPVPH (24) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
Pickup1 100.0 - 180.0 %VB/f 0.1 110.0 Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated
freq in % of (Vbase/frated)
Pickup2 100.0 - 200.0 %VB/f 0.1 140.0 High level of V/Hz above which tMin is used,
in % of (Vbase/fn)
t_MinTripDelay 0.005 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Minimum trip delay for V/Hz curve
TDForIEEECurve 1 - 60 - 1 1 Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve
AlarmPickup 50.0 - 120.0 % 0.1 100.0 Alarm pickup level
tAlarm 0.00 - 9000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Alarm time delay

Table 132: OEXPVPH (24) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
VoltConn Pos Seq - - Pos Seq Selection of measured voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UL2L3
UL3L1

Only PosSeq or UL1L2 should be seleced for the VoltConn setting.

8.4.6 Monitored data

Table 133: OEXPVPH (24) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TMTOTRIP REAL - s Calculated time to trip for
overexcitation, in sec
VPERHZ REAL - V/Hz Voltage to frequency ratio in
per-unit
THERMSTA REAL - % Overexcitation thermal status
in % of trip pickup

213
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

8.4.7 Operation principle

The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH, 24) function is growing as
the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate most of
the time near their designated limits.

Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if
emergency that causes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged unless
corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an
overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.

Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with

below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a transformer unit is loaded,
but are more likely to arise when the transformer is unloaded, or when a loss of load
occurs. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to
experience overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer
equation, see equation 76, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to
induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.

E = 4.44 × f × n × Bmax× A
EQUATION898 V2 EN (Equation 76)

The relative excitation M is therefore according to equation 77.

E f
M ( p.u.) =
( Vr ) ( fn )
ANSIEQUATION2296 V1 EN (Equation 77)

Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the
core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla),
the flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into other (non-
laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current circulations.

Overexcitation will result in:

• overheating of the non-laminated metal parts

• a large increase in magnetizing currents
• an increase in core and winding temperature
• an increase in transformer vibration and noise

Potection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per hertz (V/
Hz) ratio. Protection might initiate a reduction of the generator excitation (in case of a

214
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

step-up transformer), and if this fails, or if this is not possible, the TRIP signal will
disconnect the transformer from the source after a delay ranging from seconds to
minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.

Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator

unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide
range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such
cases, OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a start-up of a machine, by
means of the overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not possible, the power
transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal.

The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at not
more than 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the
ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed
1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained
basis, see equation 78.

E Vn
£ 1.1 ×
f fn
EQUATION1630 V1 EN (Equation 78)

or equivalently, with 1.1 · Vn = Pickup1 according to equation 79.

E Pickup1
£
f fn
ANSIEQUATION2297 V2 EN (Equation 79)

where:
Pickup1 is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.

Pickup1 is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does not
know exactly what to set, then the default value for Pickup1 = 110 % given by the IEC
60076-1 standard shall be used.

In OEXPVPH (24), the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 80.

E f
M ( p.u.) =
Vn fn
ANSIEQUATION2299 V1 EN (Equation 80)

It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for
any E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Vn/fn. A power transformer is not

215
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M ≤ Pickup1, Pickup1 expressed in %

of Vn/fn.

It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such

as loss-of-load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-ground voltage does not
mean overexcitation. For example, in an ungrounded power system, a single phase-to-
ground fault means high voltages of the “healthy” two phases-to-ground, but no
overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially
unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.

8.4.7.1 Measured voltage

A check is made if the Selected voltage signal is higher than 70% of rated phase-to-
ground voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH (24) exits immediately, and no
excitation is calculated.

The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function operates
for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 Hz and 60 Hz
respectively.

• OEXPVPH (24) can be connected to any power transformer side, independent

from the power flow.
• The side with a load tap changer must not be used, since the tap changer can
change the relative excitation (M)

8.4.7.2 Operate time of the overexcitation protection

The operate time of OEXPVPH (24) is a function of the relative overexcitation.

The so called IEEE law approximates an inverse-square law and has been chosen based
on analysis of the various transformers’ overexcitation capability characteristics. They
can match the transformer core capability well.

The inverse-square law is according to equation 81.

216
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

0.18 × TD 0.18 × TD
top = 2
= 2
æ M ö overexcitation
ç PUV Hz - 1 ÷
è ø
ANSIEQUATION2298 V2 EN (Equation 81)

where:
M the relative excitation
Pickup1 Operate level of over-excitation function at no load in % of (/frated)
TD is time multiplier for inverse time functions, see figure 83.

The relative excitation M is calculated using equation82

æ Vmeasured ö
ç ÷ Vmeasured frated
M =
è fmeasured ø = ×
æ VBase ö VBase fmeasured
ç ÷
è frated ø
ANSIEQUATION2404 V1 EN (Equation 82)

Inverse delays as per figure 83, can be modified (limited) by a special definite delay
setting t_MinTripDelay, see figure 82.
delay in s

t_MaxTrip
Delay

under - inverse delay law

excitation

overexcitation
t_MinTripDelay

0 Mmax – Pickup1 Overexcitation M-Pickup1

M=Pickup1 Mmax Excitation M

Pickup1 Emax E (only if f = fn = const)

ANSI99001067-2-
en.vsd
ANSI99001067 V2 EN

Figure 82: Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by

A definite maximum time of 1800 seconds can be used to limit the operate time at low
degrees of overexcitation of Pickup1. Inverse delays longer than 1800 seconds will not

217
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

be allowed. In case the inverse delay is longer than 1800 seconds, OEXPVPH (24) trips
t_MaxTripDelay, see figure 82.

A definite minimum time, t_MinTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at
high degrees of overexcitation for Pickup1. In case the inverse delay is shorter than
t_MinTripDelay, OEXPVPH (24) function trips after t_MinTripDelay seconds.

Time (s) IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES

1000

100

TD = 60

TD = 20

TD = 10
10 TD = 9
TD = 8
TD = 7
TD = 6
TD = 5
TD = 4
TD = 3

TD = 2

TD = 1
1
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40

OVEREXCITATION IN % (M-Emaxcont)*100)

en01000373_ansi.vsd
ANSI01000373 V1 EN

Figure 83: Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation

The critical value of excitation M is determined via OEXPVPH (24) setting Pickup2.
Pickup2 can be thought of as a no-load voltage at rated frequency, where the inverse
law should be replaced by a short definite delay, t_MinTripDelay. If, for example,
Pickup2 = 140 %, then M is according to equation 83.

218
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

( Pickup2 f )
M= = 1.40
Vn/fn
ANSIEQUATION2286 V1 EN (Equation 83)

8.4.7.3 Cooling

Overexcitation protection function (OEXPVPH, 24) is basically a thermal protection;

therefore a cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is
applied, with a default time constant of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and
frequency return to normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is
assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times the default time constant of 20
minutes. If an overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be
shorter than it would be otherwise.

8.4.7.4 Overexcitation protection function measurands

A monitored data value, TMTOTRIP, is available on the local HMI and in PCM600.
This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip (in seconds), if the
overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This
information can be useful during small or moderate overexcitations.

The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a monitored
data value VPERHZ, is calculated from the expression:

E f
M ( p.u.) =
Vn fn
ANSIEQUATION2299 V1 EN (Equation 84)

If VPERHZ value is less than setting Pickup1 (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to Pickup1 (in %), the excitation is exactly equal to
the power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than Pickup1, the
protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100, while
Pickup1 = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous
excitation limit.

Monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected power
transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip value
which corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same time, as
TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some
reason not switched off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.

If the delay as per IEEE law, is limited by t_MinTripDelay, then THERMSTA will
generally not reach 100% at the same time, as TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. Also, if,

219
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Voltage protection

at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long delay is limited by 30 minutes, then the
TRIP output signal of OEXPVPH (24) will be set to 1 and TMTOTRIP will reach 0
seconds before THERMSTA reaches 100%.

8.4.7.5 Overexcitation alarm

A separate step, AlarmPickup, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set 2%

lower than (Pickup1) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator
an early abnormal voltages warning.

8.4.7.6 Logic diagram

BLOCK
AlarmPickup ALARM
t>tAlarm AND
0-tAlarm
0
M>Pickup1
t>tMin TRIP
0-tMin AND
0
V3P Pickup1
Calculation
of internal
Ei M=
TD
M
induced (Ei / f) M
TDForIEEE
voltage Ei (Vn / fn) ³1
0-1800s
0
M>Pickup2

Pickup2

M = relative Pickup as service value

ANSI09000161-4-en.vsd
ANSI09000161 V4 EN

Figure 84: A simplified logic diagram of the Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

(24)

Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE delays are calculated. The cooling
process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and frequency are separately checked
against their respective limit values.

220
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 8
Voltage protection

8.4.8 Technical data

Table 134: OEXPVPH (24) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pickup value, pickup (100–180)% of (VBase/fn) ± 0.5% of V

Pickup value, alarm (50–120)% of pickup level ± 0.5% of Vn at V ≤ Vn

± 0.5% of V at V > Vn

Pickup value, high level (100–200)% of (VBase/fn) ± 0.5% of V

Curve type IEEE ± 5% + 40 ms

(0.18 × TD)
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2

EQUATION1645 V1 EN (Equation 85)

where M = (E/f)/(Vn/fn)
Minimum time delay for inverse (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
function
Alarm time delay (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms

221
Technical Manual
222
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 9
Frequency protection

Section 9 Frequency protection

9.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81)

9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN

9.1.2 Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of sufficient generation in the network.

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is used for load shedding systems, remedial
action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on.

SAPTUF (81) is also provided with undervoltage blocking.

9.1.3 Function block

SAPTUF (81)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN

ANSI09000282-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000282 V1 EN

Figure 85: SAPTUF (81) function block

223
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Frequency protection

9.1.4 Signals
Table 135: SAPTUF (81) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 136: SAPTUF (81) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
PICKUP BOOLEAN General pickup signal
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low voltage amplitude

9.1.5 Settings
Table 137: SAPTUF (81) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
PUFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency if frequency is above
frequency value

9.1.6 Monitored data

Table 138: SAPTUF (81) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

9.1.7 Operation principle

Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF, 81) function is used to detect low power system
frequency. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period greater than

224
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 9
Frequency protection

the set time delay the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain
frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower
than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and
no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.

9.1.7.1 Measurement principle

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. If the
voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI
preprocessing function, which is described in the Basic IED Functions chapter and is
set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPTUF (81) gets blocked, and
the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
setting of the global parameter VBase.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for SAPTUF (81) is a settable definite time delay, specified by the
setting tDelay.

Trip signal issuing requires that the under frequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. If the PICKUP ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a defined reset time, the PICKUP output is reset.

When the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting
RestoreFreq, a 100ms pulse is given on the output RESTORE after a settable time
delay (tRestore).

9.1.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) completely, by binary

input signal:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function, both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

225
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Frequency protection

9.1.7.4 Design

The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is schematically described in

figure 86.

BLOCK

BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
freqNotValid

Pickup
& PICKUP
DefiniteTimeDelay PICKUP
Frequency Comparator Trip
f < PUFrequency Output
TimeDlyOperate TRIP Logic

TRIP

100 ms

Comparator RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

ANSI09000034-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000034 V1 EN

Figure 86: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF (81)

9.1.8 Technical data

Table 139: SAPTUF (81) Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, pickup function (35.00-75.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
Operate value, restore frequency (45 - 65) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
Reset ratio <1.001 -
Operate time, pickup function At 50 Hz: 200 ms typically at fset +0.5 Hz to -
fset -0.5 Hz
At 60 Hz: 170 ms typically at fset +0.5 Hz to
fset -0.5 Hz

Reset time, pickup function At 50 Hz: 60 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to fset -

+0.5 Hz
At 60 Hz: 50 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to fset
+0.5 Hz
Operate time delay (0.000-60.000)s <250 ms
Restore time delay (0.000-60.000)s <150 ms

226
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 9
Frequency protection

9.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)

9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN

9.2.2 Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.

Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.

SAPTOF (81) is used mainly for generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It
is also used as a frequency stage initiating load restoring.

SAPTOF (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

9.2.3 Function block

SAPTOF (81)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK BFI
BLKDMAGN

ANSI09000280-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000280 V1 EN

Figure 87: SAPTOF (81) function block

9.2.4 Signals
Table 140: SAPTOF (81) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

227
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Frequency protection

Table 141: SAPTOF (81) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
BFI BOOLEAN General pickup signal
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low amplitude

9.2.5 Settings
Table 142: SAPTOF (81) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
PUFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay

9.2.6 Monitored data

Table 143: SAPTOF (81) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

9.2.7 Operation principle

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is used to detect high power system
frequency. SAPTOF (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains
above the set value for a time period greater than the set time delay the TRIP signal is
issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at low
voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the
preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in
the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is
issued.

9.2.7.1 Measurement principle

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. If the
voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI

228
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 9
Frequency protection

preprocessing function, which is discussed in the Basic IED Functions chapter and is
set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter VBase, SAPTOF (81) is blocked,
and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
global parameter VBase. To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a
hysteresis has been included.

9.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite time delay, specified by the
setting tDelay.

If the PICKUP condition frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a defined reset time, the PICKUP output is reset.

9.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Over frequency protection (SAPTOF, 81) completely, by binary

input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function Signal Matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), both the PICKUP and
the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

9.2.7.4 Design

The design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is schematically described in

figure 88.

229
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Frequency protection

BLOCK

BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
freqNotValid

Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP PICKUP
Definite Time Delay
Frequency Comparator
f > PUFrequency
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP

TRIP

ANSI09000033-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000033 V1 EN

Figure 88: Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)

9.2.8 Technical data

Table 144: SAPTOF (81) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, pickup function (35.00-75.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz at
symmetrical three-
phase voltage
Reset ratio >0.999 -
Operate time, pickup function At 50 Hz: 200 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to -
fset +0.5 Hz
At 60 Hz: 170 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to
fset +0.5 Hz

Reset time, pickup function At 50 and 60 Hz: 55 ms typically at fset +0.5 -

Hz to fset-0.5 Hz

Timer (0.000-60.000)s <250 ms

9.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)

230
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 9
Frequency protection

9.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN

9.3.2 Functionality
Rate-of-change frequency protection function (SAPFRC,81) gives an early indication
of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC (81) can be used for generation
shedding, load shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC (81) can discriminate
between positive or negative change of frequency.

SAPFRC (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

9.3.3 Function block

SAPFRC (81)
V3P* TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN

ANSI09000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000281 V1 EN

Figure 89: SAPFRC (81) function block

9.3.4 Signals
Table 145: SAPFRC (81) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

231
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Frequency protection

Table 146: SAPFRC (81) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequency gradient
PICKUP BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequency gradient
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low magnitude

9.3.5 Settings
Table 147: SAPFRC (81) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
PUFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient pick up value, the sign
defines direction
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in positive / negative
frequency gradient mode
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore is enabled if frequency is above set
frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay

9.3.6 Operation principle

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes, increase as well as, decrease at an early stage. SAPFRC (81) has a
settable definite time delay.To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is
available from the preprocessing function that is, if the voltage is lower than the set
blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP
or TRIP signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore
signal is issued.

9.3.6.1 Measurement principle

The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFreqGrad. If the voltage magnitude
decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function, which is
set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPFRC (81) is blocked, and
the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad, controls if
SAPFRC (81) reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If SAPFRC (81)
is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting PUFreqGrad has been given a

232
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 9
Frequency protection

negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the
RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting
RestoreFreq. A positive setting of PUFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC (81) to PICKUP and
TRIP for frequency increases.

To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.3.6.2 Time delay

SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay, tTrip.

Trip signal issuing requires that SAPFRC (81) condition continues for at least the user
set time delay, tTrip. If the PICKUP condition, ceases during the delay time, and is not
fulfilled again within a defined reset time, the PICKUP output is reset after the reset
time has elapsed.

After an issue of the TRIP output signal, the RESTORE output of SAPFRC (81) is set,
after a time delay tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level
corresponding to RestoreFreq. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is
disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is only active for
lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative
frequency gradient is detected during the restore period.

233
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Frequency protection

9.3.6.3 Design

BLOCK

BLOCK
OR

freqNotValid BLKDMAGN

Pickup
Rate-of-Change &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Output PICKUP
[PUFreqGrad<0 PICKUP Definite Time Delay Logic
AND
df/dt < PUFreqGrad] tTrip
OR
[PUFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > PUFreqGrad]
Then
PICKUP
100 ms

Frequency Comparator RESTORE

tRestore
f > RestoreFreq

ANSI08000009_en_1.vsd

ANSI08000009 V1 EN

Figure 90: Schematic design of Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)

9.3.7 Technical data

Table 148: SAPFRC (81) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, pickup function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ± 10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore enable (45.00 - 65.00) Hz ± 2.0 mHz
frequency
Timers (0.000 - 60.000) s <130 ms
Operate time, pickup function At 50 Hz: 100 ms typically -
At 60 Hz: 80 ms typically

234
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 10
Secondary system supervision

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

10.1 Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR

10.1.1 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR - -

10.1.2 Functionality
The trip circuit monitoring function TCSSCBR is designed for supervision of control
circuits. A fault in a control circuit is detected by using a dedicated output contact that
contains the monitoring functionality.

The function picks up and trips when TCSSCBR detects a trip circuit failure. The trip
time characteristic for the function is of definite time (DT) type. The function trips
after a predefined operating time and resets when the fault disappears.

10.1.3 Function block

GUID-6F85BD70-4D18-4A00-A410-313233025F3A V2 EN

Figure 91: Function block

10.1.4 Signals
Table 149: TCSSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
TCS_STATE BOOLEAN 0 Trip circuit fail indication from I/O-card
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

235
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Secondary system supervision

Table 150: TCSSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Trip circuit fault indication

10.1.5 Settings
Table 151: TCSSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
tDelay 0.020 - 300.000 s 0.001 3.000 Operate time delay

10.1.6 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable.

The operation of trip circuit supervision can be described by using a module diagram.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

TCS
TCS_STATE
status
Timer
BLOCK 0-t ALARM
0
ANSI11000289 V1 EN

Figure 92: Functional module diagram

Trip circuit supervision generates a current of approximately 1.0 mA

through the supervised circuit. It must be ensured that this current will
not cause a latch up of the controlled object.

To protect the trip circuit supervision circuits in the IED, the output
contacts are provided with parallel transient voltage suppressors. The
breakdown voltage of these suppressors is 400 +/– 20 V DC.

236
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 10
Secondary system supervision

Timer
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates the ALARM output and resets the internal timer.

10.1.7 Technical data

Table 152: TCSSCBR Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate time delay (0.020 - 300.000) s ± 0,5% ± 110 ms

237
Technical Manual
238
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

Section 11 Control

11.1 Apparatus control

11.1.1 Functionality
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to operate is
given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchronism check, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not
supervised. However with enhanced security, the command is processed and the
resulting position is supervised.

11.1.2 Bay control QCBAY

11.1.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Bay control QCBAY - -

11.1.2.2 Functionality

The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote
control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also
provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the
bay.

239
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.1.2.3 Function block

QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD REM
BL_CMD

IEC09000080_1_en.vsd
IEC09000080 V1 EN

Figure 93: QCBAY function block

11.1.2.4 Signals
Table 153: QCBAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command

Table 154: QCBAY Output signals

Name Type Description
PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

11.1.2.5 Settings
Table 155: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Priority of originators
No priority

240
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.1.3 Local remote LOCREM

11.1.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local remote LOCREM - -

11.1.3.2 Functionality

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control (QCBAY)
function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch
signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected
via binary inputs.

11.1.3.3 Function block

LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID

IEC09000076_1_en.vsd
IEC09000076 V1 EN

Figure 94: LOCREM function block

11.1.3.4 Signals
Table 156: LOCREM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control

Table 157: LOCREM Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid

241
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.1.3.5 Settings
Table 158: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-switch
External LR-switch

11.1.4 Local remote control LOCREMCTRL

11.1.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local remote control LOCREMCTRL - -

11.1.4.2 Functionality

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control (QCBAY)
function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch
signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected
via binary inputs.

11.1.4.3 Function block

LOCREMCTRL
^PSTO1 ^HMICTR1
^PSTO2 ^HMICTR2
^PSTO3 ^HMICTR3
^PSTO4 ^HMICTR4
^PSTO5 ^HMICTR5
^PSTO6 ^HMICTR6
^PSTO7 ^HMICTR7
^PSTO8 ^HMICTR8
^PSTO9 ^HMICTR9
^PSTO10 ^HMICTR10
^PSTO11 ^HMICTR11
^PSTO12 ^HMICTR12

IEC09000074_1_en.vsd
IEC09000074 V1 EN

Figure 95: LOCREMCTRL function block

242
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.1.4.4 Signals
Table 159: LOCREMCTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12

Table 160: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 INTEGER Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 INTEGER Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 INTEGER Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 INTEGER Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

11.1.4.5 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

243
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.1.5 Operation principle

11.1.5.1 Bay control QCBAY

The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is not defined in the IEC 61850–
8–1 standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node.

The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control
functions, voltage control functions and measurement functions.

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions are
here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level
and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection
IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are
connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately
from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.

When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select
this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If
the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set
to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.

To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source
To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch
position according to table 161. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that
affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-
switch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is
permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the
external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of switch
that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.

244
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

Table 161: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel switch PSTO value AllPSTOValid Possible locations that shall be able to
positions (configuration operate
parameter)
0 = Off 0 -- Not possible to operate
1 = Local 1 FALSE Local Panel
1 = Local 5 TRUE Local or Remote level without any
priority
2 = Remote 2 FALSE Remote level
2 = Remote 5 TRUE Local or Remote level without any
priority
3 = Faulty 3 -- Not possible to operate

Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within
a complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related
to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850–
8–1). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no
outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional
and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.

11.1.5.2 Local remote/Local remote control LOCREM/LOCREMCTRL

The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/
remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 96, where the inputs on function
block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the
local HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the configuration.
The outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted
Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).

245
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD REM
BL_ CMD

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12

IEC 09000208_1_en. vsd

IEC09000208 V2 EN

Figure 96: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with one bay
and one screen page

The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.

11.2 Voltage control

11.2.1 Functionality
Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR8ATCC (90) and Tap changer control
and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC (84) are used for control of power
transformers with a on-load tap changer. The functions provide automatic regulation of
the voltage on the secondary side of transformers or alternatively on a load point
further out in the network.

Control of a single transformer, as well as control of up to two transformers within a

single RET650, or parallel control of up to four transformers in two or even four
separate RET650 is possible. Note that the last alternative is achieved by using the
GOOSE interbay communication on the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. For parallel control

246
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

of power transformers, three alternative methods are available, the master-follower

method, the circulating current method and the reverse reactance method.

Voltage control includes many extra features such as possibility of to avoid

simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers, extensive tap changer monitoring
including contact wear and hunting detection, monitoring of the power flow in the
transformer so that for example, the voltage control can be blocked if the power
reverses etc.

In manual operating mode it is possible to give raise- or lower-commands to the load

tap changer from the local HMI. Such facilities are pre-made in the factory.

The Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR8ATCC (90) function controls the
voltage on the LV side of a transformer either automatically or manually. The
automatic control can be either for a single transformer, or for a group of parallel
transformers.

The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs (TCMYLTC, 84) gives the
tap commands to the tap changer, and supervises that commands are carried through
correctly. It has built-in extensive possibilities for tap changer position measurement,
as well as supervisory and monitoring features. This is used in the voltage control and
can also give information about tap position to the transformer differential protection.

11.2.2 Automatic voltage control for tapchanger, parallel control

TR8ATCC (90)

11.2.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Automatic voltage control for tap TR8ATCC 90
changer
U

IEC10000166 V1 EN

247
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.2.2.2 Function block

TR8ATCC (90)
I3P1* ATCCOUT
I3P2* MAN
V3P2* AUTO
BLOCK IBLK
MANCTRL PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL PLTREV
PSTO QGTFWD
RAISEV QLTREV
LOWERV VHIGH
EAUTOBLK VLOW
DEBLKAUT VBLK
LVA1 HOURHUNT
LVA2 DAYHUNT
LVA3 HUNTING
LVA4 SINGLE
LVARESET PARALLEL
RSTERR TIMERON
DISC ADAPT
SNGLMODE TOTBLK
T1INCLD AUTOBLK
T2INCLD MASTER
T3INCLD FOLLOWER
T4INCLD MFERR
FORCMAST OUTOFPOS
RSTMAST UGTUPPDB
ATCCIN ULTLOWDB
HORIZ1 COMMERR
HORIZ2 ICIRC
HORIZ3 TRFDISC
HORIZ4 VTALARM
T1PG
T2PG
T3PG
T4PG

ANSI09000325-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000325 V1 EN

Figure 97: TR8ATCC (90) function block

11.2.2.3 Signals
Table 162: TR8ATCC (90) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Input group for current on HV side
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Input group for current on LV side
SIGNAL
V3P2 GROUP - Input group for voltage on LV side
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
MANCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "MAN" command
AUTOCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "AUTO" command
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
Table continues on next page

248
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

Name Type Default Description

RAISEV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
LOWERV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
EAUTOBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block voltage control in automatic control mode
DEBLKAUT BOOLEAN 0 Binary "Deblock Auto" command
LVA1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjustment factor 1
LVA2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjustment factor 2
LVA3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjustment factor 3
LVA4 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjustment factor 4
LVARESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset LVA
RSTERR BOOLEAN 0 Resets automatic control commands
DISC BOOLEAN 0 Disconnected transformer
SNGLMODE BOOLEAN 0 Voltage control in single control
T1INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer1 included in parallel group
T2INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer2 included in parallel group
T3INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer3 included in parallel group
T4INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer4 included in parallel group
FORCMAST BOOLEAN 0 Force transformer to master
RSTMAST BOOLEAN 0 Reset forced master transformer to default
ATCCIN GROUP - Group connection from YLTCOUT
SIGNAL
HORIZ1 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication from T1
SIGNAL
HORIZ2 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication from T2
SIGNAL
HORIZ3 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication from T3
SIGNAL
HORIZ4 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication from T4
SIGNAL

Table 163: TR8ATCC (90) Output signals

Name Type Description
ATCCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to YLTCIN
MAN BOOLEAN Manual control mode is active
AUTO BOOLEAN Automatic control mode is active
IBLK BOOLEAN One phase current is above the set limit
PGTFWD BOOLEAN Active power above the set limit powerActiveForw
PLTREV BOOLEAN Active power below the set limit powerActiveRev
QGTFWD BOOLEAN Reactive power above the set limit powerReactiveForw
Table continues on next page

249
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Name Type Description

QLTREV BOOLEAN Reactive power below the set limit powerReactiveRev
VHIGH BOOLEAN Busbar voltage above the set limit voltBusbMaxLimit
VLOW BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the set limit voltBusbMinLimit
VBLK BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the set limit voltBusbBlockLimit
HOURHUNT BOOLEAN Number of commands within the latest hour exceeded
maximum level
DAYHUNT BOOLEAN Number of commands within the last 24 hours
exceeded maximum level
HUNTING BOOLEAN Number of commands in opposite direction exceeded
maximum level
SINGLE BOOLEAN Transformer operates in single mode
PARALLEL BOOLEAN Transformer operates in parallel mode
TIMERON BOOLEAN Raise or lower command to the tap activated
ADAPT BOOLEAN Transformer is adapting
TOTBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto and manual commands
AUTOBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto commands
MASTER BOOLEAN Transformer is master
FOLLOWER BOOLEAN This transformer is follower
MFERR BOOLEAN Number of masters is different from one
OUTOFPOS BOOLEAN Difference in tap positions exceeded the set limit
VGTUPPDB BOOLEAN Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER
command to come
VLTLOWDB BOOLEAN Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE command
to come
COMMERR BOOLEAN Communication error
ICIRC BOOLEAN Block from high circulating current
TRFDISC BOOLEAN Transformer is disconnected
VTALARM BOOLEAN VT supervision alarm
T1PG BOOLEAN Transformer 1 included in parallel group
T2PG BOOLEAN Transformer 2 included in parallel group
T3PG BOOLEAN Transformer 3 included in parallel group
T4PG BOOLEAN Transformer 4 included in parallel group

250
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.2.2.4 Settings
Table 164: TR8ATCC (90) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
MeasMode A - - PosSeq Selection of measured voltage and current
B
C
AB
BC
CA
PosSeq
TotalBlock Disabled - - Disabled Total block of the voltage control function
Enabled
AutoBlock Disabled - - Disabled Block of the automatic mode in voltage
Enabled control function
FSDMode Disabled - - Disabled Fast step down function activation mode
Auto
AutoMan
tFSD 1.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 15.0 Time delay for lower command when fast
step down mode is activated
Vset 85.0 - 120.0 %UB2 0.1 100.0 Voltage control set voltage, in % of rated
voltage
VDeadband 0.2 - 9.0 %UB2 0.1 1.2 Outer voltage deadband, in % of rated voltage
VDeadbandInner 0.1 - 9.0 %UB2 0.1 0.9 Inner voltage deadband, in % of rated voltage
Vmax 80 - 180 %UB2 1 105 Upper limit of busbar voltage, in % of rated
voltage
Vmin 70 - 120 %UB2 1 80 Lower limit of busbar voltage, in % of rated
voltage
Vblock 50 - 120 %UB2 1 80 Undervoltage block level, % of rated voltage
t1Use Constant - - Constant Activation of long inverse time delay
Inverse
t1 3 - 1000 s 1 60 Time delay (long) for automatic control
commands
t2Use Constant - - Constant Activation of short inverse time delay
Inverse
t2 1 - 1000 s 1 15 Time delay (short) for automatic control
commands
t_MinTripDelay 3 - 120 s 1 5 Minimum operating time in inverse mode
OperationLDC Disabled - - Disabled Operation line voltage drop compensation
Enabled
OperCapaLDC Disabled - - Disabled LDC compensation for capacitive load
Enabled
Rline 0.00 - 150.00 ohm 0.01 0.0 Line resistance, primary values, in ohm
Xline -150.00 - 150.00 ohm 0.01 0.0 Line reactance, primary values, in ohm
Table continues on next page

251
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

LVAConst1 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB2 0.1 0.0 Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated voltage
LVAConst2 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB2 0.1 0.0 Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated voltage
LVAConst3 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB2 0.1 0.0 Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated voltage
LVAConst4 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB2 0.1 0.0 Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated voltage
VRAuto -20.0 - 20.0 %UB2 0.1 0.0 Load voltage auto correction, in % of rated
voltage
Iblock 0 - 250 %IB1 1 150 Overcurrent block level, in % of rated current
HourHuntDetect 0 - 30 Op/H 1 30 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within one hour
DayHuntDetect 0 - 100 Op/D 1 100 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within 24 hour
tWindowHunt 1 - 120 Min 1 60 Time window for hunting alarm, minutes
NoOpWindow 3 - 30 Op/W 1 30 Hunting detection alarm, maximum operations/
window
P> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 1000 Alarm level of active power in forward direction
P< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of active power in reverse direction
Q> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 1000 Alarm level of reactive power in forward
direction
Q< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of reactive power in reverse
direction
tPower 1 - 6000 s 1 10 Time delay for alarms from power supervision
OperationPAR Disabled - - Disabled Parallel operation, Off/CirculatingCurrent/
CC MasterFollower
MF
OperCCBlock Disabled - - Enabled Enable block from circulating current
Enabled supervision
CircCurrLimit 0.0 - 20000.0 %IB2 0.1 100.0 Block level for circulating current
tCircCurr 0 - 1000 s 1 30 Time delay for block from circulating current
Comp 0 - 2000 % 1 100 Compensation parameter in % for Circulating
Current
OperSimTap Disabled - - Disabled Simultaneous tapping prohibited
Enabled
OperUsetPar Disabled - - Disabled Use common voltage set point for parallel
Enabled operation
VTmismatch 0.5 - 10.0 %UB2 0.1 10.0 Alarm level for VT supervision, in % of rated
voltage
tVTmismatch 1 - 600 s 1 10 Time delay for VT supervision alarm
T1RXOP Disabled - - Disabled Receive block operation from parallel
Enabled transformer 1
T2RXOP Disabled - - Disabled Receive block operation from parallel
Enabled transformer 2
Table continues on next page

252
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

T3RXOP Disabled - - Disabled Receive block operation from parallel
Enabled transformer 3
T4RXOP Disabled - - Disabled Receive block operation from parallel
Enabled transformer 4
TapPosOffs -5 - 5 - 1 0 Tap position offset in relation to the master
MFPosDiffLim 1 - 20 - 1 1 Alarm for tap position difference from master
tMFPosDiff 0 - 6000 s 1 60 Time for tap position difference from master

Table 165: TR8ATCC (90) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel1 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, winding 1
GlobalBaseSel2 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups, winding 2
TrfId T1 - - T1 Identity of transformer
T2
T3
T4
Xr2 0.1 - 200.0 ohm 0.1 0.5 Transformer reactance in primary ohms on
ATCC side
tAutoMSF 0 - 60 s 1 10 Time delay for command for auto follower
OperationAdapt Disabled - - Disabled Enable adapt mode
Enabled
MFMode Follow Cmd - - Follow Cmd Select follow tap or follow command
Follow Tap
CircCurrBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for high
Auto Block circulating current
Auto&Man Block
CmdErrBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block command error
Auto&Man Block
OCBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block overcurrent
Auto&Man Block
MFPosDiffBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm or auto block for tap position difference
Auto Block in MF
OVPartBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto partial or auto&man partial block
Auto&Man Block for overvoltage
TapChgBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for tap
Auto Block changer error
Auto&Man Block
Table continues on next page

253
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TapPosBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto or auto&man block for position
Auto Block supervision
Auto&Man Block
UVBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block undervoltage
Auto&Man Block
UVPartBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto partial or auto&man partial block
Auto&Man Block for undervoltage

11.2.2.5 Monitored data

Table 166: TR8ATCC (90) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
RAISE BOOLEAN - - Raise voltage order to
tapchanger
LOWER BOOLEAN - - Lower voltage order to
tapchanger
BUSVOLT REAL - kV Average of measured busbar
voltage (service value)
VOLTDEV REAL - % Voltage deviation compared
to dead band (%)
TRLDCURR REAL - A Amplitude of own load current
VSETOUT REAL - kV Voltage setpoint used in
single mode (service value)
VLOAD REAL - kV Calculated compensated
voltage (service value)
P REAL - MW Calculated active power
(service value)
Q REAL - MVAr Calculated reactive power
(service value)
IPRIM REAL - A Maximum of 3 phase currents
(service value)
CCAVolt REAL - kV Circulating current adjusted
voltage
VSETPAR REAL - kV Average voltage setpoint
used in parallel mode
ICIRCUL REAL - A Circulating current

11.2.3 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs

TCMYLTC (84)

254
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.2.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 TCMYLTC 84
binary inputs

IEC10000167 V1 EN

11.2.3.2 Function block

TCMYLTC (84)
YLTCIN* YLTCOUT
TCINPROG VRAISE
INERR VLOWER
RESETERR HIPOSAL
OUTERR LOPOSAL
RS_CLCNT POSERRAL
RS_OPCNT CMDERRAL
PARITY TCERRAL
BIERR POSOUT
B1 CONVERR
B2 NEWPOS
B3 HIDIFPOS
B4 INVALPOS
B5 TCPOS
B6
MA

ANSI09000323-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000323 V1 EN

Figure 98: TCMYLTC(84) function block

11.2.3.3 Signals

TCMYLTC has no other input for tap changer position other than,
binary in this release of 650 series. Input signal MA is not supported in
the IED.

Table 167: TCMYLTC (84) Input signals

Name Type Default Description
YLTCIN GROUP - Group connection from ATCCOUT
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision of the digital output board
Table continues on next page

255
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Name Type Default Description

RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position
B3 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position
B4 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position
B5 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position
B6 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position
MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position

Table 168: TCMYLTC (84) Output signals

Name Type Description
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN
VRAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
VLOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in the highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in the lowest volt position
POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position
indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected position
change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside range
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position

256
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.2.3.4 Settings
Table 169: TCMYLTC (84) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse duration

Table 170: TCMYLTC (84) Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for the lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for the highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for the lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for the highest voltage tap position
CodeType Binary - - Binary Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
ContactPerTap
mA
UseParity Disabled - - Disabled Enable parity check
Enabled
tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the value is
accepted
CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 s 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Disabled - - Enabled Enable commands to tap changer
Enabled

11.2.3.5 Monitored data

Table 171: TCMYLTC (84) Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Number of operations on tap
changer
CLCNT_VAL REAL - - Remaining number of
operations at rated load
TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value corresponding
to actual tap position

257
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.2.4 Operation principle

The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks. Both are logical nodes
in IEC 61850-8-1.

• Automatic voltage control for tap changer

• TR8ATCC (90)
• Tap changer control and supervision
• TCMYLTC (84), 6 binary inputs

TR8ATCC (90)is designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the LV-side side of
a power transformer within given limits around a set target voltage. A raise or lower
command is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given period of time,
deviates from the set target value by more than the preset deadband value that is,
degree of insensitivity. A time-delay (inverse or definite time) is set to avoid
unnecessary operation during shorter voltage deviations from the target value, and in
order to coordinate with other automatic voltage controllers in the system.

TCMYLTC (84) is an interface between TR8ATCC (90) and the transformer load tap
changer. More specifically this means that it receives information fromTR8ATCC (90)
and based on this it gives command-pulses to a power transformer motor driven on-
load tap changer and also receives information from the load tap changer regarding tap
position, progress of given commands, and so on.

11.2.4.1 Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR8ATCC (90)

The LV-side of the transformer is used as the voltage measuring point. If necessary, the
LV side current is used as load current to calculate the line-voltage drop to the
regulation point. This current is also used when parallel control with the circulating
current method is used.

In addition, all three-phase currents from the HV-winding (usually the winding where
the tap changer is situated) are used by the Automatic voltage control for tap changer
TR8ATCC (90) for parallel control function for over current blocking.

The setting MeasMode is a selection of single-phase, or phase-phase, or positive

sequence quantity. It is to be used for voltage and current measurement on the LV-side.
The involved phases are also selected. Thus, single-phases as well as phase-phase or
three-phase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected for current
and voltage.

The analog input signals are normally common for other functions in the IED for
example, protection functions.

258
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

The LV-busbar voltage is designated VB, load current IL and for load
point voltage VL will be used in the text to follow.

Automatic control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC (90)

Parallel control of power transformers means control of two or more power
transformers connected to the same busbar on the LV side and in most cases also on
the HV side. Special measures must be taken in order to avoid a runaway situation
where the tap changers on the parallel transformers gradually diverge and end up in
opposite end positions.

Three alternative methods can be used for parallel control with Automatic control for
tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC (90):
• master-follower method
• reverse reactance method
• circulating current method.

Parallel control with the master-follower method

In the master-follower method, one of the transformers is selected to be master, and
will regulate the voltage in accordance with the principles Automatic voltage control
for a tap changer. Selection of the master is made by activating the binary input
FORCMAST in the TR8ATCC (90) function block for one of the transformers in the
group.

The followers can act in one of two alternative ways selected by a setting parameter:

1. Raise and lower commands (VRAISE and VLOWER) generated by the master,
initiates the corresponding command in all follower TR8ATCCs (90)
simultaneously, and consequently they will blindly follow the master commands
irrespective of their individual tap positions.
2. The followers read the tap position of the master and adapt to the same tap
position or to a tap position with an offset relative to the master. In this mode, the
followers can also be time delayed relative to the master.

Parallel control with the reverse reactance method

In the reverse reactance method, the LDC (Line voltage drop compensation) is used.
The purpose of which is normally to control the voltage at a load point further out in
the network. The very same function can also be used here but with a completely
different objective. Whereas the LDC, when used to control the voltage at a load point,
gives a voltage drop along a line from the busbar voltage VB to a load point voltage
VL, the LDC, when used in the reverse reactance parallel control of transformers, gives
a voltage increase (actually, by adjusting the ratio XL/RL with respect to the power

259
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

factor, the length of the vector VL will be approximately equal to the length of VB)
from VB up towards the transformer itself.

When the voltage at a load point is controlled by using LDC, the line impedance from
the transformer to the load point is defined by the setting Xline. If a negative reactance
is entered instead of the normal positive line reactance, parallel transformers will act in
such a way that the transformer with a higher tap position will be the first to tap down
when the busbar voltage increases, and the transformer with a lower tap position will
be the first to tap up when the busbar voltage decreases. The overall performance will
then be that a runaway tap situation will be avoided and that the circulating current will
be minimized.

Parallel control with the circulating current method

This method requires extensive exchange of data between the TR8ATCC (90) function
blocks (one TR8ATCC (90) function for each transformer in the parallel group). The
TR8ATCC (90) function block can either be located in the same IED, where they are
configured in PCM600 to co-operate, or in different IEDs. If the functions are located
in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay communication on the
IEC 61850 communication protocol.

The main objectives of the circulating current method for parallel voltage control are:

1. Regulate the busbar or load voltage to the preset target value.

2. Minimize the circulating current in order to achieve optimal sharing of the reactive
load between parallel transformers.

The busbar voltage VB is measured individually for each transformer in the parallel
group by its associated TR8ATCC (90) function. These measured values will then be
exchanged between the transformers, and in each TR8ATCC (90) block, the mean
value of all VB values will be calculated. The resulting value VBmean will then be used
in each IED instead of VB for the voltage regulation, thus assuring that the same value
is used by all TR8ATCC (90) functions, and thereby avoiding that one erroneous
measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation. At the same time,
supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed.

Figure 99 shows an example with two transformers connected in parallel. If

transformer T1 has higher no load voltage it will drive a circulating current which adds
to the load current in T1 and subtracts from the load current in T2.

260
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

VT1 VT2
ICC...T2
ICC...T2
+ +
T1 T2 ZT1 IT1 IT2 ZT2
ICC...T1
ICC...T1

IT1 IT2
VB
IL IL

VL Load Load
VL

ANSI06000484-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000484 V2 EN

Figure 99: Circulating current in a parallel group of two transformers

It can be shown that the magnitude of the circulating current in this case can be
approximately calculated with the formula:

VT1 - VT 2
I cc _ T1 = Icc _ T 2 =
ZT1 + Z T 2
EQUATION1987-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 86)

Because the transformer impedance is dominantly inductive, it is possible to use just

the transformer reactances in the above formula. At the same time this means that T1
circulating current lags the busbar voltage by almost 90°, while T2 circulating current
leads the busbar voltage by almost 90°.

11.2.4.2 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC (84)

Reading of tap changer position

The tap changer position can be received to the tap changer control and supervision, 6
binary inputs TCMYLTC (84) function block in the following ways:

1. Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 positions).
2. Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray coded
binary signals.

261
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Via binary input signals, one per tap position

In this option, each tap position has a separate contact that is hard wired to a binary
input in the IED. Via the Signal Matrix tool in PCM600, the contacts on the binary
input card are then directly connected to the
• inputs B1 – B6 on TCMYLTC (84) function

Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray coded
binary signals
The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC ,84) decodes binary data from
up to six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may be decoded either as
BIN, BCD or GRAY format depending on the setting of the parameter CodeType.

It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the
parity check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity.

The input BIERR on (TCMYLTC , 84) can be used as supervisory input for indication
of any external error ( Binary Input/output Module) in the system for reading of tap
changer position. Likewise, the input OUTERR can be used as a supervisory of the
Binary Input/output Module.

The truth table (see table 172) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded
Decimal, and Gray coded signals.

262
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

Table 172: Binary, BCD and Gray conversion

IEC06000522 V1 EN

The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from
decimal numbers to Gray code is given below.

263
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Table 173: Gray code conversion

IEC06000523 V1 EN

264
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

Via a mA input signal

11.2.4.3 Connection between TR8ATCC (90) and TCMYLTC (84)

The two function blocks Automatic voltage control for tap changer, TR8ATCC (90)
and Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC (84) are
connected to each other according to figure 100 below.

(Rmk. In case
of parallel
control, this
signal shall
TR8ATCC (90) TCMYLTC (84)
I3P1* ATCCOUT
also be
YLTCIN* YLTCOUT
I3P2* MAN TCINPROG VRAISE connected to
V3P2* AUTO INERR VLOWER HORIZx input
BLOCK IBLK RESETERR HIPOSAL of the parallel
MANCTRL PGTFWD OUTERR LOPOSAL transformer
AUTOCTRL PLTREV RS_CLCNT POSERRAL
PSTO QGTFWD RS_OPCNT CMDERRAL
ATCC function
RAISEV QLTREV PARITY TCERRAL block)
LOWERV VHIGH BIERR POSOUT
EAUTOBLK VLOW B1 CONVERR
DEBLKAUT VBLK B2 NEWPOS
LVA1 HOURHUNT B3 HIDIFPOS
LVA2 DAYHUNT B4 INVALPOS
LVA3 HUNTING B5 TCPOS
LVA4 SINGLE B6
LVARESET PARALLEL MA
RSTERR TIMERON
DISC ADAPT
SNGLMODE TOTBLK
T1INCLD AUTOBLK
T2INCLD MASTER
T3INCLD FOLLOWER
T4INCLD MFERR
FORCMAST OUTOFPOS
RSTMAST UGTUPPDB
ATCCIN ULTLOWDB
HORIZ1 COMMERR
HORIZ2 ICIRC
HORIZ3 TRFDISC
HORIZ4 VTALARM
T1PG
T2PG
T3PG
T4PG

ANSI09000326-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000326 V1 EN

Figure 100: Connection between TR8ATCC (90) and TCMYLTC (84)

The TR8ATCC (90) function blocks have an output signal ATCCOUT, which is
connected to input YLTCIN on TCMYLTC (84). The data set sent from ATCCOUT to
YLTCIN contains 5 binary signals, one “word” containing 10 binary signals and 1
analog signal. For TR8ATCC (90) data is also sent from output ATCCOUT to other
TR8ATCC (90) function input HORIZx, when the master-follower or circulating
current mode is used.

265
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Table 174: Binary signals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
raiseVolt Order to TCMYLTC (84) to make a raise command
lowerVolt Order to TCMYLTC (84) to make a lower command
automaticCtrl The regulation is in automatic control
extRaiseBlock Block raise commands
extLowerBlock Block lower commands

Table 175: Binary signals contained in word “enableBlockSignals”: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
CircCurrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of high circulating current
CmdErrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of command error
OCBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of over current
MFPosDiffBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the tap difference between a follower
and the master is greater than the set value
OVPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because the busbar voltage is above Vmax
RevActPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because reverse action is activated
TapChgBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error
TapPosBl Alarm/Block commands in one direction because the tap changer has reached an
end position, or Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error
UVBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the busbar voltage is below Vblock
UVPartBl Alarm/Block lower commands because the busbar voltage is between Vmin and
Vblock

Table 176: Analog signal: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
currAver Value of current in the phase with the highest current value

In case of parallel control of transformers, the data set sent from output signal
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC (90) blocks input HORIZx contains one "word"
containing 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals:

Table 177: Binary signals contained in word “status”: ATCCOUT / HORIZx

Signal Description
TimerOn This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is going to
tap when the set time has expired.
automaticCTRL Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control
mutualBlock Activated when the automatic control is blocked
Table continues on next page

266
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

Signal Description
disc Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar
receiveStat Signal used for the horizontal communication
TermIsForcedMaster Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower parallel
control mode
TermIsMaster Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel control
mode
termReadyForMSF Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control mode
raiseVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap up
lowerVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap down

Table 178: Analog signals: ATCCOUT / HORIZx

Signal Description
voltageBusbar Measured busbar voltage for this transformer
ownLoad Currim Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer
ownLoadCurrre Measured load current real part for this transformer
reacSec Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side
relativePosition The transformer's actual tap position
voltage Setpoint The transformer's set voltage (VSet) for automatic control

The TCMYLTC (84) function blocks has an output YLTCOUT. As shown in figure
100, this output shall be connected to the input ATCCIN and it contains 10 binary
signals and 4 integer signals:

Table 179: Binary signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN

Signal Description
tapInOperation Tap changer in operation, changing tap position
direction Direction, raise or lower, for the most recent tap changer operation
tapInHighVoltPos Tap changer in high end position
tapInLowVoltPos Tap changer in low end position
tapPositionError Error in reading of tap position ( tap position out of range, more than one step
change, BCD code error (unaccepted combination), parity fault, out of range,
hardware fault for example, BIO etc.)
tapChgError This is set high when the tap changer has not carried through a raise/lower
command within the expected max. time, or if the tap changer starts tapping
without a given command.
cmdError This is set high if a given raise/lower command is not followed by a tap position
change within the expected max. time
raiseVoltageFb Feedback to TR8ATCC (90) that a raise command shall be executed
lowerVoltageFb Feedback to TR8ATCC (90) that a lower command shall be executed
timeOutTC Setting value of tTCTimeout that tTCTimeout has timed out.

267
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Table 180: Integer signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN

Signal Description
tapPosition Actual tap position as reported from the load tap changer
numberOfOperations Accumulated number of tap changer operations
tapPositionMaxVolt Tap position for highest voltage
tapPositionMinVolt Tap position for lowest voltage

11.2.5 Technical data

Table 181: TR8ATCC (90), TCMYLTC (84) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Transformer reactance on ATCC (0.1–200.0)Ω, primary -
side
Time delay for lower command (1.0–100.0) s -
when fast step down mode is
activated
Voltage control set voltage (85.0–120.0)% of VB2 ±0.5% of Vn

Outer voltage deadband (0.2–9.0)% of VB2 ± 5,0% of set value

Inner voltage deadband (0.1–9.0)% of VB2 ± 5,0% of set value
Upper limit of busbar voltage (80–180)% of VB2 ± 0.5% of Vn

Lower limit of busbar voltage (70–120)% of VB2 ± 0.5% of Vn

Undervoltage block level (0–120)% of VB2 ± 0.5% of Vn

Time delay (long) for automatic (3–1000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms

control commands
Time delay (short) for automatic (1–1000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms
control commands
Minimum operating time in (3–120) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms
inverse mode
Line resistance (0.00–150.00)Ω, primary -
Line reactance (-150.00–150.00)Ω, primary -
Load voltage adjustment (-20.0–20.0)% of VB2 ± 5,0% of set value
constants
Load voltage auto correction (-20.0–20.0)% of VB2 ± 5,0% of set value
Overcurrent block level (0–250)% of IBase (for winding 1 which ± 1.0% of In at I≤In
is defined in a global base function, ± 1.0% of I at I>In
selected with setting GlobalBaseSel1 for
TR8ATCC (90))
Level for number of counted raise/ (0–30) operations/hour -
lower within one hour
Level for number of counted raise/ (0–100) operations/day -
lower within 24 hours
Table continues on next page

268
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time window for hunting alarm (1–120) minutes -
Hunting detection alarm, max (3–30) operations/window -
operations/window
Alarm level of active power in (-9999.99–9999.99) MW ± 1.0% of Sn
forward and reverse direction
Alarm level of reactive power in (-9999.99–9999.99) MVAr ± 1.0% of Sn
forward and reverse direction
Time delay for alarms from power (1–6000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms
supervision
Tap position for lowest and (1–63) -
highest voltage
Type of code conversion Binary, BCD, Gray, ContactPerTap -
Time after position change before (1–60) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms
the value is accepted
Tap changer constant time-out (1–120) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms
Raise/lower command output (0.5–10.0) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms
pulse duration

11.3 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGGIO

11.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGGIO - -
selection and LHMI presentation

11.3.2 Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO) (or
the selector switch function block) is used to get a selector switch functionality similar
to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used
extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values.
Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system
reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The logic selector switches eliminate all
these problems.

269
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.3.3 Function block

SLGGIO
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN

IEC09000091_1_en.vsd
IEC09000091 V1 EN

Figure 101: SLGGIO function block

11.3.4 Signals
Table 182: SLGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command

Table 183: SLGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
P02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
P03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
P04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
P05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
P06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
P07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
Table continues on next page

270
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

Name Type Description

P08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
P09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
P10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
P11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
P12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
P13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
P14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
P15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
P25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
P26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
P27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
P28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
P29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
P30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
P31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
P32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position as integer value

11.3.5 Settings
Table 184: SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
Table continues on next page

271
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Output time delay
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
Enabled

11.3.6 Monitored data

Table 185: SLGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position as integer
value

11.3.7 Operation principle

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
function has two operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the
UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one operates the
UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN
input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
descending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one operates
the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output
settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of
UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also,
depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN
activation signal positive front and the output activation.

Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application

Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired
position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or
remotely, using a “select before execute” dialog. One can block the function operation,
by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and
further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified
through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the
Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGGIO function block has also an
integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the
block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the
user can see the position names instead of a number.

272
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.4 Selector mini switch VSGGIO

11.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGGIO - -

11.4.2 Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for a
variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.

VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line diagram
(SLD) on the local HMI.

11.4.3 Function block

VSGGIO
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21

IEC09000341-1-en.vsd
IEC09000341 V1 EN

11.4.4 Signals
Table 186: VSGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

273
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Table 187: VSGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

11.4.5 Settings
Table 188: VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model according
SBO Enh to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

11.4.6 Operation principle

Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for double purpose, in the same
way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the
IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1
and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in
the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

274
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated

with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on
the screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An
INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow
operation from local HMI.

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit

representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result.

The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name
of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value
0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11

11.5 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions

DPGGIO

11.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O DPGGIO - -
functions

11.5.2 Functionality
The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block is
used to send double indications to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is
especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.

275
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.5.3 Function block

DPGGIO
OPEN POSITION
CLOSE
VALID

IEC09000075_1_en.vsd
IEC09000075 V1 EN

Figure 102: DPGGIO function block

11.5.4 Signals
Table 189: DPGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

Table 190: DPGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

11.5.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

11.5.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
(DPGGIO) function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment
or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, PCM600 must be
used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this
information.

276
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.6 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO

11.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO - -

11.6.2 Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) function block is a collection
of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA)
to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need extensive command receiving
functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent
directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of
the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and
SPGGIO function blocks. The commands can be pulsed or steady.

11.6.3 Function block

SPC8GGIO
BLOCK ^OUT1
PSTO ^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8

IEC09000086_1_en.vsd
IEC09000086 V1 EN

Figure 103: SPC8GGIO function block

11.6.4 Signals
Table 191: SPC8GGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection

277
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Table 192: SPC8GGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output8

11.6.5 Settings
Table 193: SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
Latched1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 1
Latched
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output1 Pulse Time
Latched2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 2
Latched
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output2 Pulse Time
Latched3 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 3
Latched
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output3 Pulse Time
Latched4 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 4
Latched
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output4 Pulse Time
Latched5 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 5
Latched
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output5 Pulse Time
Latched6 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 6
Latched
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output6 Pulse Time
Latched7 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 7
Latched
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output7 Pulse Time
Latched8 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 8
Latched
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output8 pulse time

278
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.6.6 Operation principle

The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the
eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected.
The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if
the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will
block the operation of the function – in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator
places only, REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GGIO function.

11.7 Automation bits AUTOBITS

11.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3

11.7.2 Functionality
The Automation bits function (AUTOBITS) is used to configure the DNP3 protocol
command handling.

279
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.7.3 Function block

AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32

IEC09000030-1-en.vsd
IEC09000030 V1 EN

Figure 104: AUTOBITS function block

11.7.4 Signals
Table 194: AUTOBITS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection

Table 195: AUTOBITS Output signals

Name Type Description
CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
Table continues on next page

280
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

Name Type Description

CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32

11.7.5 Settings
Table 196: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled

281
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.7.6 Operation principle

Automation bits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time.
To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-
On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were
appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive
100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: Enabled/Disabled does. That means that, upon
activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The
BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master.
Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3
master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator
place. The command can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in
“Local” then no change is applied to the outputs.

For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, refer to DNP3 communication

protocol manual.

11.8 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD

11.8.1 Functionality
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output
signals.

11.8.2 Function block

I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT

IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN

Figure 105: I103CMD function block

282
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.8.3 Signals
Table 197: I103CMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 198: I103CMD Output signals

Name Type Description
16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, block of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection

11.8.4 Settings
Table 199: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

11.9 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD

11.9.1 Functionality
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions.

11.9.2 Function block

I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN

Figure 106: I103IEDCMD function block

283
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.9.3 Signals
Table 200: I103IEDCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 201: I103IEDCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26, activate setting group 4

11.9.4 Settings
Table 202: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 255 Function type (1-255)

11.10 Function commands user defined for IEC

60870-5-103 I103USRCMD

11.10.1 Functionality
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output
signals. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
the private range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.

284
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.10.2 Function block

I103USRCMD
BLOCK ^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8

IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN

Figure 107: I103USRCMD function block

11.10.3 Signals
Table 203: I103USRCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 204: I103USRCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

11.10.4 Settings
Table 205: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
Table continues on next page

285
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for output 2 (1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for output 3 (1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for output 4 (1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for output 5 (1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for output 6 (1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for output 7 (1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for output 8 (1-255)

11.11 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD

11.11.1 Functionality
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The
function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to
implement double-point command schemes.

11.11.2 Function block

I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON

IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN

Figure 108: I103GENCMD function block

11.11.3 Signals
Table 206: I103GENCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command

Table 207: I103GENCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON

286
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 11
Control

11.11.4 Settings
Table 208: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 127 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 32 - 239 - 1 32 Information number for command output
(1-255)

11.12 IED commands with position and select for IEC

60870-5-103 I103POSCMD

11.12.1 Functionality
I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are getting the position value
as an integer (for example from the POSITION output of the SCSWI function block)
and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE); as per standard, 0 and 3
values of the position are not supported.

The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring direction (the position
information), not the commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used to
indicate that the monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-before-operate type
of control)

11.12.2 Function block

I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT

IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN

Figure 109: I103POSCMD function block

11.12.3 Signals
Table 209: I103POSCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object

287
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Control

11.12.4 Settings
Table 210: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Fucntion type (1-255)
InfNo 160 - 196 - 4 160 Information number for command output
(1-255)

288
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Section 12 Logic

12.1 Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC (94)

12.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC 94

I->O

SYMBOL-K V1 EN

12.1.2 Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in
the tripping of the fault. It provides pulse prolongation to ensure a three-phase trip
pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation
with autoreclosing functions.

The trip function block also includes functionality for breaker lock-out.

12.1.3 Function block

SMPPTRC (94)
BLOCK TRIP
TRINP_3P CLLKOUT
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

ANSI09000284-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000284 V1 EN

Figure 110: SMPPTRC (94) function block

289
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

12.1.4 Signals
Table 211: SMPPTRC (94) Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
TRINP_3P BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function

Table 212: SMPPTRC (94) Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

12.1.5 Settings
Table 213: SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal

Table 214: SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TripLockout Disabled - - Disabled On: Activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip latch,
Enabled Off: Only output
AutoLock Disabled - - Disabled On: Lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and trip,
Enabled Off: Only input

12.1.6 Operation principle

The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC (94) is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to
secure the breaker opening.

For three-pole tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC (94) has a single
input (TRINP_3P) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions
within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs

290
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or
more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring
this signal.

ANSI05000789 V2 EN

Figure 111: Simplified logic diagram for three pole trip

Lockout can be activated either by activating the input (SETLKOUT) or automatically

from the trip input by setting AutoLock to Enabled. A Lockout condition will be
indicated by activation of the output (CLLKOUT). If lockout has been activated it can
be reset by activating the input (RSTLKOUT) or via the HMI.

If TripLockout is set to Enabled an active Lockout will latch the three-phase trip
output. In this way if both AutoLock and TripLockout are set to Enabled the trip will
always be three-phase and sealed in.

12.1.7 Technical data

Table 215: SMPPTRC (94) technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip action 3-ph -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

12.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO

12.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO - -

291
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

12.2.2 Functionality
The Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO function is used to route trip signals and other
logical output signals to the tripping logics SMPPTRC and SPTPTRC or to different
output contacts on the IED.

TMAGGIO output signals and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the signals
to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.

12.2.3 Function block

TMAGGIO
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
IEC09000105 V1 EN

Figure 112: TMAGGIO function block

292
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

12.2.4 Signals
Table 216: TMAGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32

293
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

Table 217: TMAGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32

12.2.5 Settings
Table 218: TMAGGIO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 1, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed

12.2.6 Operation principle

Trip matrix logic (TMAGGIO) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output
signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the
necessary grouping of connected input signals (for example, for tripping and alarming
purposes) to the three output signals from the function block.

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:

1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1
(TRUE) the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1 (TRUE).
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 (TRUE) the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1
(TRUE).
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1
(TRUE) the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1 (TRUE).

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime,

OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay is

294
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set time. The
ModeOutput for respective output decides whether the output shall be steady with an
drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with duration set by
PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation since the inputs are connected in an OR-
function a new pulse will only be given on the output if all related inputs are reset and
then one is activated again. And for steady operation the OffDelay will start when all
related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 113

PulseTime
t
AND
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
Input 1
Output 1
OR
On Delay Time 1 0 AND
OR 0 Off Delay Time 1
Input 16

PulseTime
t
AND
ModeOutput2=Pulsed
Input 17 AND Output 2
OR
On Delay Time 2 0 AND
OR 0 Off Delay Time 2
Input 32

PulseTime
t
AND

ModeOutput3=Pulsed
Output 3
OR
On Delay Time 3 0 AND
OR 0 Off Delay Time 3

ANSI11000290-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000290 V1 EN

Figure 113: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGGIO are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order to
obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

295
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

12.3 Configurable logic blocks

12.3.1 Standard configurable logic blocks

12.3.1.1 Functionality

A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.

• OR function block.

• INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.

• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass
from the input to the output.

• XOR function block.

• LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.

• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay and must be Enabled for the input
signal to activate the output with the appropriate time delay.

• AND function block.

• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it
was, after a power interruption. The SET input has priority if both SET and
RESET inputs are operated simultaneously.

• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it
was, after a power interruption. The RESET input has priority if both SET and
RESET are operated simultaneously.

296
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

12.3.1.2 OR function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
OR Function block OR - -

Functionality
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted.

Function block
OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000288-1-en.vsd
IEC09000288 V1 EN

Figure 114: OR function block

Signals
Table 219: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

Table 220: OR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

297
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

12.3.1.3 Inverter function block INVERTER

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Inverter function block INVERTER - -

Function block
INVERTER
INPUT OUT

IEC09000287-1-en.vsd
IEC09000287 V1 EN

Figure 115: INVERTER function block

Signals
Table 221: INVERTER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 222: INVERTER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

12.3.1.4 PULSETIMER function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
PULSETIMER function block PULSETIMER - -

298
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Functionality
The pulse function can be used, for example for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length.

Function block
PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT

IEC09000291-1-en.vsd
IEC09000291 V1 EN

Figure 116: PULSETIMER function block

Signals
Table 223: PULSETIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 224: PULSETIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
Table 225: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

12.3.1.5 Controllable gate function block GATE

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Controllable gate function block GATE - -

Functionality
The GATE function block is used for controlling if a signal should pass from the input
to the output or not, depending on setting.

299
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

Function block
GATE
INPUT OUT

IEC09000295-1-en.vsd
IEC09000295 V1 EN

Figure 117: GATE function block

Signals
Table 226: GATE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 227: GATE Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
Table 228: GATE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

12.3.1.6 Exclusive OR function block XOR

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Exclusive OR function block XOR - -

Functionality
The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.

300
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Function block
XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000292-1-en.vsd
IEC09000292 V1 EN

Figure 118: XOR function block

Signals
Table 229: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

Table 230: XOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

12.3.1.7 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic loop delay function block LOOPDELAY - -

The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the
output signal one execution cycle.

Function block
LOOPDELAY
INPUT OUT

IEC09000296-1-en.vsd
IEC09000296 V1 EN

Figure 119: LOOPDELAY function block

301
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

Signals
Table 231: LOOPDELAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 232: LOOPDELAY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal, signal is delayed one execution cycle

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

12.3.1.8 Timer function block TIMERSET

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Timer function block TIMERSET - -

Functionality
The function block TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to
the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

en08000289-2-en.vsd
IEC08000289 V1 EN

Figure 120: TIMERSET Status diagram

302
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Function block
TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC09000290-1-en.vsd
IEC09000290 V1 EN

Figure 121: TIMERSET function block

Signals
Table 233: TIMERSET Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 234: TIMERSET Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

Settings
Table 235: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

12.3.1.9 AND function block

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
AND function block AND - -

Functionality
The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs.

303
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to
just use the required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output
OUT has a default value 0 initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function
has been put in the wrong execution order.

Function block
AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000289-1-en.vsd
IEC09000289 V1 EN

Figure 122: AND function block

Signals
Table 236: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

Table 237: AND Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

12.3.1.10 Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY - -

304
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Functionality
The Set-Reset function SRMEMORY is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset
an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a
power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset. For a Set-
Reset flip-flop, SET input has higher priority over RESET input.

Table 238: Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRMEMORY) function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
0 0 0 1

Function block
SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000293-1-en.vsd
IEC09000293 V1 EN

Figure 123: SRMEMORY function block

Signals
Table 239: SRMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 240: SRMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

305
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

Settings
Table 241: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

12.3.1.11 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY - -

Functionality
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if
the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be
reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.

Table 242: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

Function block
RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN

Figure 124: RSMEMORY function block

306
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Signals
Table 243: RSMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 244: RSMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
Table 245: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Disabled - - Enabled Operating mode of the memory function
Enabled

12.3.2 Technical data

Table 246: Configurable logic blocks
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or value Accuracy
5 ms 20 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160 - -
OR 60 60 160 - -
XOR 10 10 20 - -
INVERTER 30 30 80 - -
SRMEMORY 10 10 20 - -
RSMEMORY 10 10 20 - -
GATE 10 10 20 - -
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for
90000.000) s 20 ms cycle time
TIMERSET 10 10 20 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 25 ms for
90000.000) s 20 ms cycle time
LOOPDELAY 10 10 20

307
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

12.4 Fixed signals FXDSIGN

12.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

12.4.2 Functionality
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals
that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic.

12.4.3 Function block

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

IEC09000037.vsd
IEC09000037 V1 EN

Figure 125: FXDSIGN function block

12.4.4 Signals
Table 247: FXDSIGN Output signals
Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
Table continues on next page

308
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Name Type Description

STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

12.4.5 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

12.4.6 Operation principle

There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value
• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

12.5 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I

12.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

12.5.2 Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16
binary (logical) signals into an integer.

309
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

12.5.3 Function block

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC09000035-1-en.vsd
IEC09000035 V1 EN

Figure 126: B16I function block

12.5.4 Signals
Table 248: B16I Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

310
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Table 249: B16I Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

12.5.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

12.5.6 Monitored data

Table 250: B16I Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

12.5.7 Operation principle

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16
binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK input will freeze the output at the
last value.

12.6 Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node

representation B16IFCVI

12.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with B16IFCVI - -
logic node representation

12.6.2 Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (B16IFCVI)
is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.

311
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

12.6.3 Function block

B16IFCVI
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC09000624-1-en.vsd
IEC09000624 V1 EN

Figure 127: B16IFCVI function block

12.6.4 Signals
Table 251: B16IFCVI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

312
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Table 252: B16IFCVI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

12.6.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

12.6.6 Monitored data

Table 253: B16IFCVI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

12.6.7 Operation principle

Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (B16IFCVI)
is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK
input will freeze the output at the last value.

12.7 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A

12.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A - -

12.7.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.

313
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

12.7.3 Function block

IB16A
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC09000036-1-en.vsd
IEC09000036 V1 EN

Figure 128: IB16A function block

12.7.4 Signals
Table 254: IB16A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 INP

Table 255: IB16A Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
Table continues on next page

314
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Name Type Description

OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

12.7.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

12.7.6 Operation principle

Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16A function is designed for receiving the integer
input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

12.8 Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation IB16FCVB

12.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with IB16FCVB - -
logic node representation

12.8.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) is
used to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals.

IB16FCVB function can receive remote values over IEC61850 depending on the
operator position input (PSTO).

315
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Logic

12.8.3 Function block

IB16FCVB
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC09000399-1-en.vsd
IEC09000399 V1 EN

Figure 129: IB16FCVB function block

12.8.4 Signals
Table 256: IB16FCVB Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

Table 257: IB16FCVB Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
Table continues on next page

316
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 12
Logic

Name Type Description

OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

12.8.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

12.8.6 Operation principle

Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) is
used to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16FCVB
function can receive an integer from a station computer – for example, over IEC
61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number
can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in ”Off” or ”Local”, then no
change is applied to the outputs.

317
Technical Manual
318
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Section 13 Monitoring

13.1 Measurements

13.1.1 Functionality
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital
for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides
to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control
IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers
(CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value
from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog
measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction
orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual

hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the
impact of noise in the inputs. There are no interconnections regarding any settings or
parameters, neither between functions nor between signals within each function.

Zero clampings are handled by ZeroDb for each signal separately for each of the
functions. For example, the zero clamping of U12 is handled by VLZeroDB in
VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 is handled by ILZeroDb in CMMXU.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:

319
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• V: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
• I: phase current magnitude
• F: power system frequency

The output values are displayed in the local HMI under Main menu/Tests/Function
status/Monitoring/CVMMXN/Outputs

The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical

quantities:

• I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• V: voltages (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage, magnitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware,

(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

• V: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals.
The measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated
quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on
the selected settings.

13.1.2 Measurements CVMMXN

13.1.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN

320
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.1.2.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P* S
V3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
V
V_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE

ANSI10000051-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000051 V1 EN

Figure 130: CVMMXN function block

13.1.2.3 Signals
Table 258: CVMMXN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 259: CVMMXN Output signals

Name Type Description
S REAL Apparent power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent power range
P_INST REAL Active power
P REAL Active power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive power
Q REAL Reactive power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive power range
Table continues on next page

321
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Description

PF REAL Power factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
V REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
V_RANGE INTEGER Calcuated voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

13.1.2.4 Settings
Table 260: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Mode A, B, C - - A, B, C Selection of measured current and voltage
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
PowMagFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Magnitude factor to scale power calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift between
measured I & V
k 0.00 - 1.00 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement
SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
Table continues on next page

322
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
VMin 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
VMax 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
VRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 261: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for
all limits)
Table continues on next page

323
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for
all limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for
all limits)
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for
all limits)
VDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
VZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
VHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
VHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
VLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
VLowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %VB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
VLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for
all limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

324
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for
all limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for
all limits)
VMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of
Vn
VMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30%
of Vn
VMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100%
of Vn
IMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of
In
IMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30%
of In
IMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100%
of In
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of In
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

13.1.2.5 Monitored data

Table 262: CVMMXN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
S REAL - MVA Apparent power magnitude of
deadband value
P REAL - MW Active power magnitude of
deadband value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power magnitude of
deadband value
PF REAL - - Power factor magnitude of
deadband value
Table continues on next page

325
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

V REAL - kV Calculated voltage magnitude
of deadband value
I REAL - A Calculated current magnitude
of deadband value
F REAL - Hz System frequency magnitude
of deadband value

13.1.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU

13.1.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase current measurement CMMXU -
I

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN

13.1.3.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CMMXU
I3P* I_A
IA_RANGE
IA_ANGL
I_B
IB_RANGE
IB_ANGL
I_C
IC_RANGE
IC_ANGL

ANSI08000225-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000225 V1 EN

Figure 131: CMMXU function block

13.1.3.3 Signals
Table 263: CMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL

326
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Table 264: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
I_A REAL IA Amplitude
IA_RANGE INTEGER Phase A current magnitude range
IA_ANGL REAL IA Angle
I_B REAL IB Amplitude
IB_RANGE INTEGER Phase B current magnitude range
IB_ANGL REAL IB Angle
I_C REAL IC Amplitude
IC_RANGE INTEGER Phase C current magnitude range
IC_ANGL REAL IC Angle

13.1.3.4 Settings
Table 265: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
ILDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
ILMax 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
ILRepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
ILAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

Table 266: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ILZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
ILHiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
ILHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
ILLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
ILLowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
ILMin 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
ILLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
Table continues on next page

327
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMagComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of
In
IMagComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30%
of In
IMagComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100%
of In
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of In
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

13.1.3.5 Monitored data

Table 267: CMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I_A REAL - A IA Amplitude
IA_ANGL REAL - deg IA Angle
I_B REAL - A IB Amplitude
IB_ANGL REAL - deg IB Angle
I_C REAL - A IC Amplitude
IC_ANGL REAL - deg IC Angle

13.1.4 Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU

13.1.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -
U

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

13.1.4.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

328
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

VMMXU
V3P* V_AB
VAB_RANG
VAB_ANGL
V_BC
VBC_RANG
VBC_ANGL
V_CA
VCA_RANG
VCA_ANGL

ANSI08000223-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000223 V1 EN

Figure 132: VMMXU function block

13.1.4.3 Signals
Table 268: VMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 269: VMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
V_AB REAL V_AB Amplitude
VAB_RANG INTEGER VAB Magnitude range
VAB_ANGL REAL VAB Angle
V_BC REAL V_BC Amplitude
VBC_RANG INTEGER VBC Magnitude range
VBC_ANGL REAL VBC Angle
V_CA REAL V_CA Amplitude
VCA_RANG INTEGER VCA Amplitude range
VCA_ANGL REAL VCA Angle

329
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.1.4.4 Settings
Table 270: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
VLDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
VLMax 0 - 4000000 V 1 170000 Maximum value
VLRepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
VLAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

Table 271: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VLZeroDB 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
VLHiHilLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 160000 High High limit (physical value)
VLHiLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 150000 High limit (physical value)
VLLowLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 125000 Low limit (physical value)
VLowLowLim 0 - 4000000 V 1 115000 Low Low limit (physical value)
VLMin 0 - 4000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
VLLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 V 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

13.1.4.5 Monitored data

Table 272: VMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
V_AB REAL - kV V_AB Amplitude
VAB_ANGL REAL - deg VAB Angle
V_BC REAL - kV V_BC Amplitude
VBC_ANGL REAL - deg VBC Angle
V_CA REAL - kV V_CA Amplitude
VCA_ANGL REAL - deg VCA Angle

330
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.1.5 Current sequence component measurement CMSQI

13.1.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current sequence component CMSQI -
measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN

13.1.5.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL

IEC08000221-2-en.vsd
IEC08000221 V2 EN

Figure 133: CMSQI function block

13.1.5.3 Signals
Table 273: CMSQI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL

Table 274: CMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Magnitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude
Table continues on next page

331
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Description

I1RANG INTEGER I1Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle
I2 REAL I2 Amplitude
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Magnitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2Angle

13.1.5.4 Settings
Table 275: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disable / Enable
Enabled
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
3I0Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
3I0Max 0 - 500000 A 1 3300 Maximum value
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I1Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
I1Max 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
I2Min 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Minimum value
I2Max 0 - 500000 A 1 1300 Maximum value
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

332
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Table 276: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
3I0HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 3600 High High limit (physical value)
3I0HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 3300 High limit (physical value)
3I0LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
3I0LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
I1HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
I1HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
I1LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
I1LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
I2HiHiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1200 High High limit (physical value)
I2HiLim 0 - 500000 A 1 1100 High limit (physical value)
I2LowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
I2LowLowLim 0 - 500000 A 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)

13.1.5.5 Monitored data

Table 277: CMSQI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2Angle

333
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.1.6 Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI

13.1.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI -
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN

13.1.6.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
VMSQI
V3P* 3V0
3V0RANG
3V0ANGL
V1
V1RANG
V1ANGL
V2
V2RANG
V2ANGL

ANSI08000224-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000224 V1 EN

Figure 134: VMSQI function block

13.1.6.3 Signals
Table 278: VMSQI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 279: VMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3V0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude
3V0RANG INTEGER 3V0 Magnitude range
3V0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle
V1 REAL U1 Amplitude
Table continues on next page

334
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Type Description

V1RANG INTEGER V1 Magnitude range
V1ANGL REAL U1 Angle
V2 REAL U2 Amplitude
V2RANG INTEGER V2 Magnitude range
V2ANGL REAL U2 Angle

13.1.6.4 Settings
Table 280: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
3V0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
3V0Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
3V0Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 318000 Maximum value
3V0RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3V0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3V0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
V1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
V1Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V1Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
V1RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
V2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
V2Min 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V2Max 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
V2RepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
V2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

335
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Table 281: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3V0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
3V0HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 288000 High High limit (physical value)
3V0HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 258000 High limit (physical value)
3V0LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 213000 Low limit (physical value)
3V0LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 198000 Low Low limit (physical value)
V1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
V1HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
V1HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
V1LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
V1LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)
V1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
V2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping
V2HiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
V2HiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
V2LowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
V2LowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)

13.1.6.5 Monitored data

Table 282: VMSQI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3V0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude
3V0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle
V1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude
V1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle
V2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude
V2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle

336
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.1.7 Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU

13.1.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -
U

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

13.1.7.2 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
VNMMXU
V3P* V_A
VA_RANGE
VA_ANGL
V_B
VB_RANGE
VB_ANGL
V_C
VC_RANGE
VC_ANGL

ANSI08000226-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000226 V1 EN

Figure 135: VNMMXU function block

13.1.7.3 Signals
Table 283: VNMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 284: VNMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
V_A REAL V_A Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VA_RANGE INTEGER V_A Amplitude range
VA_ANGL REAL V_A Angle, magnitude of reported value
V_B REAL V_B Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
Table continues on next page

337
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Description

VB_RANGE INTEGER V_B Amplitude range
VB_ANGL REAL V_B Angle, magnitude of reported value
V_C REAL V_C Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VC_RANGE INTEGER V_C Amplitude range
VC_ANGL REAL VC Angle, magnitude of reported value

13.1.7.4 Settings
Table 285: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disbled/Enabled operation
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
VDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
VMax 0 - 2000000 V 1 106000 Maximum value
VRepTyp Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
VLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 V 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
VAngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s

Table 286: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
VHiHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 96000 High High limit (physical value)
VHiLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 86000 High limit (physical value)
VLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 71000 Low limit (physical value)
VLowLowLim 0 - 2000000 V 1 66000 Low Low limit (physical value)
VMin 0 - 2000000 V 1 0 Minimum value

338
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.1.7.5 Monitored data

Table 287: VNMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
V_A REAL - kV V_A Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VA_ANGL REAL - deg V_A Angle, magnitude of
reported value
V_B REAL - kV V_B Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VB_ANGL REAL - deg V_B Angle, magnitude of
reported value
V_C REAL - kV V_C Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VC_ANGL REAL - deg VC Angle, magnitude of
reported value

13.1.8 Operation principle

13.1.8.1 Measurement supervision

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks.
The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED
and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference. The PhaseAngleRef is set in
local HMI under: Configuration/Analog modules/Reference channel service values.

Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA, IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, VAB,
VBC, VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0). Observe that this measurement supervision

339
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXN.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block
by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 136. The monitoring has two
different modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-
high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 136.

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd
IEC05000657 V1 EN

Figure 136: Presentation of operating limits

Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-
high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may
be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get
measurement supervision as binary signals.

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 136.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between
the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.

340
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of
the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following
basic reporting modes are available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Magnitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or
integral dead-band reporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

en05000500.vsd
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

IEC05000500 V1 EN

Figure 137: Periodic reporting

341
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Magnitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is
larger than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the
measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new
measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 138
shows an example with the magnitude dead-band supervision. The picture is
simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time
interval of one execution cycle from each other.

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 DY
DY
Y2 DY
DY
DY
DY
Y1

99000529.vsd

IEC99000529 V1 EN

Figure 138: Magnitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than
defined by the ±ΔY set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set
limit (XDbRepInt), figure 139, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 139 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The

342
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.
This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following
measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
99000530.vsd

IEC99000530 V1 EN

Figure 139: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

13.1.8.2 Measurements CVMMXN

Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase
voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and
calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available
VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting,
which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function.
Available options are summarized in the following table:

343
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
1 A, B, C Used when three
S = VA × I A* + VB × I B* + VC × I C* (
V = VA + VB + VC )/ 3 phase-to-ground
voltages are
I =( I )/3
EQUATION1561 V1 EN

+ IB + IC available
A

EQUATION1562 V1 EN

( )
2 Arone Used when three
S = VAB × I A - VBC × I C
* *
V = VAB + VBC / 2 two phase-to-
phase voltages

I =( I ) are available
(Equation 87)
EQUATION1563 V1 EN

A
+ IC / 2
EQUATION1564 V1 EN (Equation 88)
3 PosSeq Used when only
S = 3 × VPosSeq × I PosSeq
*
V = 3 × VPosSeq symmetrical three
phase power shall
(Equation 89) be measured
EQUATION1565 V1 EN
I = I PosSeq
EQUATION1566 V1 EN (Equation 90)

( )
4 AB Used when only
S = VAB × I A - I B
* *
V = VAB VAB phase-to-
phase voltage is
EQUATION1567 V1 EN (Equation 91) (
I = IA + IB / 2 ) available

EQUATION1568 V1 EN (Equation 92)

( )
5 BC Used when only
S = VBC × I B - I C
* *
V = VBC VBC phase-to-
phase voltage is
EQUATION1569 V1 EN (Equation 93) (
I = I B + IC / 2 ) available

EQUATION1570 V1 EN (Equation 94)

( )
6 CA Used when only
S = VCA × I C - I A
* *
V = VCA VCA phase-to-
phase voltage is
EQUATION1571 V1 EN (Equation 95) (
I = IC + I A / 2 ) available

EQUATION1572 V1 EN (Equation 96)

7 A Used when only
S = 3 × VA × I A
*
V = 3 × VA VA phase-to-
ground voltage is
(Equation 97) available
EQUATION1573 V1 EN
I = IA
EQUATION1574 V1 EN (Equation 98)
Table continues on next page

344
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
8 B Used when only
S = 3 × VB × I B
*
V = 3 × VB VB phase-to-
ground voltage is
(Equation 99) available
I = IB
EQUATION1575 V1 EN

EQUATION1576 V1 EN (Equation 100)

9 C Used when only
S = 3 × VC × I C
*
V = 3 × VC VC phase-to-
ground voltage is
(Equation 101) available
I = IC
EQUATION1577 V1 EN

EQUATION1578 V1 EN (Equation 102)

* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes
that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power
system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P,
Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:

P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN (Equation 103)

Q = Im( S )
EQUATION1404 V1 EN (Equation 104)

S = S = P +Q
2 2

EQUATION1405 V1 EN (Equation 105)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN (Equation 106)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function
are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage
phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind
voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is
leading the voltage phasor.

345
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to
get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by magnitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below
5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 140.

Magnitude
% of In compensation

+10
IMagComp5 Measured
IMagComp30 current

IMagComp100
5 30 100 % of In
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

+10

IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN

Figure 140: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, V, I
and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in

346
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following

recursive formula:

X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
EQUATION1407 V1 EN (Equation 107)

where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, V, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, the magnitude level for current and voltage measurement is forced to zero.
When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the
measured values for power (P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well.
Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in the CVMMXN function,
is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision
(observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see
section "Measurement supervision").

Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by
setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to
multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude
(setting parameter PowMagFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter
PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex
constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for
example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration
it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.

347
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Directionality
CTStartPoint defines if the CTs grounding point is located towards or from the
protected object under observation. If everything is properly set power is always
measured towards protection object.

Busbar

52
IED

P Q

Protected
Object
ANSI05000373_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000373 V2 EN

Figure 141: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they
flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the
power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have
actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements.
This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0
degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained
from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as
an output.

13.1.8.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase

current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function
can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the

348
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5,
30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is
constant and linear in between, see figure 140.

Phase currents (magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude
output has a corresponding supervision level output (Ix_RANGE). The supervision
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

13.1.8.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the

configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) are available on the
outputs and each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(Vxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

13.1.8.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or

voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than
X_RANG, are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate
the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to
corresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs
(voltage and current, magnitude and angle). Each magnitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in
the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

13.1.9 Technical data

Table 288: CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU
Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (0.1-1.5) ×Vn ± 0.5% of Vn at V£Vn
± 0.5% of V at V > Vn

Connected current (0.2-4.0) × In ± 0.5% of In at I £ In

± 0.5% of I at I > In

Active power, P 0.1 x Vn< V < 1.5 x Vn ± 1.0% of Sn at S ≤ Sn

0.2 x In < I < 4.0 x In ± 1.0% of S at S > Sn

Table continues on next page

349
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reactive power, Q 0.1 x Vn< V < 1.5 x Vn ± 1.0% of Sn at S ≤ Sn
0.2 x In < I < 4.0 x In ± 1.0% of S at S > Sn

Apparent power, S 0.1 x Vn < V < 1.5 x Vn ± 1.0% of Sn at S ≤ Sn

0.2 x In< I < 4.0 x In ± 1.0% of S at S > Sn

Apparent power, S Three phase cos phi = 1 ± 0.5% of S at S > Sn

settings ± 0.5% of Sn at S ≤ Sn

Power factor, cos (φ) 0.1 x Vn < V < 1.5 x Vn < 0.02
0.2 x In< I < 4.0 x In

13.2 Event Counter CNTGGIO

13.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Event counter CNTGGIO -
S00946 V1 EN

13.2.2 Functionality
Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counters which are used for storing the number of
times each counter input has been activated.

13.2.3 Function block

CNTGGIO
BLOCK VALUE1
COUNTER1 VALUE2
COUNTER2 VALUE3
COUNTER3 VALUE4
COUNTER4 VALUE5
COUNTER5 VALUE6
COUNTER6
RESET

IEC09000090_1_en.vsd
IEC09000090 V1 EN

Figure 142: CNTGGIO function block

350
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.2.4 Signals
Table 289: CNTGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
COUNTER1 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 1
COUNTER2 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 2
COUNTER3 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 3
COUNTER4 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 4
COUNTER5 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 5
COUNTER6 BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter 6
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 290: CNTGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE1 INTEGER Output of counter 1
VALUE2 INTEGER Output of counter 2
VALUE3 INTEGER Output of counter 3
VALUE4 INTEGER Output of counter 4
VALUE5 INTEGER Output of counter 5
VALUE6 INTEGER Output of counter 6

13.2.5 Settings
Table 291: CNTGGIO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled

13.2.6 Monitored data

Table 292: CNTGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE1 INTEGER - - Output of counter 1
VALUE2 INTEGER - - Output of counter 2
VALUE3 INTEGER - - Output of counter 3
Table continues on next page

351
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

VALUE4 INTEGER - - Output of counter 4
VALUE5 INTEGER - - Output of counter 5
VALUE6 INTEGER - - Output of counter 6

13.2.7 Operation principle

Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counter inputs. CNTGGIO stores how many times
each of the inputs has been activated. The counter memory for each of the six inputs is
updated, giving the total number of times the input has been activated, as soon as an
input is activated. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses per second. The
maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the counter will stop at 10
000 and no restart will take place.

To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism
for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This
however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new
value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before
auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory
will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked. The input can for example, be used for blocking the counters at
testing.The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six
counters are set to 0.

All inputs are configured via PCM600.

13.2.7.1 Reporting

The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI.

Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input.

Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from a IEC 61850
client. The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI
graphical display.

13.2.8 Technical data

Table 293: CNTGGIO technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-10000 -
Max. count up speed 10 pulses/s -

352
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.3 Disturbance report

13.3.1 Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a,
maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

• Sequential of events
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, initiating conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AxRADR or BxRBDR

function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start
of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a FIFO-buffer.
The local HMI is used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report
files may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling
tool.

13.3.2 Disturbance report DRPRDRE

13.3.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -

353
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.3.2.2 Function block

DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

IEC09000346-1-en.vsd
IEC09000346 V1 EN

Figure 143: DRPRDRE function block

13.3.2.3 Signals
Table 294: DRPRDRE Output signals
Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

13.3.2.4 Settings
Table 295: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 3.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 8.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Disabled - - Disabled Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
Enabled
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference channel
OpModeTest Disabled - - Disabled Operation mode during test mode
Enabled

354
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.3.2.5 Monitored data

Table 296: DRPRDRE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
UnTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
UnTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
OvTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
UnTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
OvTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
UnTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
OvTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
UnTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
OvTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
UnTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
OvTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
Table continues on next page

355
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
OvTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
UnTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
OvTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
UnTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
UnTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
OvTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
UnTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
OvTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
UnTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
OvTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
UnTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
OvTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
UnTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
OvTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
Table continues on next page

356
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
OvTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
UnTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
OvTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
UnTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
OvTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
UnTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
OvTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
UnTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
OvTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
UnTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
OvTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
UnTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
OvTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
UnTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
OvTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
Table continues on next page

357
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
OvTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
UnTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
OvTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
UnTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
OvTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
UnTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
OvTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
UnTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
OvTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

13.3.2.6 Measured values

Table 297: DRPRDRE Measured values
Name Type Default Description
ManTrig BOOLEAN 0 Manual trig of disturbance report
ClearDist BOOLEAN 0 Clear all disturbances
ClearProcessEv BOOLEAN 0 Clear all process events

358
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.3.3 Analog input signals AxRADR

13.3.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Analog input signals A1RADR - -
Analog input signals A2RADR - -
Analog input signals A3RADR - -

13.3.3.2 Function block

A1RADR
^GRPINPUT1
^GRPINPUT2
^GRPINPUT3
^GRPINPUT4
^GRPINPUT5
^GRPINPUT6
^GRPINPUT7
^GRPINPUT8
^GRPINPUT9
^GRPINPUT10

IEC09000348-1-en.vsd
IEC09000348 V1 EN

Figure 144: A1RADR function block, analog inputs, example for A1RADR,
A2RADR and A3RADR

13.3.3.3 Signals

A1RADR - A3RADR Input signals

Tables for input signals for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for
GRPINPUT number.

• A1RADR, GRPINPUT1 - GRPINPUT10

• A2RADR, GRPINPUT11 - GRPINPUT20
• A3RADR, GRPINPUT21 - GRPINPUT30

359
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Table 298: A1RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2 GROUP - Group signal for input 2
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3 GROUP - Group signal for input 3
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4 GROUP - Group signal for input 4
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5 GROUP - Group signal for input 5
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6 GROUP - Group signal for input 6
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7 GROUP - Group signal for input 7
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8 GROUP - Group signal for input 8
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9 GROUP - Group signal for input 9
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10 GROUP - Group signal for input 10
SIGNAL

13.3.3.4 Settings

A1RADR - A3RADR Settings

Setting tables for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for channel
numbers.

• A1RADR, channel01 - channel10

• A2RADR, channel11 - channel20
• A3RADR, channel21 - channel30

Table 299: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation01 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation02 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation03 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation04 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Table continues on next page

360
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operation05 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation06 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation07 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation08 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation09 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
Operation10 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/Off
Enabled
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 1
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 1
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 2
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 2
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 3
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 3
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 4
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 4
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 5
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 5
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 6
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 6
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 7
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 7
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 8
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 8
(IEC-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

361
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 9
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 9
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 10
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel10
(IEC-60870-5-103)

Table 300: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 1
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp01 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 1
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in % of
signal
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 2
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 2 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp02 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 2
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in % of
signal
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 3
UnderTrigOp03 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 3
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 3 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp03 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 3
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in % of
signal
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 4
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 4 in %
of signal
Table continues on next page

362
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp04 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 4
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 4 in % of
signal
NomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 5
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 5 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp05 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 5
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in % of
signal
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 6
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 6 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp06 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 6
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 6 in % of
signal
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 7
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 7 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp07 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 7
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 7 in % of
signal
NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 8
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 8 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp08 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 8
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 8 in % of
signal
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 9
Enabled (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

363
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 9 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp09 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 9
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 9 in % of
signal
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 10
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp10 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 10
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10 in %
of signal

13.3.4 Analog input signals A4RADR

13.3.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Analog input signals A4RADR - -

13.3.4.2 Function block

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40

IEC09000350-1-en.vsd
IEC09000350 V1 EN

Figure 145: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

Channels 31-40 are not shown in LHMI. They are used for internally
calculated analog signals.

364
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.3.4.3 Signals
Table 301: A4RADR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32
INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33
INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34
INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35
INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36
INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37
INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38
INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39
INPUT40 REAL 0 Analog channel 40

13.3.4.4 Settings
Table 302: A4RADR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation31 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation32 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation33 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation34 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation35 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation36 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation37 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation38 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation39 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
Operation40 Disabled - - Disabled Operation On/off
Enabled
FunType31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 31
(IEC-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

365
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 31
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 32
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 32
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 33
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 33
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 34
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 34
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 35
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 35
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 36
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 36
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 37
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 37
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 38
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 38
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 39
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 39
(IEC-60870-5-103)
FunType40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 40
(IEC-60870-5-103)
InfNo40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel40
(IEC-60870-5-103)

366
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Table 303: A4RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue31 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 31
UnderTrigOp31 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 31
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 31 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp31 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 31
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe31 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 31 in %
of signal
NomValue32 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 32
UnderTrigOp32 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 32
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 32 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp32 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 32
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe32 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 32 in %
of signal
NomValue33 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 33
UnderTrigOp33 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 33
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 33 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp33 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 33
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 33 in %
of signal
NomValue34 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 34
UnderTrigOp34 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 34
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 34 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp34 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 34
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe34 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 34 in %
of signal
NomValue35 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 35
UnderTrigOp35 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 35
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 35 in %
of signal
Table continues on next page

367
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp35 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 35
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe35 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 35 in %
of signal
NomValue36 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 36
UnderTrigOp36 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 36
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe36 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 36 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp36 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 36
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe36 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 36 in %
of signal
NomValue37 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 37
UnderTrigOp37 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 37
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 37 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp37 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 37
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe37 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 37 in %
of signal
NomValue38 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 38
UnderTrigOp38 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 38
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 38 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp38 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 38
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe38 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 38 in %
of signal
NomValue39 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 39
UnderTrigOp39 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 39
Enabled (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 39 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp39 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 39
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe39 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 39 in %
of signal
NomValue40 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 40
UnderTrigOp40 Disabled - - Disabled Use under level trigger for analog channel 40
Enabled (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

368
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigLe40 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 40 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp40 Disabled - - Disabled Use over level trigger for analog channel 40
Enabled (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe40 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 40 in %
of signal

13.3.5 Binary input signals BxRBDR

13.3.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Binary input signals B1RBDR - -
Binary input signals B2RBDR - -
Binary input signals B3RBDR - -
Binary input signals B4RBDR - -
Binary input signals B5RBDR - -
Binary input signals B6RBDR - -

13.3.5.2 Function block

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC09000352-1-en.vsd
IEC09000352 V1 EN

Figure 146: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B6RBDR

369
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.3.5.3 Signals

B1RBDR - B6RBDR Input signals

Tables for input signals for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for INPUT and
description number.

• B1RBDR, INPUT1 - INPUT16

• B2RBDR, INPUT17 - INPUT32
• B3RBDR, INPUT33 - INPUT48
• B4RBDR, INPUT49 - INPUT64
• B5RBDR, INPUT65 - INPUT80
• B6RBDR, INPUT81 - INPUT96

Table 304: B1RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16

13.3.5.4 Settings

B1RBDR - B6RBDR Settings

Setting tables for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for binary channel and
description numbers.

• B1RBDR, channel1 - channel16

• B2RBDR, channel17 - channel32
• B3RBDR, channel33 - channel48

370
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

• B4RBDR, channel49 - channel64

• B5RBDR, channel65 - channel80
• B6RBDR, channel81 - channel96

Table 305: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR01 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED01 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR02 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED02 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR03 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED03 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR04 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED04 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR05 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED05 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR06 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED06 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR07 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED07 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Table continues on next page

371
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR08 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED08 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR09 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED09 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 9
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR10 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED10 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 10
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR11 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED11 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR12 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED12 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR13 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED13 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR14 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED14 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
TrigDR15 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED15 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Table continues on next page

372
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR16 Disabled - - Disabled Trigger operation On/Off
Enabled
SetLED16 Disabled - - Disabled Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 10
(IEC -60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

373
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FunType11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 11
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 12
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 13
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 14
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 15
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 16
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 306: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 2
Show
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 3
Show
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 4
Show
Table continues on next page

374
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 5
Show
TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 6
IndicationMa06 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 6
Show
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 7
IndicationMa07 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 7
Show
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 8
IndicationMa08 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 8
Show
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 9
IndicationMa09 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 9
Show
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 10
IndicationMa10 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 10
Show
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 11
IndicationMa11 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 11
Show
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 12
IndicationMa12 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 12
Show
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 13
IndicationMa13 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 13
Show
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 14
IndicationMa14 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 14
Show
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 15
Table continues on next page

375
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa15 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 15
Show
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope
Trig on 1 for binary input 16
IndicationMa16 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 16
Show

13.3.6 Operation principle

Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.

The functions included in the disturbance report are:

• Sequential of events
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder

Figure 147 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Sequential of events , Event recorder and Indications uses information
from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder uses analog
information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder
DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.

376
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

A1-4RADR Disturbance Report

A4RADR DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec

B1-6RBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals B6RBDR

Sequential of
events
Event recorder

Indications

ANSI09000337-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000337 V1 EN

Figure 147: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each
with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The sequential of events
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording
time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power.
Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist. Trip Event Disturbance Event list

Indications
information values recordings recording (SOE)

en05000161_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000161 V1 EN

Figure 148: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one.

377
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling
frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. In a 60 Hz
system it is possible to record 80 where the maximum recording time is 3.4 seconds.
The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (Sequential of
events, Event recorder, Indications and Trip value recorder).

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

13.3.6.1 Disturbance information

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or
MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely
via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

13.3.6.2 Indications

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged), see Indication section for detailed information.

13.3.6.3 Event recorder

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see Event recorder section for detailed information.

13.3.6.4 Sequential of events

The sequetial of events may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see Sequential of events section for detailed information.

378
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.3.6.5 Trip value recorder

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and
during the fault, see Trip value recorder section for detailed information.

13.3.6.6 Disturbance recorder

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the
fault, see Disturbance recorder section for detailed information.

13.3.6.7 Time tagging

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report

13.3.6.8 Recording times

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a

settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder, event recorder and indication function register disturbance data
and events during tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

379
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Trig point
TimeLimit

PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

1 2 3

en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN

Figure 149: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit
time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a
recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the
setting TimeLimit to set this time.

13.3.6.9 Analog signals

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for
external analog signals from analog input modules via preprocessing function blocks
(SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to
internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (phase
differential currents, bias currents and so on).

380
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

SMAI A1RADR
GRPNAME AI3P A2RADR
AI1NAME AI1 GRPINPUT1 A3RADR
External analog
AI2NAME AI2 GRPINPUT2
signals
AI3NAME AI3 GRPINPUT3
AI4NAME AI4 GRPINPUT4
AIN GRPINPUT5
GRPINPUT6
...

A4RADR

INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analog signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36

...

INPUT40

en05000653-2.vsd
IEC05000653 V2 EN

Figure 150: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to
the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the
base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new
updated sample is available.

Application configuration tool (ACT) is used for analog configuration of the

Disturbance report.

The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual
output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the
corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the
SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = Enabled means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and

381
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

triggers even if operation is set to Disabled. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

If Operation = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in

graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported.
The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If Operation = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

13.3.6.10 Binary signals

Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The

signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is
selected to be recorded when:

• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation
= Operation—>TrigDR =Disabled). A binary signal can be selected to activate the
yellow (PICKUP) and red (TRIP) LED on the local HMI (SetLED = Disabled/Pickup/
Trip/Pickup and Trip).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, sequential of events and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used
as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI
IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

13.3.6.11 Trigger signals

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the sequential of
events, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a
complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is
fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the
importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

382
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via
station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is
generated. This feature is especially useful for testing.

Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in
the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found,
the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value
is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is
indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent
trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure
is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this initiation is typically in
the range of one cycle, 16 2/3 ms for a 60 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

13.3.6.12 Post Retrigger

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However,
under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault
recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig

= Enabled) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start
and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Disabled), a new recording will
not start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a
new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding
recording a new complete recording will be started.

383
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

13.3.7 Technical data

Table 307: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Current recording - ± 1,0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
± 1,0% of I at I > Ir
Voltage recording - ± 1,0% of Vn at V≤ Vn
± 1,0% of Vat V> Vn

Pre-fault time (0.05–3.00) s -

Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–8.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See time synchronization
technical data
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip 30 -
Value recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a 96 -
disturbance report
Maximum number of events in the Event 150 -
recording per recording
Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out -
Sequence of events
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s 340 seconds (100 recordings) -
recording time and maximum number of at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
channels, typical value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

13.4 Indications

13.4.1 Functionality
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/
or in the secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals that

384
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short
perspective to get information via the local HMI in a straightforward way.

There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display
status information about the IED and the Disturbance report function (triggered).

The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance report function that have changed status during a disturbance.

13.4.2 Function block

The Indications function has no function block of it’s own.

13.4.3 Signals

13.4.3.1 Input signals

The Indications function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report
function.

13.4.4 Operation principle

The LED indications display this information:

Green LED:

Steady light In Service

Flashing light Internal fail
Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:

Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.

Red LED:

Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.

Indication list:

The possible indication signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance
report function and disturbance recorder.

385
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording
period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic
one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of
indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of
indications the:

• the signal must be connected to binary input BxRBDR function block

• the DRPRDRE parameter Operation must be set Enabled
• the DRPRDRE must be trigged (binary or analog)
• the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.

Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when setting the
binary inputs.

The name of the binary signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-defined
name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in disturbance
recorder function, indications and event recorder function.

13.4.5 Technical data

Table 308: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented 96
for single disturbance
Maximum number of recorded disturbances 100

13.5 Event recorder

13.5.1 Functionality
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during
disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (for
example corrective actions) and in the long term (for example functional analysis).

The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.

The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.

The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record

(Comtrade file).

386
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.5.2 Function block

The Event recorder has no function block of it’s own.

13.5.3 Signals

13.5.3.1 Input signals

The Event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
report function.

13.5.4 Operation principle

When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event
recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be
generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal
signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels
are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total
recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report
flash memory at the end of each recording.

In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = Enabled and a new trig signal
appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-
defined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function , indications and event recorder function.

The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and managed
via the local HMI or PCM600.

Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user is accessing
the IED simultaneously.

387
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.5.5 Technical data

Table 309: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time
synchronizing

13.6 Sequential of events

13.6.1 Functionality
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview
perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.

The sequential of events logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
report function. The list may contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a FIFO-
buffer.

13.6.2 Function block

The Sequential of events has no function block of it’s own.

13.6.3 Signals

13.6.3.1 Input signals

The Sequential of events logs the same binary input signals as configured for the
Disturbance report function.

13.6.4 Operation principle

When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the
sequential of events function stores input name, status and time in the sequential of
events in chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal
logic signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten
when a new event arrives.

388
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the
local HMI.

The sequential of events function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder
function, which is only active during a disturbance, and each event record is an integral
part of its associated DR.

The name of the binary signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined
name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance
recorder function , indications and the event recorder function .

The sequential of events is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report
information.

13.6.5 Technical data

Table 310: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time
synchronizing

13.7 Trip value recorder

13.7.1 Functionality
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for
the disturbance evaluation.

The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals
connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle
before and during the fault for each analog input signal.

The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.

The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).

13.7.2 Function block

The Trip value recorder has no function block of it’s own.

389
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.7.3 Signals

13.7.3.1 Input signals

The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR to
A3RADR (not A4RADR).

13.7.4 Operation principle

Trip value recorder calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault magnitudes as well
as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter
ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference.

When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception
is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The
channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number.

When a fault interception point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values
of the complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The
estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using
the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after
the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the
signals.

If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used
as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one
cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault
and fault values.

The name of the analog signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the user-
defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the
Disturbance recorder function .

The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and
managed in PCM600 or via the local HMI.

13.7.5 Technical data

Table 311: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 30
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

390
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.8 Disturbance recorder

13.8.1 Functionality
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information
about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior
and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded
information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (for example
corrective actions) and long perspective (for example functional analysis).

The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected analog- and binary
signals connected to the Disturbance report function (maximum 40 analog and 96
binary signals). The binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder
function.

The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation
of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions.
Up to three seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in the disturbance file.

The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the IED
and the local HMI is used to view the list of recordings.

13.8.2 Function block

The Disturbance recorder has no function block of it’s own.

13.8.3 Signals
See Disturbance report for input and output signals.

13.8.4 Settings
See Disturbance report for settings.

13.8.5 Operation principle

Disturbance recording is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The
binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals
generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input
channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM) through the Signal Matrix Analog
Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally
derived analog signals.

391
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic
buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will
continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this
buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time.

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the
data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as
the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault
time and it can be set in the disturbance report.

The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,
intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten. Up to the last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.

The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance
recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog
inputs (over-/underlevel trig).

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for
all functions within the disturbance report functionality.

13.8.5.1 Memory and storage

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.

This post-recording processing comprises:

• Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
• Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance handling tool (part of PCM 600)
• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.

The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided
into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).

392
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the
disturbance, that is, information from the Disturbance report sub-functions. The
Disturbance handling tool use this information and present the recording in a user-
friendly way.

General:

• Station name, object name and unit name

• Date and time for the trig of the disturbance
• Record number
• Sampling rate
• Time synchronization source
• Recording times
• Activated trig signal
• Active setting group

Analog:

• Signal names for selected analog channels

• Information e.g. trig on analog inputs
• Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating
• Over- or Undertrig: level and operation
• Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig
• CT direction

Binary:

• Signal names
• Status of binary input signals

The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret

the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency,
channel info etc.

The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for
each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number
and time stamp for each set of samples.

393
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.8.6 Technical data

Table 312: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40
Maximum number of binary inputs 96
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number 340 seconds (100
of channels, typical value) recordings) at 50 Hz
280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz

13.9 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions

SPGGIO

13.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O SPGGIO - -
functions

13.9.2 Functionality
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) is used to send one single
logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

13.9.3 Function block

SPGGIO
BLOCK
^IN

IEC09000237_en_1.vsd
IEC09000237 V1 EN

Figure 151: SPGGIO function block

394
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.9.4 Signals
Table 313: SPGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

13.9.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

13.9.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions
(SPGGIO) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system
that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which
function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

13.10 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16

inputs SP16GGIO

13.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O SP16GGIO - -
functions 16 inputs

13.10.2 Functionality
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs (SP16GGIO) function is
used to send up to 16 logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation.

395
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.10.3 Function block

SP16GGIO
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16

IEC09000238_en_1.vsd
IEC09000238 V1 EN

Figure 152: SP16GGIO function block

13.10.4 Signals
Table 314: SP16GGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status

396
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.10.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

13.10.6 MonitoredData
Table 315: SP16GGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
OUT2 GROUP - - Output 2 status
SIGNAL
OUT3 GROUP - - Output 3 status
SIGNAL
OUT4 GROUP - - Output 4 status
SIGNAL
OUT5 GROUP - - Output 5 status
SIGNAL
OUT6 GROUP - - Output 6 status
SIGNAL
OUT7 GROUP - - Output 7 status
SIGNAL
OUT8 GROUP - - Output 8 status
SIGNAL
OUT9 GROUP - - Output 9 status
SIGNAL
OUT10 GROUP - - Output 10 status
SIGNAL
OUT11 GROUP - - Output 11 status
SIGNAL
OUT12 GROUP - - Output 12 status
SIGNAL
OUT13 GROUP - - Output 13 status
SIGNAL
OUT14 GROUP - - Output 14 status
SIGNAL
OUT15 GROUP - - Output 15 status
SIGNAL
OUT16 GROUP - - Output 16 status
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR gate
SIGNAL for input 1 to 16

397
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.10.7 Operation principle

Upon receiving signals at its inputs, IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
16 inputs (SP16GGIO) function will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
equipment or system that requests this signals. To be able to get the signal, one must
use other tools, described in the Engineering manual and define which function block
in which equipment or system should receive this information.

There are also 16 output signals that show the input status for each input as well as an
OR type output combined for all 16 input signals. These output signals are handled in
PST.

13.11 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions

MVGGIO

13.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IEC61850 generic communication I/O MVGGIO - -
functions

13.11.2 Functionality
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send
the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

13.11.3 Function block

MVGGIO
BLOCK ^VALUE
^IN RANGE

IEC09000239-2-en.vsd

398
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.11.4 Signals
Table 316: MVGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value

Table 317: MVGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

13.11.5 Settings
Table 318: MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common for
all limits)

399
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.11.6 Monitored data

Table 319: MVGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low

13.11.7 Operation principle

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O
functions (MVGGIO) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as
output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other
IEC 61850 clients in the substation.

13.12 Measured value expander block MVEXP

13.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measured value expander block MVEXP - -

13.12.2 Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high
limit. The measure value expander block has been introduced to enable translating the
integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low
limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output
signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

400
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.12.3 Function block

MVEXP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

IEC09000215-1-en.vsd
IEC09000215 V1 EN

Figure 153: MVEXP function block

13.12.4 Signals

Table 320: MVEXP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

Table 321: MVEXP Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

13.12.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

13.12.6 Operation principle

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGGIO). The
function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according
to table 322.

401
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Table 322: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised below low-low between low‐ between low between high- above high-high
value is: limit low and low and high limit high and high limit
Output: limit limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

13.13 Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT

13.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Station battery supervision function SPVNZBAT U<> -

13.13.2 Function block

SPVNZBAT
V_BATT AL_VLOW
BLOCK AL_VHI
PU_VLOW
PU_VHI

ANSI12000026-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000026 V1 EN

Figure 154: Function block

13.13.3 Functionality
The station battery supervision function SPVNZBAT is used for monitoring battery
terminal voltage.

SPVNZBAT activates the start and alarm outputs when the battery terminal voltage
exceeds the set upper limit or drops below the set lower limit. A time delay for the
overvoltage and undervoltage alarms can be set according to definite time characteristics.

402
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

In the definite time (DT) mode, SPVNZBAT operates after a predefined operate time
and resets when the battery undervoltage or overvoltage condition disappears after
reset time.

13.13.4 Signals
Table 323: SPVNZBAT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
V_BATT REAL 0.00 Battery terminal voltage that has to be supervised
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the output signals of the function

Table 324: SPVNZBAT Output signals

Name Type Description
AL_VLOW BOOLEAN Alarm when voltage has been below low limit for a set
time
AL_VHI BOOLEAN Alarm when voltage has exceeded high limit for a set
time
PU_VLOW BOOLEAN Pick up signal when battery voltage drops below lower
limit
PU_VHI BOOLEAN Pick up signal when battery voltage exceeds upper limit

13.13.5 Settings
Table 325: SPVNZBAT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
RtdBattVolt 20.00 - 250.00 V 1.00 110.00 Battery rated voltage
BattVoltLowLim 60 - 140 %Vbat 1 70 Lower limit for the battery terminal voltage
BattVoltHiLim 60 - 140 %Vbat 1 120 Upper limit for the battery terminal voltage
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay time for alarm
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset of alarm

403
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.13.6 Measured values

Table 326: SPVNZBAT Measured values
Name Type Default Description
V_BATT REAL 0.00 Battery terminal voltage that has to be supervised
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the output signals of the function

13.13.7 Monitored Data

Table 327: SPVNZBAT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BATTVOLT REAL - kV Service value of the battery
terminal voltage

13.13.8 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable.

The function execution requires that at least one of the function outputs
is connected in configuration.

The operation of the station battery supervision function can be described by using a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

Comparator
V<BattVoltLowLim PU_VLOW
0 0-tDelay
V_BATT AL_VLOW
0-tReset 0
Comparator
U<BattVoltHiLim PU_VHI

0 0-tDelay
AL_VHI
0-tReset 0
ANSI11000292-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000292 V1 EN

Figure 155: Functional module diagram

The battery rated voltage is set with the RtdBattVolt setting. The value of the
BattVoltLowLim and BattVoltHiLim settings are given in relative per unit to the
RtdBattVolt setting.

404
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

It is possible to block the function outputs by the BLOCK input.

Low level detector

The level detector compares the battery voltage V_BATT with the set value of the
BattVoltLowLim setting. If the value of the V_BATT input drops below the set value of
the BattVoltLowLim setting, the pickup signal PU_VLOW is activated.

The measured voltage between the battery terminals V_BATT is available through the
Monitored data view.

High level detector

The level detector compares the battery voltage V_BATT with the set value of the
BattVoltHiLim setting. If the value of the V_BATT input exceeds the set value of the
BattVoltHiLim setting, the pickup signal PU_VHI is activated.

Time delay
When the operate timer has reached the value set by the tDelay setting, the AL_VLOW
and AL_VHI outputs are activated. If the voltage returns to the normal value before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by
tReset, the operate timer resets and the PU_VLOW and AL_VHI outputs are deactivated.

13.13.9 Technical data

Table 328: SPVNZBAT Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Lower limit for the battery (60-140) % of Vbat ± 1.0% of set battery voltage
terminal voltage
Reset ratio, lower limit <105 % -
Upper limit for the battery (60-140) % of Vbat ± 1.0% of set battery voltage
terminal voltage
Reset ratio, upper limit >95 % -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms

13.14 Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63)

13.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG - 63

405
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.14.2 Functionality
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63) is used for monitoring the circuit
breaker condition. Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker
is used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based
on received information.

13.14.3 Function block

SSIMG (63)
BLOCK PRESSURE
BLK_ALM PRES_ALM
PRESSURE PRES_LO
TEMP TEMP
PRES_ALM TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

ANSI09000129-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000129 V1 EN

Figure 156: SSIMG (63) function block

13.14.4 Signals

Inputs PRESSURE and TEMP together with settings PressAlmLimit,

PressLOLimit, TempAlarmLimit and TempLOLimit are not supported in
this release of 650 series.

13.14.4.1 SSIMG InputSignals

Table 329: Input signals for the function block SSIMG (GM01-)
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
BLK_ALM Block all the alarms
PRESSURE Pressure input from CB
TEMP Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
PRES_ALM Pressure alarm signal
PRES_LO Pressure lockout signal
SET_P_LO Set pressure lockout
SET_T_LO Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO Reset pressure and temperature lockout

406
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.14.4.2 SSIMG OutputSignals

Table 330: Output signals for the function block SSIMG (GM01-)
Signal Description
PRESSURE Pressure service value
PRES_ALM Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO Pressure below lockout level
TEMP Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO Temperature above lockout level

13.14.5 Settings

13.14.5.1 SSIMG Settings

Table 331: Basic parameter group settings for the function SSIMG (GM01-)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
PressAlmLimit 0.00 - 25.00 0.01 5.00 - Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit 0.00 - 25.00 0.01 3.00 - Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 0.01 30.00 - Temperature alarm level
setting of the medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 0.01 30.00 - Temperature lockout
level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for pressure
alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for pressure
lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for
temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for temperture
lockout
tResetPressAlm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Reset time delay for
pressure alarm
tResetPressLO 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Reset time delay for
pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Reset time delay for
temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Reset time delay for
temperture alarm

407
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.14.6 Operation principle

Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63) is used to monitor gas pressure in the
circuit breaker. Two binary output signals are used from the circuit breaker to initiate
alarm signals, pressure below alarm level and pressure below lockout level. If the input
signal PRES_ALM is high, which indicate that the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is
below alarm level, the function initiates output signal PRES_ALM, pressure below
alarm level, after a set time delay and indicate that maintenance of the circuit breaker is
required. Similarly, if the input signal PRES_LO is high, which indicate gas pressure
in the circuit breaker is below lockout level, the function initiates output signal
PRES_LO, after a time delay. The two time delay settings, tPressureAlarm and
tPressureLO, are included in order not to initiate any alarm for short sudden changes in
the gas pressure. If the gas pressure in the circuit breaker goes below the levels for
more than the set time delays the corresponding signals, PRES_ALM, pressure below
alarm level and PRES_LO, pressure below lockout level alarm will be obtained.

The input signal BLK_ALM is used to block the two alarms and the input signal
BLOCK to block both alarms and the function.

13.14.7 Technical data

Table 332: SSIMG (63) Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pressure alarm 0.00-25.00 -
Pressure lockout 0.00-25.00 -
Temperature alarm -40.00-200.00 -
Temperature lockout -40.00-200.00 -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms

13.15 Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71)

13.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML - 71

408
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.15.2 Functionality
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71) is used for monitoring the circuit
breaker condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is
used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based
on received information.

13.15.3 Function block

SSIML (71)
BLOCK LEVEL
BLK_ALM LVL_ALM
LEVEL LVL_LO
TEMP TEMP
LVL_ALM TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

ANSI09000128-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000128 V1 EN

Figure 157: SSIML (71) function block

13.15.4 Signals

Inputs LEVEL and TEMP together with settings LevelAlmLimit,

LevelLOLimit, TempAlarmLimit and TempLOLimit are not supported in
this release of 650 series.

13.15.4.1 SSIML InputSignals

Table 333: Input signals for the function block SSIML (LM1-)
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
BLK_ALM Block all the alarms
LEVEL Level input from CB
TEMP Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
LVL_ALM Level alarm signal
LEVEL_LO Level lockout signal
SET_L_LO Set level lockout
SET_T_LO Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO Reset level and temperature lockout

409
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.15.4.2 SSIML OutputSignals

Table 334: Output signals for the function block SSIML (LM1-)
Signal Description
LEVEL Level service value
LVL_ALM Level below alarm level
LVL_LO Level below lockout level
TEMP Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO Temperature above lockout level

13.15.5 Settings

13.15.5.1 SSIML Settings

Table 335: Basic parameter group settings for the function SSIML (LM1-)
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
LevelAlmLimit 0.00 - 25.00 0.01 5.00 - Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 0.00 - 25.00 0.01 3.00 - Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 0.01 30.00 - Temperature alarm level
setting of the medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 0.01 30.00 - Temperature lockout
level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for level
lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for
temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for temperture
lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Reset time delay for level
alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Reset time delay for level
lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Reset time delay for
temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Reset time delay for
temperture alarm

410
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.15.6 Operation principle

Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71) is used to monitor oil level in the
circuit breaker. Two binary output signals are used from the circuit breaker to initiate
alarm signals, level below alarm level and level below lockout level. If the input signal
LVL_ALM is high, which indicate that the oil level in the circuit breaker is below
alarm level, the output signal LVL_ALM, level below alarm level, will be initiated
after a set time delay and indicate that maintenance of the circuit breaker is required.
Similarly, if the input signal LVL_LO is high, which indicate oil level in the circuit
breaker is below lockout level, the output signal LVL_LO, will be initiated after a time
delay. The two time delay settings, tLevelAlarm and tLevelLockOut, are included in
order not to initiate any alarm for short sudden changes in the oil level. If the oil level
in the circuit breaker goes below the levels for more than the set time delays the
corresponding signals, LVL_ALM, level below alarm level and LVL_LO, level below
lockout level alarm will be obtained.

The input signal BLK_ALM is used to block the two alarms and the input signal
BLOCK to block both alarms and the function.

13.15.7 Technical data

Table 336: SSIML(71) Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm, oil level 0.00-25.00 -
Oil level lockout 0.00-25.00 -
Temperature alarm -40.00-200.00 -
Temperature lockout -40.00-200.00 -
Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 110 ms

13.16 Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR

13.16.1 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR - -

411
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.16.2 Functionality
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different
parameters of the circuit breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number
of operations has reached a predefined value. For proper functioning of the circuit
breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge
indication, breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and accumulated
energy. The energy is calculated from the measured input currents as a sum of I^2 t
values. Alarms are generated when the calculated values exceed the threshold settings.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, if desired.

13.16.3 Function block

SSCBR
I3P* TRVTOAL
BLOCK TRVTCAL
BLK_ALM SPRCHRAL
POSOPEN OPRALM
POSCLOSE OPRLOALM
ALMPRES IACCALM
LOPRES IACCLOAL
SPRCHRGN CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRGD NOOPRALM
CBCNTRST PRESALM
IACCRST PRESLO
SPCHTRST CBOPEN
TRVTRST CBINVPOS
52a

ANSI10000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000281 V1 EN

Figure 158: SSCBR function block

13.16.4 Signals
Table 337: SSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
ALMPRES BOOLEAN 0 Binary pressure alarm input
LOPRES BOOLEAN 0 Binary pressure input for lockout indication
Table continues on next page

412
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

SPRCHRGN BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started input
SPRCHRGD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged input
CBCNTRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset input for CB remaining life and operation counter
IACCRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated currents power
SPCHTRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset spring charge time
TRVTRST BOOLEAN 0 Reset travel time

Table 338: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRVTOAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
SPRCHRAL BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
OPRALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPRLOALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
IACCALM BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded alarm limit
IACCLOAL BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded lockout
limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB exceeded alarm limit
NOOPRALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
PRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
CBOPEN BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CBINVPOS BOOLEAN CB is in intermediate position
52a BOOLEAN CB is in closed position

13.16.5 Settings
Table 339: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Enabled Disable/Enable Operation
Enabled
AccDisLevel 5.00 - 500.00 A 0.01 10.00 RMS current setting below which energy
accumulation stops
CurrExp 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent setting for energy calculation
RatedFaultCurr 500.00 - 75000.00 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
RatedOpCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
Table continues on next page

413
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

AccCurrAlmLvl 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Setting of alarm level for accumulated
currents power
AccCurrLO 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout limit setting for accumulated currents
power
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life calculation
LifeAlmLevel 0 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
OpNumRatCurr 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated current
OpNumFaultCurr 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated fault
current
OpNumAlm 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm limit for number of operations
OpNumLO 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout limit for number of operations
tOpenAlm 0 - 200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for open travel time
tCloseAlm 0 - 200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for close travel time
OpenTimeCorr 0 - 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr 0 - 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for CB close travel time
DifTimeCorr -10 - 10 ms 1 5 Correction factor for time difference in
auxiliary and main contacts open time
tSprngChrgAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Setting of alarm for spring charging time
tPressAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
TPressLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
AccEnerInitVal 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Accumulation energy initial value
CountInitVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Operation numbers counter initialization value
CBRemLife 0 - 9999 - 1 5000 Initial value for the CB remaining life estimates
InactDayAlm 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm limit value of the inactive days counter
InactDayInit 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value of the inactive days counter
InactHourAlm 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time of the inactive days counter in hours

13.16.6 Monitored data

Table 340: SSCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CBOTRVT REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during
opening operation
CBCLTRVT REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during
closing operation
SPRCHRT REAL - s The charging time of the CB
spring
NO_OPR INTEGER - - Number of CB operation cycle
Table continues on next page

414
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

NOOPRDAY INTEGER - - The number of days CB has
been inactive
CBLIFE_A INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase A
CBLIFE_B INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase B
CBLIFE_C INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase C
IACC_A REAL - - Accumulated currents power
(Iyt), phase A
IACC_B REAL - - Accumulated currents power
(Iyt), phase B
IACC_C REAL - - Accumulated currents power
(Iyt), phase C

13.16.7 Operation principle

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes a number of metering and
monitoring subfunctions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the
Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable. The
operation counters are cleared when Operation is set to Disabled.

The operation of the functions can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

415
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

CBOPEN
POSCLOSE Circuit 52a
POSOPEN breaker
status CBINVPOS
I_A
I_B
I3P
I_B Operation
NOOPRALM
monitoring
BLK_ALM
BLOCK

Breaker TRVTOAL
contact
travel time TRVTCAL
TRVTRST

OPRALM
Operation
counter
OPRLOALM

IACCALM
Accumula-
ted energy
IACCLOAL
IACCRST

Breaker
CBLIFEAL
life time
CBCNTRST

Spring
SPRCHRGN charge SPRCHRAL
SPRCHRGD indication
TRVTRST

Gas PRESALM
pressure
ALMPRES supervision PRELO
LOPRES
GUID-FE21BBDC-57A6-425C-B22B-8E646C1BD932-ANSI V1 EN

Figure 159: Functional module diagram

13.16.7.1 Circuit breaker status

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that
is, whether the breaker is in an open, closed or intermediate position. The operation of

416
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

the breaker status monitoring can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

POSCLOSE CBOPEN
Contact
POSOPEN position CBINVPOS
indicator
I_A 52a
Phase
I_B current
I3P
I_C check

GUID-60ADC120-4B5A-40D8-B1C5-475E4634214B-ANSI V1 EN

Figure 160: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status
BLOCK and BLK_ALM inputs

Phase current check

This module compares the three phase currents with the setting AccDisLevel. If the
current in a phase exceeds the set level, information about phase is reported to the
contact position indicator module.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low, the
POSOPEN input is high and the current is zero. The circuit breaker is closed when the
POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the
intermediate position if both the auxiliary contacts have the same value, that is, both
are in the logical level "0" or "1", or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low
and the POSOPEN input is high, but the current is not zero.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs CBOPEN, CBINVPOS
and 52a for open, intermediate and closed position respectively.

13.16.7.2 Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction is to indicate if the
circuit breaker has not been operated for a long time.

The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring can be described by using a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

417
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

GUID-82C88B52-1812-477F-8B1A-3011A300547A V1 EN

Figure 161: Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm for
circuit breaker operation monitoring

Inactivity timer
The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive,
that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state. The calculation is done by
monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

The inactive days NOOPRDAY is available through the Monitored data view. It is also
possible to set the initial inactive days by using the InactDayInit parameter.

Alarm limit check

When the inactive days exceed the limit value defined with the InactDayAlm setting,
the NOOPRALM alarm is initiated. The time in hours at which this alarm is activated
can be set with the InactHourAlm parameter as coordinates of UTC. The alarm signal
NOOPRALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK.

13.16.7.3 Breaker contact travel time

The breaker contact travel time module calculates the breaker contact travel time for
the closing and opening operation. The operation of the breaker contact travel time
measurement can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-4D82C157-53AF-40C9-861C-CF131B49072B V1 EN

Figure 162: Functional module diagram for breaker contact travel time

418
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Traveling time calculator

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between auxiliary
contacts' state change. The open travel time is measured between the opening of the
POSCLOSE auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact.
Travel time is also measured between the opening of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact
and the closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact.

GUID-3AD25F5A-639A-4941-AA61-E69FA2357AFE V1 EN

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time gap t2 between
the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is
completely open. Therefore, in order to incorporate the time t1+t2, a correction factor
needs to be added with 10 to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with the
OpenTimeCorr (=t1+t2). The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the
CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.

The last measured opening travel time tTravelOpen and the closing travel time
tTravelClose are available through the Monitored data view on the LHMI or
through tools via communications.

Alarm limit check

When the measured open travel time is longer than the value set with the tOpenAlm
setting, the TRVTOAL output is activated. Respectively, when the measured close
travel time is longer than the value set with the tCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCAL
output is activated.

It is also possible to block the TRVTCAL and TRVTOAL alarm signals by activating the
BLOCK input.

419
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.16.7.4 Operation counter

The operation counter subfunction calculates the number of breaker operation cycles.
Both open and close operations are included in one operation cycle. The operation
counter value is updated after each open operation.

The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-FF1221A4-6160-4F92-9E7F-A412875B69E1 V1 EN

Figure 163: Functional module diagram for counting circuit breaker operations

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state change of the
binary auxiliary contacts inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NO_OPR is available through the Monitored data view on
the LHMI or through tools via communications. The old circuit breaker operation
counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the CountInitVal parameter
and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the clear menu from LHMI.

Alarm limit check

The OPRALM operation alarm is generated when the number of operations exceeds the
value set with the OpNumAlm threshold setting. However, if the number of operations
increases further and exceeds the limit value set with the OpNumLO setting, the
OPRLOALM output is activated.

The binary outputs OPRLOALM and OPRALM are deactivated when the BLOCK input is
activated.

13.16.7.5 Accumulation of Iyt

Accumulation of the Iyt module calculates the accumulated energy.

The operation of the module can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

420
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

I_A
Accumula- IACCLOAL
I_B Alarm limit
I3P ted energy
check
I_C calculator IACCALM

POSCLOSE

IACCRST

BLOCK

BLK_ALM
GUID-DAC3746F-DFBF-4186-A99D-1D972578D32A-ANSI V1 EN

Figure 164: Functional module diagram for calculating accumulative energy and
alarm

Accumulated energy calculator

This module calculates the accumulated energy Iyt [(kA)ys]. The factor y is set with the
CurrExp setting.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE input open events. It ends when the
RMS current becomes lower than the AccDisLevel setting value.

GUID-75502A39-4835-4F43-A7ED-A80DC7C1DFA2 V1 EN

Figure 165: Significance of theDiffTimeCorr setting

The DiffTimeCorr setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to accumulate the
energy from the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation
of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and when the delay is equal to
the value set with the DiffTimeCorr setting. When the setting is negative, the
calculation starts in advance by the correction time before the auxiliary contact opens.

The accumulated energy outputs IACC_A (_B, _C) are available through the
Monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. The values

421
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

can be reset by setting the Clear accum. breaking curr setting to true in the clear menu
from LHMI.

Alarm limit check

The IACCALM alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the value set
with the AccCurrAlmLvl threshold setting. However, when the energy exceeds the limit
value set with the AccCurrLO threshold setting, the IACCLOAL output is activated.

The IACCALM and IACCLOAL outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input
BLOCK.

13.16.7.6 Remaining life of the circuit breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to wearing.
The wearing in the breaker depends on the tripping current, and the remaining life of
the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the
manufacturer. The remaining life is decremented at least with one when the circuit
breaker is opened.

The operation of the remaining life of the circuit breaker subfunction can be described
by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

I_A
I_B CB life Alarm limit
I3P CBLIFEAL
estimator check
I_C

POSCLOSE

CBCNTRST

BLOCK

BLK_ALM
GUID-1565CD41-3ABF-4DE7-AF68-51623380DF29-ANSI V1 EN

Figure 166: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker

Circuit breaker life estimator

The circuit breaker life estimator module calculates the remaining life of the circuit
breaker. If the tripping current is less than the rated operating current set with the
RatedOpCurr setting, the remaining operation of the breaker reduces by one operation.
If the tripping current is more than the rated fault current set with the RatedFaultCurr
setting, the possible operations are zero. The remaining life due to the tripping current
in between these two values is calculated based on the trip curve given by the
manufacturer. The OpNumRatCurr and OPNumFaultCurr parameters set the number

422
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

of operations the breaker can perform at the rated current and at the rated fault current,
respectively.

The remaining life is calculated separately for all three phases and it is available as a
monitored data value CBLIFE_A (_B, _C). The values can be cleared by setting
the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from LHMI.

Clearing CB wear values also resets the operation counter.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of any phase drops below the LifeAlmLevel threshold setting,
the corresponding circuit breaker life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input
BLOCK. The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken into use by
writing the value to the Initial CB Rmn life parameter and resetting the value via the
clear menu from LHMI.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input
BLOCK.

13.16.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charged indication

The circuit breaker spring charged indication subfunction calculates the spring
charging time.

The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-37EB9FAE-8129-45AB-B9F7-7F7DC829E3ED V1 EN

Figure 167: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charged indication
and alarm

423
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

Spring charge time measurement

Two binary inputs, SPRCHRGN and SPRCHRGD, indicate spring charging started and
spring charged, respectively. The spring charging time is calculated from the difference
of these two signal timings.

The spring charging time SPRCHRT is available through the Monitored data view .

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the
tSprngChrgAlm setting, the subfunction generates the SPRCHRAL alarm.

It is possible to block the SPRCHRAL alarm signal by activating the BLOCK binary input.

13.16.7.8 Gas pressure supervision

The gas pressure supervision subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc
chamber.

The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

ALMPRES 0-tPressAlm
PRESALM
0

LOPRES 0-TPressLO
PRESLO
BLOCK 0
BLK_ALM
ANSI11000293-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000293 V1 EN

Figure 168: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure alarm

The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals LOPRES and ALMPRES.

Pressure alarm time delay

When the ALMPRES binary input is activated, the PRESALM alarm is activated after a
time delay set with the tPressAlm setting. The PRESALM alarm can be blocked by
activating the BLOCK input.

If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the LOPRES binary input becomes
high, activating the lockout alarm PRESLO after a time delay set with the TPressLO
setting. The PRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.

424
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from
the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLK_ALM.

13.16.8 Technical data

Table 341: SSCBR Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm levels for open and close (0-200) ms ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
travel time
Alarm levels for number of (0 - 9999) -
operations
Setting of alarm for spring (0.00-60.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
charging time
Time delay for gas pressure alarm (0.00-60.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
Time delay for gas pressure (0.00-60.00) s ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
lockout

13.17 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS

13.17.1 Functionality
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.

The measurand reporting interval set for MMXU function blocks, using the xDbRepInt
and xAngDbRepInt settings, must be coordinated with the event reporting interval set
for the IEC 60870-5-103 communication using setting CycMeasRepTime.

425
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

GUID-B8A3A04C-430D-4488-9F72-8529FAB0B17D V1 EN

Figure 169: Settings for CMMXU: 1

All input signals to IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS must be connected in application

configuration. Connect an input signals on IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS that is not
connected to the corresponding output on MMXU function, to outputs on the fixed
signal function block.

13.17.2 Function block

I103MEAS
BLOCK
I_A
I_B
I_C
IN
V_A
V_B
V_C
V_AB
V_N
P
Q
F

ANSI10000287-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000287 V1 EN

Figure 170: I103MEAS function block

426
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.17.3 Signals
Table 342: I103MEAS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
I_A REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase A
I_B REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase B
I_C REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase C
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
V_A REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase A
V_B REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase B
V_C REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase C
V_AB REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase A-B
V_N REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage VN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency

13.17.4 Settings
Table 343: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIa 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase A
MaxIb 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase B
MaxIc 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase C
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxVa 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase A
MaxVb 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase B
MaxVc 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase C
MaxVa-Vb 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase A-B
MaxVn 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage VN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVA 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Maximum system frequency

427
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.18 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR

13.18.1 Functionality
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
the private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.

13.18.2 Function block

I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9

IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN

Figure 171: I103MEASUSR function block

13.18.3 Signals
Table 344: I103MEASUSR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9

428
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.18.4 Settings
Table 345: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 25 Function type (1-255)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands (1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 1
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur2 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 2
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur3 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 3
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur4 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 4
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur5 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 5
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur6 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 6
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur7 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 7
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur8 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 8
10000000000.00
MaxMeasur9 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input 9
10000000000.00

13.19 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103

I103AR

13.19.1 Functionality
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

429
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.19.2 Function block

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_UNSU

IEC10000289-1-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V1 EN

Figure 172: I103AR function block

13.19.3 Signals
Table 346: I103AR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-
recloser
130_UNSU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing

13.19.4 Settings
Table 347: I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

13.20 Function status ground-fault for IEC 60870-5-103

I103EF

13.20.1 Functionality
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

430
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.20.2 Function block

I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV

IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN

Figure 173: I103EF function block

13.20.3 Signals
Table 348: I103EF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, ground-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, ground-fault reverse

13.20.4 Settings
Table 349: I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 160 Function type (1-255)

13.21 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

13.21.1 Functionality
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents
the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the general trip
signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.

The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.

431
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.21.2 Function block

I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_PU_A
65_PU_B
66_PU_C
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TR_A
70_TR_B
71_TR_C
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTR_A
87_MTR_B
88_MTR_C
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC

ANSI10000291-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000291 V1 EN

Figure 174: I103FLTPROT function block

13.21.3 Signals
Table 350: I103FLTPROT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_PU_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase A
65_PU_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase B
66_PU_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase C
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase A
70_TR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase B
71_TR_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase C
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
Table continues on next page

432
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 80, zone 3
81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 81, zone 4
82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 82, zone 5
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTR_A BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase A
87_MTR_B BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase B
88_MTR_C BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase C
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, ground-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, ground-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-
CALCMADE)

13.21.4 Settings
Table 351: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 128 Function type (1-255)

433
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.22 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED

13.22.1 Functionality
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined
for each input signal.

13.22.2 Function block

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4

IEC10000292-1-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V1 EN

Figure 175: I103IED function block

13.22.3 Signals
Table 352: I103IED Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

13.22.4 Settings
Table 353: I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

434
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.23 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV

13.23.1 Functionality
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

13.23.2 Function block

I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL

IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN

Figure 176: I103SUPERV function block

13.23.3 Signals
Table 354: I103SUPERV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm

13.23.4 Settings
Table 355: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

435
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Monitoring

13.24 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

13.24.1 Functionality
I103USRDEF is a function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor direction.
These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private
range, and the information number parameter for each input signal.

I103USRDEF can be used, for example in mapping the INF numbers not supported
directly by specific function blocks, like: INF17, INF18, INF20 or INF35. After
connecting the appropriate signals to the I103USRDEF inputs, the user must also set
the InfNo_x values in the settings.

GUID-391D4145-B7E6-4174-B3F7-753ADDA4D06F V1 EN

Figure 177: IEC 60870-5-103I103USRDEF:1

13.24.2 Function block

I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8

IEC10000294-1-en.vsd
IEC10000294 V1 EN

Figure 178: I103USRDEF function block

436
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 13
Monitoring

13.24.3 Signals
Table 356: I103USRDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8

13.24.4 Settings
Table 357: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 5 Function type (1-255)
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1 (1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for binary input 2 (1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for binary input 3 (1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for binary input 4 (1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for binary input 5 (1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for binary input 6 (1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for binary input 7 (1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for binary input 8 (1-255)

437
Technical Manual
438
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 14
Metering

Section 14 Metering

14.1 Pulse counter PCGGIO

14.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pulse counter PCGGIO -

S00947 V1 EN

14.1.2 Functionality
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the BIO (binary input/output) module
and then read by the PCGGIO function. A scaled service value is available over the
station bus.

14.1.3 Function block

PCGGIO
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL

IEC09000335-2-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V2 EN

Figure 179: PCGGIO function block

439
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Metering

14.1.4 Signals
Table 358: PCGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

Table 359: PCGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete
integration cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information

14.1.5 Settings
Table 360: PCGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse
ReportEvents counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit
per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 1 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

440
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 14
Metering

14.1.6 Monitored data

Table 361: PCGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Actual pulse counter value
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time and
status information

14.1.7 Operation principle

The registration of pulses is done according to setting of CountCriteria parameter on
one of the 9 binary input channels located on the BIO module. Pulse counter values are
sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.

The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter
values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All
active counters can also be read by IEC 61850.

Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental

counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit
format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range
0...+2147483647. The counter value is stored in semiretain memory.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality
consists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value can be done as a service value, that is, the value
frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database.
PCGGIO updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and
activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be time tagged,
and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value
was frozen by the function.

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to blocks, which are intended
to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the
BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to

441
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Metering

READ_VAL performs readings according to the setting of parameter CountCriteria.

The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
binary input output module (BIO).

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each PCGGIO function block has four binary output signals that can be used for event
recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. These signals and the
SCAL_VAL signal are accessable over IEC 61850.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the binary input module, where the
pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up,
in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during
last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There
are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The binary input module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time
and status information.

14.1.8 Technical data

Table 362: PCGGIO technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Cycle time for report of (1–3600) s -
counter value

442
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 14
Metering

14.2 Energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR

14.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Energy calculation and demand ETPMMTR -
handling
Wh
IEC10000169 V1 EN

14.2.2 Functionality
Outputs from the Measurements (CVMMXN) function can be used to calculate energy
consumption. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import and export
direction. Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values
are also calculated by the function.

14.2.3 Function block

ETPMMTR
P ACCST
Q EAFPULSE
STACC EARPULSE
RSTACC ERFPULSE
RSTDMD ERRPULSE
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC09000104 V1 EN

Figure 180: ETPMMTR function block

443
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Metering

14.2.4 Signals
Table 363: ETPMMTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

Table 364: ETPMMTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ACCST BOOLEAN Start of accumulating energy values
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set
interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set
interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set
interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set
interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for set
interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse
direction

444
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 14
Metering

14.2.5 Settings
Table 365: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled
StartAcc Disabled - - Disabled Activate the accumulation of energy values
Enabled
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time
tEnergyOffPls 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward accumulated
energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse accumulated
energy value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
accumulated energy value
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
accumulated energy value

Table 366: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000
EnZeroClamp Disabled - - Enabled Enable of zero point clamping detection
Enabled function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy

445
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Metering

14.2.6 Monitored data

Table 367: ETPMMTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward active
energy value
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse active
energy value
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward reactive
energy value
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse reactive
energy value
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active
power demand value for set
interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active
power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward reactive
power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reactive power
demand value in reverse
direction

14.2.7 Operation principle

The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
(CVMMXN) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to
measure the integrated energy. The energy values (in MWh and MVarh) are available
as output signals and also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter.
Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy
values can be reset from the local HMI reset menu or with input signal RSTACC.

The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set
time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over
communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD, MAXPRRD
for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until reset with input
signal RSTDMD or from the local HMI reset menu.

446
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 14
Metering

CVMMXN ETPMMTR
P_INST P
Q_INST Q

STACC
TRUE
RSTACC
FALSE
RSTDMD
FALSE

IEC09000106.vsd
IEC09000106 V1 EN

Figure 181: Connection of Energy calculation and demand handling function

(ETPMMTR) to the Measurements function (CVMMXN)

14.2.8 Technical data

Table 368: ETPMMTR technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Energy metering MWh Export/Import, MVArh Input from MMXU. No extra error
Export/Import at steady load

447
Technical Manual
448
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 15
Station communication

Section 15 Station communication

15.1 DNP3 protocol

DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to

communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.

15.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

15.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IEC 61850-8-1 - -

15.2.2 Functionality
The IED supports the communication protocols IEC 61850-8-1 and DNP3 over TCP/
IP. All operational information and controls are available through these protocols.
However, some communication functions, for example, horizontal communication
(GOOSE) between the IEDs, is only enabled by the IEC 61850-8-1 communication
protocol.

The IED is equipped with an optical Ethernet rear port for the substation
communication standard IEC 61850-8-1. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent
electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and
simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer communication according to GOOSE is
part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.

Disturbance files are accessed using the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. Disturbance files are
available to any Ethernet based application via FTP in the standard Comtrade format.
Further, the IED can send and receive binary values, double point values and measured
values (for example from MMXU functions), together with their quality bit, using the
IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE profile. The IED meets the GOOSE performance requirements
for tripping applications in substations, as defined by the IEC 61850 standard. The IED

449
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Station communication

interoperates with other IEC 61850-compliant IEDs, tools, and systems and
simultaneously reports events to five different clients on the IEC 61850 station bus.

The event system has a rate limiter to reduce CPU load. The event channel has a quota
of 10 events/second. If the quota is exceeded the event channel transmission is blocked
until the event changes is below the quota, no event is lost.

All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated communication modules. The IED is connected to Ethernet-based
communication systems via the fibre-optic multimode LC connector (100BASE-FX).

The IED supports SNTP and IRIG-B time synchronization methods with a time-
stamping resolution of 1 ms.

• Ethernet based: SNTP and DNP3

• With time synchronization wiring: IRIG-B

The IED supports IEC 60870-5-103 time synchronization methods with a time
stamping resolution of 5 ms.

15.2.3 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 369: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-FX LC Glass fibre (ST connector) EIA-485
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported

15.2.4 Settings
Table 370: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled
GOOSE Front - - LAN1 Port for GOOSE communication
LAN1

450
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 15
Station communication

15.2.5 Technical data

Table 371: Communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol TCP/IP Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
Protocol IEC 61850–8–1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol DNP3.0/TCP
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol, serial IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol, serial DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–19200 Bd

15.3 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

15.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Horizontal communication via GOOSE GOOSEINTLKR - -
for interlocking CV

451
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Station communication

15.3.2 Function block

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL

IEC09000099_1_en.vsd
IEC09000099 V1 EN

Figure 182: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

15.3.3 Signals
Table 372: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

452
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 15
Station communication

Table 373: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
Table continues on next page

453
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Station communication

Name Type Description

APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COM_VAL BOOLEAN Receive communication status is valid

15.3.4 Settings
Table 374: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

15.4 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

15.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV - -

454
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 15
Station communication

15.4.2 Function block

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ^OUT1
OUT1VAL
^OUT2
OUT2VAL
^OUT3
OUT3VAL
^OUT4
OUT4VAL
^OUT5
OUT5VAL
^OUT6
OUT6VAL
^OUT7
OUT7VAL
^OUT8
OUT8VAL
^OUT9
OUT9VAL
^OUT10
OUT10VAL
^OUT11
OUT11VAL
^OUT12
OUT12VAL
^OUT13
OUT13VAL
^OUT14
OUT14VAL
^OUT15
OUT15VAL
^OUT16
OUT16VAL

IEC09000236_en.vsd
IEC09000236 V1 EN

Figure 183: GOOSEBINRCV function block

15.4.3 Signals
Table 375: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

Table 376: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
OUT1VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
OUT2VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
Table continues on next page

455
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Station communication

Name Type Description

OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
OUT3VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
OUT4VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
OUT5VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
OUT6VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
OUT7VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
OUT8VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
OUT9VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
OUT10VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
OUT11VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
OUT12VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
OUT13VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
OUT14VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
OUT15VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
OUT16VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16

15.4.4 Settings
Table 377: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Disabled/Enabled
Enabled

456
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 15
Station communication

15.5 GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive

GOOSEVCTRCONF

15.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send GOOSEVCTRC - -
and receive ONF

15.5.2 Functionality
GOOSEVCTRCONF function is used to control the rate (in seconds) at which voltage
control information from TR8ATCC (90) is transmitted/received to/from other IEDs
via GOOSE communication. GOOSEVCTRCONF function is visible in PST.

The following voltage control information can be sent from TR8ATCC (90) via
GOOSE communication:
• BusV
• LoadAIm
• LoadARe
• PosRel
• SetV
• VCTRStatus
• X2

15.5.3 Settings
Table 378: GOOSEVCTRCONF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SendOperation Off - - On Send operation
On
SendInterval 0.1 - 5.0 s 0.1 0.3 Send interval
ReceiveOperation Off - - On Receive operation
On
ReceiveInterval 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.8 Receive interval

457
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Station communication

15.6 GOOSE voltage control receiving block

GOOSEVCTRRCV

15.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRR - -
CV

15.6.2 Functionality
GOOSEVCTRRCV component receives the voltage control data from GOOSE
network at the user defined rate.

This component also checks the received data validity, communication validity and test
mode. Communication validity will be checked upon the rate of data reception. Data
validity also depends upon the communication. If communication is invalid then data
validity will also be invalid. IEC 61850 also checks for data validity using internal
parameters which will also be passed to the DATAVALID output.

15.6.3 Function block

GOOSEVCTRRCV
BLOCK VCTR_RCV
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000252-1-en.vsd
IEC10000252 V1 EN

Figure 184: GOOSEVCTRRCV function block

15.6.4 Signals
Table 379: GOOSEVCTRRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block function

458
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 15
Station communication

Table 380: GOOSEVCTRRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
VCTR_RCV GROUP SIGNAL Output group connection to voltage control
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for output signals
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for output signals
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

15.6.5 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a

cross to receive the voltage control values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to

a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then the
DATAVALID output will be LOW.

15.7 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value

GOOSEDPRCV

15.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value

459
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Station communication

15.7.2 Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

15.7.3 Function block

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN

Figure 185: GOOSEDPRCV function block

15.7.4 Signals
Table 381: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 382: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

15.7.5 Settings
Table 383: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled

15.7.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

460
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 15
Station communication

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a

cross to receive the double point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to

a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then the
DATAVALID output will be LOW.

15.8 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

15.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value

15.8.2 Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

15.8.3 Function block

GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN

Figure 186: GOOSEINTRCV function block

461
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Station communication

15.8.4 Signals
Table 384: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 385: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

15.8.5 Settings
Table 386: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Off/On
Enabled

15.8.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a

cross to receive the integer values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to

a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then the
DATAVALID output will be LOW.

462
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 15
Station communication

15.9 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV

15.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value

15.9.2 Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

15.9.3 Function block

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN

Figure 187: GOOSEMVRCV function block

15.9.4 Signals
Table 387: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 388: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

463
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Station communication

15.9.5 Settings
Table 389: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Enable/Disable
Enabled

15.9.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a

cross to receive the float values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to

a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then the
DATAVALID output will be LOW.

15.10 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV

15.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value

464
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 15
Station communication

15.10.2 Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

15.10.3 Function block

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN

Figure 188: GOOSESPRCV function block

15.10.4 Signals
Table 390: GOOSESPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 391: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

15.10.5 Settings
Table 392: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Disabled - - Disabled Operation Off/On
Enabled

15.10.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

465
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Station communication

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a

cross to receive the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to

a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then the
DATAVALID output will be LOW.

15.11 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

15.11.1 Functionality
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer
rate up to 19200 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a
secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle.
The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication
messages.

Function blocks available for the IEC 60870–5–103 protocol are described in sections
Control and Monitoring.The Communication protocol manual for IEC 60870-5-103
includes the 650 series vendor specific IEC 60870-5-103 implementation.

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol can be configured to use either the optical serial or RS485
serial communication interface on the COM05 communication module. The functions
Operation selection for optical serial (OPTICALPROT) and Operation selection for
RS485 (RS485PROT) are used to select the communication interface.

See the Engineering manual for IEC103 60870-5-103 engineering

procedures in PCM600.

The functions IEC60870-5-103 Optical serial communication (OPTICAL103) and

IEC60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485 (RS485103) are used to configure

466
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 15
Station communication

the communication parameters for either the optical serial or RS485 serial
communication interfaces.

15.11.2 Settings
Table 393: OPTICAL103 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 31 - 1 1 Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
19200 Bd
RevPolarity Disabled - - Enabled Invert polarity
Enabled
CycMeasRepTime 1.0 - 1800.0 s 0.1 5.0 Cyclic reporting time of measurments
MasterTimeDomain UTC - - UTC Master time domain
Local
Local with DST
TimeSyncMode IEDTime - - IEDTime Time synchronization mode
LinMastTime
IEDTimeSkew
EvalTimeAccuracy Disabled - - 5ms Evaluate time accuracy for invalid time
5ms
10ms
20ms
40ms
EventRepMode SeqOfEvent - - SeqOfEvent Event reporting mode
HiPriSpont

Table 394: RS485103 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 31 - 1 1 Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
19200 Bd
CycMeasRepTime 1.0 - 1800.0 s 0.1 5.0 Cyclic reporting time of measurments
MasterTimeDomain UTC - - UTC Master time domain
Local
Local with DST
TimeSyncMode IEDTime - - IEDTime Time synchronization mode
LinMastTime
IEDTimeSkew
EvalTimeAccuracy Disabled - - 5ms Evaluate time accuracy for invalid time
5ms
10ms
20ms
40ms
EventRepMode SeqOfEvent - - SeqOfEvent Event reporting mode
HiPriSpont

467
Technical Manual
468
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

Section 16 Basic IED functions

16.1 Self supervision with internal event list

16.1.1 Functionality
The Self supervision with internal event list (INTERRSIG and SELFSUPEVLST)
function reacts to internal system events generated by the different built-in self-
supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list.

16.1.2 Internal error signals INTERRSIG

16.1.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Internal error signal INTERRSIG - -

16.1.2.2 Function block

INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
DISABLE

ANSI09000334-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000334 V1 EN

Figure 189: INTERRSIG function block

469
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.1.2.3 Signals
Table 395: INTERRSIG Output signals
Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
DISABLE BOOLEAN Application Disable

16.1.2.4 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

16.1.3 Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST

16.1.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST - -

16.1.3.2 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

16.1.4 Operation principle

The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The SELFSUPEVLST function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main

470
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General.

The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the Event
Viewer in PCM600. Both events from the Event list and the internal events are listed in
time consecutive order in the Event Viewer.

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free change-

over alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This
output contact is activated (where there is no fault) and deactivated (where there is a
fault) by the Internal Fail signal, see Figure 190. Also the software watchdog timeout
and the undervoltage detection of the PSM will deactivate the contact as well.

Power supply fault Power supply Fault

module

Watchdog I/O nodes

TX overflow
Master resp. Fault
Supply fault AND
ReBoot I/O
INTERNAL
FAIL

Internal Fail (CPU) Fault

CEM

I/O nodes = BIO

xxxx = Inverted signal

IEC09000390-1-en.vsd
IEC09000390 V1 EN

Figure 190: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free contact

471
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

LIODEV FAIL
OR
LIODEV STOPPED S e.g.BIO1- ERROR
R
LIODEV STARTED

IOM2- ERROR OR

WDOG STARVED SW Watchdog Error OR Internal Fail

RTE FATAL ERROR Runtime Exec Error

FTF FATAL ERROR File System Error OR

RTE APP FAILED S

Runtime App Error
R
RTE ALL APPS OK

GENTS RTC ERROR

S
Real Time Clock Error
GENTS RTC OK R

IEC 61850 NOT READY S

IEC 61850 Error
R OR Internal Warning
IEC 61850 READY DNP 3 Error

DNP 3 STARTUP
ERROR S
DNP 3 READY R

GENTS SYNC ERROR S

OR Time Synch Error
GENTS TIME RESET
R
GENTS SYNC OK

CHANGE LOCK ON
S
Change lock
CHANGE LOCK OFF R
SETTINGS CHANGED Setting groups changed

SETTINGS CHANGED Settings changed

ANSI09000381-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000381 V1 EN

Figure 191: Self supervision, function block internal signals

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
INTERRSIG function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system.
The signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary
outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other
functions if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in
the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from
the time synchronization block INTERRSIG.

472
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

16.1.4.1 Internal signals

SELFSUPEVLST function provides several status signals, that tells about the
condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED,
they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.

• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 396.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 397.

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 398.

Table 396: SELFSUPEVLST standard internal signals

Name of signal Description
Internal Fail Internal fail status
Internal Warning Internal warning status
Real Time Clock Error Real time clock status
Time Synch Error Time synchronization status
Runtime App Error Runtime application error status
Runtime Exec Error Runtime execution error status
IEC61850 Error IEC 61850 error status
SW Watchdog Error SW watchdog error status
Setting(s) Changed Setting(s) changed
Setting Group(s) Changed Setting group(s) changed
Change Lock Change lock status
File System Error Fault tolerant file system status
DNP3 Error DNP3 error status

Table 397: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description
PSM PSM-Error Power supply module error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformator module error status
COM COM-Error Communication module error status
BIO BIO-Error Binary input/output module error status
AIM AIM-Error Analog input module error status

473
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

Table 398: Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal Reasons for activation
Internal Fail This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; Real Time Clock Error, Runtime App Error,
Runtime Exec Error, SW Watchdog Error, File System Error
Internal Warning This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; IEC 61850 Error, DNP3 Error
Real Time Clock Error This signal will be active if there is a hardware error with the real
time clock.
Time Synch Error This signal will be active when the source of the time
synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a
time reset.
Runtime Exec Error This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do
some actions with the application threads. The actions can be
loading of settings or parameters for components, changing of
setting groups, loading or unloading of application threads.
IEC61850 Error This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed
in some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup,
for example.
SW Watchdog Error This signal will be activated when the IED has been under too
heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.
Runtime App Error This signal will be active if one or more of the application
threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The
states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example.
Setting(s) Changed This signal will generate an internal event to the internal event
list if any setting(s) is changed.
Setting Group(s) Changed This signal will generate an internal event to the Internal Event
List if any setting group(s) is changed.
Change Lock This signal will generate an internal Event to the Internal Event
List if the Change Lock status is changed
File System Error This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup
file are corrupted and cannot be recovered.
DNP3 Error This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any configuration
error during startup.

16.1.4.2 Run-time model

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure 192.

474
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

ADx
ADx_Low
x1

u1

x2

ADx
ADx_High Controller
x1

u1

x2

IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN

Figure 192: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal
conditions where the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An
alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it
improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.

The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller

function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input
signals. The ADx_Controller function is included in all IEDs equipped with an analog
input module. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is
the validation part that checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.
Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, that
is the signal that has the most suitable signal level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higher
ADx_HI.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of
the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will
be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.

The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

16.1.5 Technical data

Table 399: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out

475
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.2 Time synchronization

16.2.1 Functionality
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of absolute
time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it possible to
compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station automation system.

Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time

synchronization source.

16.2.2 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN

16.2.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGE - -
N

16.2.2.2 Settings
Table 400: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CoarseSyncSrc Disabled - - Disabled Coarse time synchronization source
SNTP
DNP
IEC60870-5-103
FineSyncSource Disabled - - Disabled Fine time synchronization source
SNTP
IRIG-B
SyncMaster Disabled - - Disabled Activate IED as synchronization master
SNTP-Server

16.2.3 Time synchronization via SNTP

16.2.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time synchronization via SNTP SNTP - -

476
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

16.2.3.2 Settings
Table 401: SNTP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address

16.2.4 Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN

16.2.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time system, summer time begins DSTBEGIN - -

477
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.2.4.2 Settings
Table 402: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 00:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time
00:30 starts
1:00
1:30
...
48:00

16.2.5 Time system, summer time ends DSTEND

16.2.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time system, summer time ends DSTEND - -

478
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

16.2.5.2 Settings
Table 403: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 00:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time
00:30 ends
1:00
1:30
...
48:00

16.2.6 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE

16.2.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE - -

16.2.6.2 Settings
Table 404: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoHalfHourUTC -24 - 24 - 1 0 Number of half-hours from UTC

479
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.2.7 Time synchronization via IRIG-B

16.2.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Time synchronization via IRIG-B IRIG-B - -

16.2.7.2 Settings
Table 405: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

16.2.8 Operation principle

16.2.8.1 General concepts

Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time
the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the
time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to
compensate for them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

The time system is based on a "software clock", which can be adjusted from external
time sources and a hardware clock. The protection and control functions will be timed
from a “hardware” clock, which runs independently from the “software” clock. See
figure 193.

480
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

External Time tagging and general synchronization

synchronization
sources Commu Protection
Events
Disabled - nication and control
functions
SNTP
IRIG-B Time-
regulator
DNP SW- time
IEC60870-5-103

ANSI09000210-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000210 V1 EN

Figure 193: Design of time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the “software” clock. When for example a status
signal is changed in the protection system with the function based on ”free
running“ hardware clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it
reaches the event recorder. Thus the “hardware” clock can run independently.

Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A
function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 194: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors. This gives the function the possibility
to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock after this
source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

481
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

16.2.8.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time
clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off,
the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time
the time will be lost completely.

Real-time clock at startup

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance SNTP and IRIG-B) gives
an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is set to
the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things happens with
each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as “fine”:

• If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, from its
origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used
directly for synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the
synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500
milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe
state and the clock is set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the
threshold, the clock is adjusted with 10 000 ppm until the offset is removed. With
an adjustment of 10 000 ppm, it takes 50 seconds to remove an offset of 500
milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the
time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and
only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

482
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

Rate accuracy
In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for
a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is
constant. Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive
time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally,
the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if
more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

16.2.8.3 Synchronization alternatives

Two main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The

synchronization message is applied either via any of the communication ports of the
IED as a telegram message including date and time or via IRIG-B.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an
IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a
reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate
properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The
SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary
inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.

SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at
least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable
source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.

Synchronization via IRIG-B

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating
if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.

To receive IRIG-B there are one dedicated connector for the IRIG-B port. IRIG-B 00x
messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, where x (in 00x) means a number
in the range of 1-7.

483
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

If the x in 00x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of

the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and
year information has to come from the tool or local HMI.

The IRIG-B input also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-zone.

It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B
module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages.

Synchronization via DNP

The DNP3 communication can be the source for the coarse time synchronization, while
the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy. See the
communication protocol manual for a detailed description of the DNP3 protocol.

Synchronization via IEC60870-5-103

The IEC60870-5-103 communication can be the source for the coarse time
synchronization, while the fine tuning of the time synchronization needs a source with
higher accuracy. See the communication protocol manual for a detailed description of
the IEC60870-5-103 protocol.

16.2.9 Technical data

Table 406: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse ± 1.0 ms typically
synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement ± 1.0 ms typically
values

16.3 Parameter setting group handling

16.3.1 Functionality
Use the four different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different
power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,
either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable
IED that can cope with a variety of power system scenarios.

484
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

16.3.2 Setting group handling SETGRPS

16.3.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Setting group handling SETGRPS - -

16.3.2.2 Settings
Table 407: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 ActiveSettingGroup
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
MaxNoSetGrp 1-4 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-4

16.3.3 Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP

16.3.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP - -

16.3.3.2 Function block

ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
GRP_CHGD

ANSI09000064-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000064 V1 EN

Figure 195: ACTVGRP function block

485
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.3.3.3 Signals
Table 408: ACTVGRP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active

Table 409: ACTVGRP Output signals

Name Type Description
GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active
GRP_CHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed

16.3.3.4 Settings

The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

16.3.4 Operation principle

Parameter setting groups (ACTVGRP) function has four functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these
inputs changes the active setting group. Five functional output signals are available for
configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is
always available.

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ACTVGRP function block.

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

486
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group
two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.

Every time the active group is changed, the output signal GRP_CHGD is sending a
pulse. This signal is normally connected to a SP16GGIO function block for external
communication.

The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.

ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1

IOx-Bly1 ACTVGRP
Æ ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
Æ ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3
Æ ACTGRP3 GRP3
IOx-Bly4
Æ ACTGRP4 GRP4

GRP_CHGD

ANSI09000063_1_en.vsd
ANSIC09000063 V1 EN

Figure 196: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also shows the five output signals, GRP1 to 4 for confirmation of
which group that is active, and the GRP_CHGD signal which is normally connected to
a SP16GGIO function block for external communication to higher level control systems.

16.4 Test mode functionality TESTMODE

16.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Test mode functionality TESTMODE - -

487
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.4.2 Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the
IED are automatically blocked. It is then possible to unblock every function(s)
individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.

When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal
operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later
restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions
blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will be done with
actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus
mistakes are avoided.

Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.

16.4.3 Function block

TESTMODE
INPUT ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING
NOEVENT

IEC09000219-1.vsd
IEC09000219 V1 EN

Figure 197: TESTMODE function block

16.4.4 Signals

Table 410: TESTMODE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Sets terminal in test mode when active

Table 411: TESTMODE Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN IED in test mode when active
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Test input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN Test mode setting is (Enabled) or not (Disabled)
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during testmode

488
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

16.4.5 Settings

Table 412: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TestMode Disabled - - Disabled Test mode in operation (Enabled) or not
Enabled (Disabled)
EventDisable Disabled - - Disabled Event disable during testmode
Enabled
CmdTestBit Off - - Off Command bit for test required or not during
On testmode

16.4.6 Operation principle

Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by

• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

• setting TestMode to Enabled in the local HMI, under Main menu/Tests/IED test
mode/1:TESTMODE.

While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is
activated. The other outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the
"Test mode: Enabled" state — input from configuration (OUTPUT output is activated)
or setting from local HMI (SETTING output is activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow PICKUP LED will flash and all functions are
blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event
signalling.

Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.

Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from
the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (output
ACTIVE is activated). When leaving the test mode, that is entering normal mode, these
blockings are disabled and everything is reset to normal operation. All testing will be
done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be
changed, thus no mistakes are possible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.

489
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a
parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED
will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also functions
that were unblocked before the change. During the re-entering to test
mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked for a short time,
which might lead to unwanted operations. This is only valid if the IED
is put in TEST mode by a binary input, not by local HMI.

The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when
a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact
29-30) or an FT switch finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to
the TESTMODE function block.

Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
maintenance test.

16.5 Change lock function CHNGLCK

16.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Change lock function CHNGLCK - -

16.5.2 Functionality
Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.

When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to modify the IED
configuration and setting will be denied and the message "Error: Changes blocked"
will be displayed on the local HMI; in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied
by active ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be configured so that it is
controlled by a signal from a binary input card. This guarantees that by setting that
signal to a logical zero, CHNGLCK is deactivated. If any logic is included in the signal
path to the CHNGLCK input, that logic must be designed so that it cannot permanently
issue a logical one to the CHNGLCK input. If such a situation would occur in spite of
these precautions, then please contact the local ABB representative for remedial action.

490
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

16.5.3 Function block

CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE

IEC09000062-1-en.vsd
IEC09000062 V1 EN

Figure 198: CHNGLCK function block

16.5.4 Signals
Table 413: CHNGLCK Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock

Table 414: CHNGLCK Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override

16.5.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

16.5.6 Operation principle

The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.

The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state
that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations

491
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

• Set system time

• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input Function
1 Activated
0 Deactivated

16.6 IED identifiers TERMINALID

16.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
IED identifiers TERMINALID - -

16.6.2 Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED
in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

16.6.3 Settings
Table 415: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
Table continues on next page

492
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
TechnicalKey 0 - 18 - 1 AA0J0Q0A0 Technical key

16.7 Product information

16.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Product information PRODINF - -

16.7.2 Functionality
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set,
settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important:

• IEDProdType
• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiers

They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).

16.7.3 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

493
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.8 Primary system values PRIMVAL

16.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

16.8.2 Functionality
The rated system frequency and phasor rotation are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary values/PRIMVAL in the local HMI and
PCM600 parameter setting tree.

16.8.3 Settings
Table 416: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=ABC - - Normal=ABC System phase rotation
Inverse=ACB

16.9 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

16.9.1 Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor
function, processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all
aspects of the analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency,
harmonic content, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by
the respective functions in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring).

The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
tool or the Application Configuration tool.

The SMAI function blocks for the 650 series of products are possible to
set for two cycle times either 5 or 20ms. The function blocks connected

494
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

to a SMAI function block shall always have the same cycle time as the
SMAI block.

16.9.2 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_x - -

16.9.3 Function block

SMAI_20_1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP1_A AI2
^GRP1_B AI3
^GRP1_C AI4
^GRP1_N AIN

ANSI09000137-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000137 V1 EN

Figure 199: SMAI_20_1 function block

SMAI_20_2
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP2_A AI2
^GRP2_B AI3
^GRP2_C AI4
^GRP2_N AIN

ANSI09000138-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000138 V1 EN

Figure 200: SMAI_20_2 to SMAI_20_12 function block

Note that input and output signals on SMAI_20_2 to SMAI_20_12 are

the same except for input signals GRPx_A to GRPx_N where x is equal
to instance number (2 to 12).

495
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.9.4 Signals
Table 417: SMAI_20_1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for
DFT calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1_A STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP1_B STRING - Second analog input used for phase B or BC quantity
GRP1_C STRING - Third analog input used for phase C or CA quantity
GRP1_N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

Table 418: SMAI_20_1 Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from
inputs 1-4
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are connected

Table 419: SMAI_20_12 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 12
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 12
GRP12_A STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP12_B STRING - Second analog input used for phase B or BC quantity
GRP12_C STRING - Third analog input used for phase C or CA quantity
GRP12_N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

496
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

Table 420: SMAI_20_12 Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from
inputs 1-4
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are connected

16.9.5 Settings
Table 421: SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

497
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

Table 422: SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Disabled - - Disabled Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to Current,

the MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that the
minimum level for current amplitude is based on VBase. For example,
if VBase is 20000, the minimum amplitude for current is 20000 * 10%
= 2000. This has practical affect only if the current measuring SMAI is
used as a frequency reference for the adaptive DFT. This is not
recommended, see the Setting guidelines.

Table 423: SMAI_20_12 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 424: SMAI_20_12 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Disabled - - Disabled Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase

498
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to Current,

the MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that the
minimum level for current amplitude is based on VBase. For example,
if VBase is 20000, the minimum amplitude for current is 20000 * 10%
= 2000. This has practical affect only if the current measuring SMAI is
used as a frequency reference for the adaptive DFT. This is not
recommended, see the Setting guidelines.

16.9.6 Operation principle

Every SMAI can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value),
either voltage or current. The AnalogInputType setting should be set according to the
input connected. The signal received by SMAI is processed internally and in total 244
different electrical parameters are obtained for example RMS value, peak-to-peak,
frequency and so on. The activation of BLOCK input resets all outputs to 0.

SMAI_20 does all the calculation based on nominal 20 samples per line frequency
period, this gives a sample frequency of 1 kHz at 50 Hz nominal line frequency and 1.2
kHz at 60 Hz nominal line frequency.

The output signals AI1...AI4 in SMAI_20_x function block are direct outputs of the
connected input signals GRPx_A, GRPx_B, GRPx_C and GRPx_N. GRPx_N is always
the neutral current. If GRPx_N is not connected, the output AI4 is zero. The AIN
output is the calculated residual quantity, obtained as a sum of inputs GRPx_A,
GRPx_B and GRPx_C but is equal to output AI4 if GRPx_N is connected. The
outputs signal AI1, AI2, AI3 and AIN are normally connected to the analog
disturbance recorder.

The SMAI function block always calculates the residual quantities in

case only the three phases (Ph-N) are connected (GRPx_N input not used).

The output signal AI3P in the SMAI function block is a group output signal
containing all processed electrical information from inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B,
GRPx_C and GRPx_N. Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected
to AI3P.

The input signal REVROT is used to reverse the phase order.

A few points need to be ensured for SMAI to process the analog signal correctly.

499
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

• It is not mandatory to connect all the inputs of SMAI function. However, it is very
important that same set of three phase analog signals should be connected to one
SMAI function.
• The sequence of input connected to SMAI function inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B,
GRPx_C and GRPx_N should normally represent phase A, phase B, phase C and
neutral currents respectively.
• It is possible to connect analog signals available as Ph-N or Ph-Ph to SMAI.
ConnectionType should be set according to the input connected.
• If the GRPx_N input is not connected and all three phase-to-ground inputs are
connected, SMAI calculates the neutral input on its own and it is available at the
AI3P and AIN outputs. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-
N.
• If any two phase-to-ground inputs and neutral currents are connected, SMAI
calculates the remaining third phase-to-neutral input on its own and it is available
at the AI3P output. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-N.
• If any two phase-to-phase inputs are connected, SMAI calculates the remaining
third phase-to-phase input on its own. It is necessary that the ConnectionType
should be set to Ph-Ph.
• All three inputs GRPx_x should be connected to SMAI for calculating sequence
components for ConnectionType set to Ph-N.
• At least two inputs GRPx_x should be connected to SMAI for calculating the
positive and negative sequence component for ConnectionType set to Ph-Ph.
Calculation of zero sequence requires GRPx_N input to be connected.
• Negation setting inverts (reverse) the polarity of the analog input signal. It is
recommended that use of this setting is done with care, mistake in setting may lead
to maloperation of directional functions.

Frequency adaptivity

SMAI function performs DFT calculations for obtaining various electrical parameters.
DFT uses some reference frequency for performing calculations. For most of the cases,
these calculations are done using a fixed DFT reference based on system frequency.
However, if the frequency of the network is expected to vary more than 2 Hz from the
nominal frequency, more accurate DFT results can be obtained if the adaptive DFT is
used. This means that the frequency of the network is tracked and the DFT calculation
is adapted according to that.

DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference need to be set appropriately for adaptive DFT

calculations.

DFTRefExtOut: Setting valid only for the instance of function block SMAI_20_1. It
decides the reference block for external output SPFCOUT.

DFTReference: Reference DFT for the block. This setting decides DFT reference for
DFT calculations. DFTReference set to InternalDFTRef uses fixed DFT reference

500
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

based on the set system frequency. DFTReference set to DFTRefGrpX uses DFT
reference from the selected group block, when own group selected adaptive DFT
reference will be used based on the calculated signal frequency from own group.
DFTReference set to External DFT Ref will use reference based on input signal
DFTSPFC.

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. However, if it is
necessary to use frequency adaptive DFT (DFTReference set to other
than default, referring current measuring SMAI) when no voltages are
available, note that the MinValFreqMeas setting is still set in reference
to VBase (of the selected GBASVAL group). This means that the
minimum level for the current amplitude is based on VBase. For
example, if VBase is 20000, the resulting minimum amplitude for
current is 20000 * 10% = 2000.

MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of the voltage in the selected Global Base voltage
group (GBASVAL:n, where 1<n<6).

Below example shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference
selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the
actual application.

501
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

Task time group 1 Task time group 2

(5ms) (20ms)
SMAI_20_1 SMAI_20_1
BLOCK SPFCOUT BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P DFTSPFC AI3P
REVROT AI1 REVROT AI1
^GRP1_A AI2 ^GRP1_A AI2
^GRP1_B AI3 ^GRP1_B AI3
^GRP1_C AI4 ^GRP1_C AI4
^GRP1_N AIN ^GRP1_N AIN

Task time group 1 (5ms) Task time group 2 (20ms)

SMAI instance 3 phase group SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI_20_1:1 1 SMAI_20_1:2 1
SMAI_20_2:1 2 SMAI_20_2:2 2
SMAI_20_3:1 3 SMAI_20_3:2 3
SMAI_20_4:1 4 SMAI_20_4:2 4
SMAI_20_5:1 5 SMAI_20_5:2 5
SMAI_20_6:1 6 DFTRefGrp7 SMAI_20_6:2 6
SMAI_20_7:1 7 SMAI_20_7:2 7
SMAI_20_8:1 8 SMAI_20_8:2 8
SMAI_20_9:1 9 SMAI_20_9:2 9
SMAI_20_10:1 10 SMAI_20_10:2 10
SMAI_20_11:1 11 SMAI_20_11:2 11
SMAI_20_12:1 12 SMAI_20_12:2 12

ANSI11000284-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000284 V1 EN

Figure 201: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT reference

Assume instance SMAI_20_7:1 in task time group 1 has been selected in the
configuration to control the frequency tracking (For the SMAI_20_x task time groups).
Note that the selected reference instance must be a voltage type.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings:

For SMAI_20_1:1

DFTRefExtOut set to DFTRefGrp7 so as to route SMAI_20_7:1 reference to the

SPFCOUT output, DFTReference set to DFTRefGrp7 so that SMAI_20_7:1 is used as
reference.

For SMAI_20_2:1 to SMAI_20_12:1

DFTReference set to DFTRefGrp7 so that SMAI_20_7:1 is used as reference.

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

502
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

For SMAI_20_1:2 to SMAI_20_12:2

DFTReference set to External DFT ref to use DFTSPFC input as reference.

16.10 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

16.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM - -

16.10.2 Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three-
phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

16.10.3 Function block

3PHSUM
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^G1AI3P* AI2
^G2AI3P* AI3
AI4

IEC09000201_1_en.vsd
IEC09000201 V1 EN

Figure 202: 3PHSUM function block

16.10.4 Signals
Table 425: 3PHSUM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second SMAI
SIGNAL

503
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

Table 426: 3PHSUM Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both SMAI
blocks
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 2 signals from both SMAI
blocks
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 3 signals from both SMAI
blocks
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 4 signals from both SMAI
blocks

16.10.5 Settings
Table 427: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref

Table 428: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Magnitude limit for frequency calculation in %
of Vbase

16.10.6 Operation principle

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.

16.11 Global base values GBASVAL

504
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

16.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

16.11.2 Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common
for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values
for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have six different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single
point for updating values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out
of the six sets of GBASVAL functions.

16.11.3 Settings

Table 429: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VBase 0.05 - 1000.00 kV 0.05 132.00 Global base voltage
IBase 1 - 50000 A 1 1000 Global base current
SBase 0.050 - 5000.000 MVA 0.001 229.000 Global base apparent power

16.12 Authority check ATHCHCK

16.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority check ATHCHCK - -

505
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.12.2 Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization
handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:

• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports

16.12.3 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

16.12.4 Operation principle

There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas
of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 430.

Table 430: Pre-defined user types

User type Access rights
SystemOperator Control from local HMI, no bypass
ProtectionEngineer All settings
DesignEngineer Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and
CMT)
UserAdministrator User and password administration for the IED

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management
within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED,
there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.

Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and

passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 12.

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be

able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

506
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

16.12.4.1 Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the IED User Management..

Once a user is created and written to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, using the
password assigned in the tool. Then the default user will be Guest.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user
defined!”

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main
menu/Configuration/HMI/Screen/1:SCREEN) elapses, the IED returns to Guest
state, when only reading is possible. By factory default, the display timeout is set to 60
minutes.

If one or more users are created with the IED User Management and written to the
IED, then, when a user attempts a Log on by pressing the key or when the user
attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window opens.

The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, one can
change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down” arrows.
After choosing the right user name, the user must press the key again. When it
comes to password, upon pressing the key, the following characters will show up:
“✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳”. The user must scroll for every letter in the password. After all the
letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and press the key
again.

At successful Log on, the local HMI shows the new user name in the status bar at the
bottom of the LCD. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log
on has failed, an "Error Access Denied" message opens. If a user enters an incorrect
password three times, that user will be blocked for ten minutes before a new attempt to
log in can be performed. The user will be blocked from logging in, both from the local
HMI and PCM600. However, other users are to log in during this period.

16.13 Authority status ATHSTAT

16.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority status ATHSTAT - -

507
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.13.2 Functionality
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.

16.13.3 Function block

ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON

IEC09000235_en_1.vsd
IEC09000235 V1 EN

Figure 203: ATHSTAT function block

16.13.4 Signals
Table 431: ATHSTAT Output signals
Name Type Description
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on

16.13.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)

16.13.6 Operation principle

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and
the user authorization:
• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated.

508
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

16.14 Denial of service

16.14.1 Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) are designed to limit
overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication
facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device.
All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads
can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of
malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

16.14.2 Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT

16.14.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Denial of service, frame rate control for DOSFRNT - -
front port

16.14.2.2 Function block

DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000133-1-en.vsd
IEC09000133 V1 EN

Figure 204: DOSFRNT function block

16.14.2.3 Signals
Table 432: DOSFRNT Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

509
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

16.14.2.4 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

16.14.2.5 Monitored data

Table 433: DOSFRNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets
received in normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets
received in polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets
discarded

16.14.3 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1

16.14.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Denial of service, frame rate control for DOSLAN1 - -
LAN1 port

510
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 16
Basic IED functions

16.14.3.2 Function block

DOSLAN1
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000134-1-en.vsd
IEC09000134 V1 EN

Figure 205: DOSLAN1 function block

16.14.3.3 Signals
Table 434: DOSLAN1 Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

16.14.3.4 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

16.14.3.5 Monitored data

Table 435: DOSLAN1 Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
Table continues on next page

511
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Basic IED functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets
received in normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets
received in polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP packets
discarded

16.14.4 Operation principle

The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) measures the IED load
from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control
and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs:
• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status
• WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
• ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

512
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

Section 17 IED physical connections

17.1 Protective ground connections

The IED shall be grounded with a 6 Gauge flat copper cable.

The ground lead should be as short as possible, less than 59.06 inches
(1500 mm). Additional length is required for door mounting.

ANSI11000286 V2 EN

Figure 206: The protective ground pin is located to the left of connector X101 on
the 3U full 19” case

513
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

17.2 Inputs

17.2.1 Measuring inputs

Table 436: Analog input modules
Terminal TRM TRM TRM TRM AIM AIM
6I + 4U 8I + 2U 4I + 1I + 5U 4I + 6U 6I + 4U 4I + 1I + 5U
X101-1, 2 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-3, 4 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-5, 6 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-7, 8 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A
X101-9, 10 1/5A 1/5A 0.1/0.5A 100/220V 1/5A 0.1/0.5A
X102-1, 2 1/5A 1/5A 100/220V 100/220V 1/5A 100/220V
X102-3, 4 100/220V 1/5A 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V
X102-5, 6 100/220V 1/5A 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V
X102-7, 8 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V
X102-9, 10 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V 100/220V

See the connection diagrams for information on the analog input

module variant included in a particular configured IED. The primary
and secondary rated values of the primary VT's and CT's are set for the
analog inputs of the IED.

17.2.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input

The auxiliary voltage of the IED is connected to terminals X420-1 and X420-2/3. The
terminals used depend on the power supply.

The permitted auxiliary voltage range of the IED is marked on top of the IED's LHMI.

Table 437: Auxiliary voltage supply of 110...250 V DC or 100...240 V AC

Case Terminal Description
3U half 19” X420-1 - Input
X420-3 + Input

514
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

Table 438: Auxiliary voltage supply of 48-125 V DC

Case Terminal Description
3U full 19” X420-1 - Input
X420-2 + Input

17.2.3 Binary inputs

The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatch
output contacts, to trigger the digital fault recorder or for remote control of IED
settings.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire.

Table 439: Binary inputs X304, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X304-1 Common - for inputs 1-3
X304-2 Binary input 1 + COM_101 BI1
X304-3 Binary input 2 + COM_101 BI2
X304-4 Binary input 3 + COM_101 BI3
X304-5 Common - for inputs 4-6
X304-6 Binary input 4 + COM_101 BI4
X304-7 Binary input 5 + COM_101 BI5
X304-8 Binary input 6 + COM_101 BI6
X304-9 Common - for inputs 7-9
X304-10 Binary input 7 + COM_101 BI7
X304-11 Binary input 8 + COM_101 BI8
X304-12 Binary input 9 + COM_101 BI9
X304-13 Common - for inputs 10-12
X304-14 Binary input 10 + COM_101 BI10
X304-15 Binary input 11 + COM_101 BI11
X304-16 Binary input 12 + COM_101 BI12

515
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

Table 440: Binary inputs X324, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X324-1 - for input 1 BIO_3 BI1
X324-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_3 BI1
X324-3 -
X324-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X324-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_3 BI2
X324-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_3 BI3
X324-7 -
X324-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X324-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_3 BI4
X324-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_3 BI5
X324-11 -
X324-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X324-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_3 BI6
X324-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_3 BI7
X324-15 -
X324-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X324-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_3 BI8
X324-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_3 BI9

Table 441: Binary inputs X329, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-1 - for input 1 BIO_4 BI1
X329-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_4 BI1
X329-3 -
X329-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X329-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_4 BI2
X329-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_4 BI3
X329-7 -
X329-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X329-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_4 BI4
X329-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_4 BI5
X329-11 -
Table continues on next page

516
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X329-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_4 BI6
X329-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_4 BI7
X329-15 -
X329-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X329-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_4 BI8
X329-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_4 BI9

Table 442: Binary inputs X334, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X334-1 - for input 1 BIO_5 BI1
X334-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_5 BI1
X334-3 -
X334-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X334-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_5 BI2
X334-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_5 BI3
X334-7 -
X334-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X334-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_5 BI4
X334-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_5 BI5
X334-11 -
X334-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X334-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_5 BI6
X334-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_5 BI7
X334-15 -
X334-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X334-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_5 BI8
X334-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_5 BI9

517
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

Table 443: Binary inputs X339, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X339-1 - for input 1 BIO_6 BI1
X339-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_6 BI1
X339-3 -
X339-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X339-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_6 BI2
X339-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_6 BI3
X339-7 -
X339-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X339-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_6 BI4
X339-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_6 BI5
X339-11 -
X339-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X339-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_6 BI6
X339-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_6 BI7
X339-15 -
X339-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X339-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_6 BI8
X339-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_6 BI9

17.3 Outputs

17.3.1 Outputs for tripping, controlling and signalling

Output contacts PO1, PO2 and PO3 are power output contacts used, for example, for
controlling circuit breakers.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire. Use 12 or
14 Gauge wire for CB trip circuit.

The connected DC voltage to outputs with trip circuit supervision

(TCM) must have correct polarity or the trip circuit supervision
TCSSCBR function will not operate properly.

518
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

Table 444:
Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
Power output 1, normally open (TCM)
X317-1 - PSM_102 BO1_PO_TCM
X317-2 +
Power output 2, normally open (TCM)
X317-3 - PSM_102 BO2_PO_TCM
X317-4 +
Power output 3, normally open (TCM)
X317-5 - PSM_102 BO3_PO_TCM
X317-6 +
X317-7 Power output 4, normally open PSM_102 BO4_PO
X317-8
X317-9 Power output 5, normally open PSM_102 BO5_PO
X317-10
X317-11 Power output 6, normally open PSM_102 BO6_PO
X317-12

Table 445: Output contacts X321, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X321-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_3 BO1_PO
X321-2
X321-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_3 BO2_PO
X321-4
X321-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_3 BO3_PO
X321-6

Table 446: Output contacts X326, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_4 BO1_PO
X326-2
X326-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_4 BO2_PO
Table continues on next page

519
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-4
X326-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_4 BO3_PO
X326-6

Table 447: Output contacts X331, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X331-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_5 BO1_PO
X331-2
X331-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_5 BO2_PO
X331-4
X331-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_5 BO3_PO
X331-6

Table 448: Output contacts X336, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X336-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_6 BO1_PO
X336-2
X336-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_6 BO2_PO
X336-4
X336-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_6 BO3_PO
X336-6

17.3.2 Outputs for signalling

Signal output contacts are used for signalling on starting and tripping of the IED. On
delivery from the factory, the pickup and alarm signals from all the protection stages
are routed to signalling outputs. See connection diagrams.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire.

520
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

Table 449: Output contacts X317, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X317-13 Signal output 1, normally open PSM_102 BO7_SO
X317-14
X317-15 Signal output 2, normally open PSM_102 BO8_SO
X317-16
X317-17 Signal output 3, normally open PSM_102 BO9_SO
X317-18

Table 450: Output contacts X321, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X321-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_3 BO4_SO
X321-8 Signal output 1
X321-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_3 BO5_SO
X321-10 Signal output 2
X321-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_3 BO6_SO
X321-12 Signal output 3
X321-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_3 BO7_SO
X321-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_3 BO8_SO
X321-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X321-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_3 BO9_SO
X321-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X321-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 451: Output contacts X326, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_4 BO4_SO
X326-8 Signal output 1
X326-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_4 BO5_SO
X326-10 Signal output 2
X326-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_4 BO6_SO
X326-12 Signal output 3
X326-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_4 BO7_SO
Table continues on next page

521
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_4 BO8_SO
X326-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X326-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_4 BO9_SO
X326-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X326-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 452: Output contacts X331, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X331-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_5 BO4_SO
X331-8 Signal output 1
X331-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_5 BO5_SO
X331-10 Signal output 2
X331-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_5 BO6_SO
X331-12 Signal output 3
X331-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_5 BO7_SO
X331-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_5 BO8_SO
X331-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X331-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_5 BO9_SO
X331-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X331-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 453: Output contacts X336, 3U full 19”

Terminal Description PCM600 info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X336-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_6 BO4_SO
X336-8 Signal output 1
X336-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_6 BO5_SO
X336-10 Signal output 2
X336-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_6 BO6_SO
X336-12 Signal output 3
X337-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_6 BO7_SO
X336-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_6 BO8_SO
X336-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
Table continues on next page

522
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

Terminal Description PCM600 info

Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X336-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_6 BO9_SO
X336-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X336-18 Signal output 6, common

17.3.3 IRF
The IRF contact functions as a change-over output contact for the self-supervision
system of the IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and one of
the two contacts is closed. When a fault is detected by the self-supervision system or
the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the closed contact drops off and the other contact
closes.

Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire.

Table 454: IRF contact X319

Case Terminal Description
3U full 19” X319-1 Closed; no IRF, and Vaux connected

X319-2 Closed; IRF, or Vaux disconnected

X319-3 IRF, common

17.4 Communication connections

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector. The connector is intended for
configuration and setting purposes.

Rear communication via the X1/LAN1 connector uses a communication module with
the optical LC Ethernet connection.

The HMI connector X0 is used for connecting an external HMI to the IED. The X0/
HMI connector must not be used for any other purpose.

Rear communication via the X8/EIA-485/IRIG-B connector uses a communication

module with the galvanic EIA-485 serial connection.

17.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector designed for point-to-point use.
The connector is intended for configuration and setting purposes. The interface on the

523
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

PC has to be configured in a way that it obtains the IP address automatically if the

DHCPServer is enabled in LHMI. There is a DHCP server inside IED for the front
interface only.

The events and setting values and all input data such as memorized values and
disturbance records can be read via the front communication port.

Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time.

• PCM600
• LHMI

The default IP address of the IED through this port is 10.1.150.3.

The front port supports TCP/IP protocol. A standard Ethernet CAT 5 crossover cable is
used with the front port.

17.4.2 Station communication rear connection

The default IP address of the IED through the Ethernet connection is 192.168.1.10.
The physical connector is X1/LAN1. The interface speed is 100 Mbps for the 100BASE-
FX LC alternative.

17.4.3 Optical serial rear connection

Serial communication can be used via optical connection in star topology. Connector
type is glass (ST connector). Connection's idle state is indicated either with light on or
light off. The physical connector is X9/Rx,Tx.

17.4.4 EIA-485 serial rear connection

The communication module follows the EIA-485 standard and is intended to be used in
multi-point communication.

Table 455: EIA-485 connections

Pin Description
1 GNDC
2 GND
3 RS485 RXTERM
4 RS485 RX-
5 RS485 RX+
6 RS485 TX+
Table continues on next page

524
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

Pin Description
7 RS485 RXTERM
8 RS485 TX-
9 RS485 GND
10 RS485 GND
11 IRIG-B -
12 IRIG-B +
13 GNDC
14 GND

17.4.5 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 456: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-FX LC Glass fibre (ST connector) EIA-485
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported

17.4.6 Recommended industrial Ethernet switches

ABB recommends three third-party industrial Ethernet switches.

• RuggedCom RS900
• RuggedCom RS1600
• RuggedCom RSG2100

17.5 Connection diagrams

The 6U casing is not included in this release of the 650 series.

525
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

17.5.1 Connection diagrams for 650 series

IEC12000584 V1 EN

526
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

IEC12000585 V1 EN

527
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

IEC12000586 V1 EN

528
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

IEC12000587 V1 EN

529
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

IEC12000588 V1 EN

530
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

IEC12000589 V1 EN

531
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

IEC12000590 V1 EN

532
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

IEC12000591 V1 EN

533
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

IEC12000592 V1 EN

534
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

17.5.2 Connection diagrams for RET650 A01A

1MRK006502-GC-1-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

535
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-GC-2-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

536
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-GC-3-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

537
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-GC-4-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

538
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-GC-5-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

539
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-GC-6-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

540
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-GC-7-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

541
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-GC-8-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

542
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-GC-9-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

543
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

17.5.3 Connection diagrams for RET650 A05A

1MRK006502-FC-1-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

544
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-FC-2-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

545
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-FC-3-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

546
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-FC-4-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

547
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-FC-5-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

548
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-FC-6-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

549
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-FC-7-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

550
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-FC-8-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

551
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-FC-9-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

552
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-FC-10-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

553
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

17.5.4 Connection diagrams for RET650 A07A

1MRK006502-EC-1-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

554
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-EC-2-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

555
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-EC-3-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

556
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-EC-4-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

557
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-EC-5-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

558
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-EC-6-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

559
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-EC-7-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

560
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 17
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-EC-8-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

561
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED physical connections

1MRK006502-EC-9-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

562
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 18
Technical data

Section 18 Technical data

18.1 Dimensions

Table 457: Dimensions of the IED - 3U full 19" rack

Description Value
Width 17.40 inches (442 mm)
Height 5.20 inches (132 mm), 3U
Depth 9.82 inches (249.5 mm)
Weight box <22.04 lbs (10 kg)
Weight LHMI 2.87 lbs (1.3 kg)

18.2 Power supply

Table 458: Power supply

Description 600PSM02 600PSM03
Vn 48, 60, 110, 125 V DC 100, 110, 120, 220, 240 V AC,
50 and 60 Hz
110, 125, 220, 250 V DC
Vnvariation 80...120% of Vn (38.4...150 V 85...110% of Vn (85...264 V AC)
DC)
80...120% of Vn (88...300 V DC)

Maximum load of auxiliary voltage 35 W for DC

supply 40 W for AC
Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 and 120 Hz)
Maximum interruption time in the 50 ms at Vn
auxiliary DC voltage without
resetting the IED

563
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Technical data

18.3 Energizing inputs

Table 459: Energizing inputs

Description Value
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Operating range Rated frequency ± 5 Hz
Current inputs Rated current, In 0.1/0.5 A1) 1/5 A2)

Thermal withstand capability:

• Continuously 4A 20 A

• For 1 s 100 A 500 A *)

• For 10 s 20 A 100 A

Dynamic current withstand:

• Half-wave value 250 A 1250 A

Input impedance <100 mΩ <20 mΩ

Voltage inputs Rated voltage, Vn 100 V AC/ 110 V AC/ 115 V AC/ 120 V AC

Voltage withstand:
• Continuous 420 V rms

• For 10 s 450 V rms

Burden at rated voltage <0.05 VA

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

1) Residual current
2) Phase currents or residual current

18.4 Binary inputs

Table 460: Binary inputs

Description Value
Operating range Maximum input voltage 300 V DC
Rated voltage 24...250 V DC
Current drain 1.6...1.8 mA
Power consumption/input <0.38 W
Threshold voltage 15...221 V DC (parametrizable in the range in steps of
1% of the rated voltage)

564
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 18
Technical data

18.5 Signal outputs

Table 461: Signal output and IRF output

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 5A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 10 A
Make and carry 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤0.5 A/≤0.1 A/≤0.04 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at V< 48/110/220 V DC

18.6 Power outputs

Table 462: Power output relays without TCM function

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at V< 48/110/220 V DC

Table 463: Power output relays with TCM function

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at V< 48/110/220 V DC
Control voltage range 20...250 V DC
Current drain through the monitoring circuit ~1.0 mA
Minimum voltage over the TCS contact 20 V DC

565
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Technical data

18.7 Data communication interfaces

Table 464: Ethernet interfaces

Ethernet interface Protocol Cable Data transfer rate
100BASE-TX - CAT 6 S/FTP or better 100 MBits/s
100BASE-FX TCP/IP protocol Fibre-optic cable with 100 MBits/s
LC connector

Table 465: Fibre-optic communication link

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path Distance
attenuation1)
1300 nm MM 62.5/125 LC <8 dB 2 km
μm glass fibre
core

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together

Table 466: X8/IRIG-B and EIA-485 interface

Type Protocol Cable
Screw terminal, pin row IRIG-B Shielded twisted pair cable
header Recommended: CAT 5, Belden RS-485 (9841-
9844) or Alpha Wire (Alpha 6222-6230)
Screw terminal, pin row Shielded twisted pair cable
header Recommended: DESCAFLEX RD-
H(ST)H-2x2x0.22mm2, Belden 9729, Belden 9829

Table 467: IRIG-B

Type Value Accuracy
Input impedance 430 Ohm —
Minimum input voltage 4.3 V —
HIGH
Maximum input voltage 0.8 V —
LOW

566
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 18
Technical data

Table 468: EIA-485 interface

Type Value Conditions
Minimum differential 1.5 V —
driver output voltage
Maximum output current 60 mA —
Minimum differential 0.2 V —
receiver input voltage
Supported bit rates 300, 600, 1200, 2400, —
4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200
Maximum number of 32 —
650 IEDs supported on
the same bus
Max. cable length 925 m (3000 ft) Cable: AWG24 or better, stub lines shall be avoided

Table 469: Serial rear interface

Type Counter connector
Serial port (X9) Optical serial port, type ST for IEC 60870-5-103
and DNP serial

Table 470: Optical serial port (X9)

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path attenuation1)
820 nm MM 62,5/125 µm ST 6.8 dB (approx. 1700m length with 4 db /
glass fibre core km fibre attenuation)
820 nm MM 50/125 µm ST 2.4 dB (approx. 600m length with 4 db /
glass fibre core km fibre attenuation)

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by fibre

18.8 Enclosure class

Table 471: Degree of protection of rack-mounted IED

Description Value
Front side IP 40
Rear side, connection terminals IP 20

Table 472: Degree of protection of the LHMI

Description Value
Front and side IP40

567
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Technical data

18.9 Environmental conditions and tests

Table 473: Environmental conditions

Description Value
Operating temperature range -25...+55ºC (continuous)
Short-time service temperature range -40...+70ºC (<16h)
Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance
outside the temperature range of -25...+55ºC
Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure 12.47...15.37 psi (86...106 kPa)
Altitude up to 6561.66 feet (2000 m)
Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85ºC

Table 474: Environmental tests

Description Type test value Reference
Cold tests operation 96 h at -25ºC IEC 60068-2-1/ANSI
16 h at -40ºC C37.90-2005 (chapter 4)

storage 96 h at -40ºC
Dry heat tests operation 16 h at +70ºC IEC 60068-2-2/ANSI
C37.90-2005 (chapter 4)

storage 96 h at +85ºC
Damp heat tests steady state 240 h at +40ºC IEC 60068-2-78
humidity 93%

cyclic 6 cycles at +25 to +55ºC IEC 60068-2-30

humidity 93...95%

568
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 19
IED and functionality tests

Section 19 IED and functionality tests

19.1 Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Table 475: Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Description Type test value Reference
100 kHz and 1 MHz burst IEC 61000-4-18, level 3
disturbance test IEC 60255-22-1
ANSI C37.90.1-2002
• Common mode 2.5 kV

• Differential mode 2.5 kV

Electrostatic discharge test IEC 61000-4-2, level 4

IEC 60255-22-2
ANSI C37.90.3-2001
• Contact discharge 8 kV

• Air discharge 15 kV

Radio frequency interference

tests
• Conducted, common mode 10 V (emf), f=150 kHz...80 MHz IEC 61000-4-6 , level 3
IEC 60255-22-6
• Radiated, amplitude- 20 V/m (rms), f=80...1000 MHz IEC 61000-4-3, level 3
modulated and f=1.4...2.7 GHz IEC 60255-22-3
ANSI C37.90.2-2004
Fast transient disturbance tests IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-22-4, class A
ANSI C37.90.1-2002
• Communication ports 4 kV

• Other ports 4 kV

Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5, level 3/2

IEC 60255-22-5
• Communication 1 kV line-to-ground

• Other ports 2 kV line-to-ground, 1 kV line-to-

line
Power frequency (50 Hz) IEC 61000-4-8, level 5
magnetic field
Table continues on next page

569
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED and functionality tests

Description Type test value Reference

• 3s 1000 A/m

• Continuous 100 A/m

Pulse magnetic field immunity 1000A/m IEC 61000–4–9, level 5

test
Power frequency immunity test IEC 60255-22-7, class A
IEC 61000-4-16
• Common mode 300 V rms

• Differential mode 150 V rms

Voltage dips and short Dips: IEC 60255-11

interruptionsc on DC power 40%/200 ms IEC 61000-4-11
supply 70%/500 ms
Interruptions:
0-50 ms: No restart
0...∞ s : Correct behaviour at
power down
Voltage dips and interruptions Dips: IEC 60255–11
on AC power supply 40% 10/12 cycles at 50/60 Hz IEC 61000–4–11
70% 25/30 cycles at 50/60 Hz
Interruptions:
0–50 ms: No restart
0...∞ s: Correct behaviour at
power down
Electromagnetic emission tests EN 55011, class A
IEC 60255-25
• Conducted, RF-emission
(mains terminal)

0.15...0.50 MHz < 79 dB(µV) quasi peak

< 66 dB(µV) average
0.5...30 MHz < 73 dB(µV) quasi peak
< 60 dB(µV) average
• Radiated RF-emission

30...230 MHz < 40 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,

measured at 10 m distance
230...1000 MHz < 47 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,
measured at 10 m distance

570
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 19
IED and functionality tests

19.2 Insulation tests

Table 476: Insulation tests

Description Type test value Reference
Dielectric tests: IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
• Test voltage 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
1 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min,
communication
Impulse voltage test: IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
• Test voltage 5 kV, unipolar impulses,
waveform 1.2/50 μs, source
energy 0.5 J
1 kV, unipolar impulses,
waveform 1.2/50 μs, source
energy 0.5 J, communication
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-5
measurements ANSI C37.90-2005
• Isolation resistance >100 MΏ, 500 V DC

Protective bonding resistance IEC 60255-27

• Resistance <0.1 Ώ (60 s)

19.3 Mechanical tests

Table 477: Mechanical tests

Description Reference Requirement
Vibration response tests IEC 60255-21-1 Class 2
(sinusoidal)
Vibration endurance test IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock response test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Shock withstand test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Bump test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic test IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2

19.4 Product safety

571
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
IED and functionality tests

Table 478: Product safety

Description Reference
LV directive 2006/95/EC
Standard EN 60255-27 (2005)

19.5 EMC compliance

Table 479: EMC compliance

Description Reference
EMC directive 2004/108/EC
Standard EN 50263 (2000)
EN 60255-26 (2007)

572
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

20.1 Application

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in different

points in the network different time delays for the different relays are normally used.
The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more sophisticated
applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are
shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections connected in series.

IPickup IPickup IPickup

xx05000129_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000129 V1 EN

Figure 207: Three overcurrent protections connected in series

Stage 3

Time
Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd

IEC05000130 V1 EN

Figure 208: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

573
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

Time

Fault point
position

en05000131.vsd

IEC05000131 V1 EN

Figure 209: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time
and still assure the selectivity between protections.

To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:

• Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated

• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
• Reset time of the protection
• Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

574
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A1 B1
Feeder

51 51

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

en05000132_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000132 V1 EN

Figure 210: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips

t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens

t=t3 is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).
When the fault occurs the protections pickup to detect the fault current. After the time
t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its
delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between
the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the
B1 circuit breaker.

At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault
current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The
maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the
timer of protection A1 is active.

At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped.

In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible
when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of
delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following
applications:

575
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, picks
up and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the
release function.

20.2 Operation principle

20.2.1 Mode of operation

The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available.

If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value , a timer, according to the
selected operating mode, is started. The component always uses the maximum of the
three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations.

In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached
or until the current drops below the reset value (pickup value minus the hysteresis) and
the reset time has elapsed.

The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 108.

æ ö
ç ÷
t [s ] = ç + B ÷ × td
A
ç P ÷
çç æç ö
i
÷ -C ÷÷
è è Pickupn ø ø
EQUATION1640 V1 EN (Equation 108)

where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.

576
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set
pickup level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

æ P
ö
( top - B × td ) × çç æçè Pickupn
i ö
÷
ø
-C÷
÷
= A × td
è ø
EQUATION1642 V1 EN (Equation 109)

where:
top is the operating time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to
equation 110, in addition to the constant time delay:

t
ææ i ö
P
ö
òçç
ç è Pickupn ÷ø
0è
- C ÷ × dt ³ A × td
÷
ø
EQUATION1643 V1 EN (Equation 110)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

n æ æ i ( j ) öP ö
Dt × å çç
ç Pickupn ÷ø
j =1 è è
- C ÷ ³ A × td
÷
ø
EQUATION1644 V1 EN (Equation 111)

where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been
detected, that is, when

i
>1
Pickupn
EQUATION1646 V1 EN

Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC
and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.

577
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 211.

Operate
time

tMin

Current
IMin
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN

Figure 211: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set
to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the
operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.

The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA
relay RI. The curve is described by equation 113:

578
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

æ ö
ç td ÷
t [s ] = ç ÷
çç 0.339 - 0.235 × Pickupn ÷÷
è i ø
EQUATION1647 V1 EN (Equation 113)

where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n
td is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection
RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual
ground-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive ground faults. The
curve is described by equation 114:

æ i ö
[ ]
t s = 5.8 - 1.35 × ln ç ÷
è td × Pickupn ø
EQUATION1648 V1 EN (Equation 114)

where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current

The timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set pickup current
level minus the hysteresis.

20.3 Inverse time characteristics

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate

time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

579
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

Table 480: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 -

æ A ö
t = ç P + B ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1651 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02

Table 481: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 -

æ A ö
t = ç P ÷ × td
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1653 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

580
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

Table 482: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

1
t = × td
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1656 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è td ø
EQUATION1657 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 483: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps ±5% +60 ms
of 0.01
td
t =
æ V - VPickup ö
ç ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1661 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured

Type B curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
td × 480
t =
2.0
æ V - VPickup ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1662 V1 EN

Type C curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
td × 480
t =
3.0
æ V - VPickup ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1663 V1 EN

581
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

Table 484: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps ±5% +60 ms
of 0.01
td
t =
æ VPickup - V ö
ç ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1658 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured

Type B curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
td × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ VPickup - V ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1659 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured

Table 485: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps ±5% +70 ms
of 0.01
td
t =
æ V - VPickup ö
ç ÷
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1661 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured

Type B curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
td × 480
t =
2.0
æ V - VPickup ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1662 V1 EN

Type C curve: td = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
td × 480
t =
3.0
æ V - VPickup ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è VPickup ø
EQUATION1663 V1 EN

582
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070750 V2 EN

Figure 212: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

583
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070751 V2 EN

Figure 213: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

584
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070752 V2 EN

Figure 214: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

585
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070753 V2 EN

Figure 215: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

586
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070817 V2 EN

Figure 216: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

587
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070818 V2 EN

Figure 217: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

588
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070819 V2 EN

Figure 218: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

589
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070820 V2 EN

Figure 219: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

590
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070821 V2 EN

Figure 220: IEC Very inverse time characteristics

591
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070822 V2 EN

Figure 221: IEC Inverse time characteristics

592
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070823 V2 EN

Figure 222: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

593
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070824 V2 EN

Figure 223: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

594
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070825 V2 EN

Figure 224: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

595
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

A070826 V2 EN

Figure 225: RI-type inverse time characteristics

596
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

A070827 V2 EN

Figure 226: RD-type inverse time characteristics

597
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN

Figure 227: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

598
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN

Figure 228: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

599
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN

Figure 229: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

600
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 20
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN

Figure 230: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

601
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Time inverse characteristics

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN

Figure 231: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

602
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 21
Glossary

Section 21 Glossary

AC Alternating current
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BI Binary input
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CB Circuit breaker
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body within
the International Telecommunications Union.
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two
twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both
directions

603
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Glossary

COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format

for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111,
1999 / IEC60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four
twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in
both directions and two for transmitting clock signals
CPU Central processor unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std. 1379-2000
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association

604
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 21
Glossary

EMC Electromagnetic compatibility

EMF (Electric Motive Force)
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data
and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to
seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by
local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver
module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector Plastic fiber connector
type
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements
for protective current transformers for transient performance

605
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Glossary

IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard

IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on
twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.
References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the
electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs)
Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in
the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function. One
instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind
but has a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word
"instance" is sometimes defined as an item of information that is
representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a
function in the IED is representative of a type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol
suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless,
best-effort packet-switching protocol. It provides packet
routing, fragmentation and reassembly through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC standard
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level
IP20- Protected against solidforeign objects of12.5mm diameter
andgreater.
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP40-
Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and
greater.
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level
IP54-Dust-protected,protected againstsplashing water.
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union

606
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 21
Glossary

LAN Local area network

LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally
developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OLTC On-load tap changer
OV Over-voltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching when
the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the
set reach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps it should not
have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity
to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX

607
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Glossary

RCA Relay characteristic angle

RFPP Resistance for phase-to-phase faults
Resistance for phase-to-ground faults
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in
point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant
impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize computer
clocks on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to
have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a
network. Each embedded node can instead synchronize with a
remote clock, providing the required accuracy.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral/Wye point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport
layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.

608
Technical Manual
1MRK 504 129-UUS B Section 21
Glossary

TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de

facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for Internet working
and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance
version of a BNC connector
TPZ, TPY, TPX, Current transformer class according to IEC
TPS
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching when
the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the
set reach. The relay does not “see” the fault but perhaps it
should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination
of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time
1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit,
the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the
Earth's irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock,
and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and
ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet
stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the
residual or the -fault current

609
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 504 129-UUS B
Glossary

3VO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the
residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

610
Technical Manual
611
Contact us

1MRK 504 129-UUS B © Copyright 2012 ABB. All rights reserved.

ABB Inc.
1021 Main Campus Drive
Raleigh, NC 27606, USA
Phone Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365,
menu option #8

ABB Inc.
3450 Harvester Road
Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada
Phone Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365,
menu option #8

ABB Mexico S.A. de C.V.

Paseo de las Americas No. 31 Lomas
Verdes 3a secc.
53125, Naucalpan, Estado De Mexico,
MEXICO
Phone (+1) 440-585-7804, menu
option #8